Home

Canon C70 All in One Printer User Manual

1. RX Report You can set the MultiPASS C70 to print a reception RX report every time you receive a fax gt RX REPORT pp 14 7 14 8 27 12 2000 14 59 FAX 123 4567 CANON 001 N PO 7 RX REPORT a HARK EER ARERR ER REER REE ze i oO RECEPTION OK N TX RX NO 5004 e CONNECTION TEL 905 795 1111 Q CONNECTION ID Canon CANADA o ST TIME 27 12 14 59 o USAGE T 01 59 PGS 4 RESULT OK For colour receptions the message COLOR RX is printed next to the TX RX NO Chapter 11 Reports and Lists 11 9 Memory Clear Report If a power cut occurs all documents stored in memory will be deleted When power is restored to the MultiPASS C70 the Memory Clear Report will automatically be printed out listing the documents that were deleted from memory as a result of the power cut 27 12 2000 17 23 FAX 123 4567 CANON ld 001 E E E E E E E JE JE E E E JE FE IOI ICICI IO III Ie ae MEMORY CLEAR REPORT a4 FOI III IOI III IOI IO III Ie MEMORY FILES DELETED TX RX NO MODE CONNECTION TEL ID PGS SET TIME 0023 B CAST 01 Canon CANADA 3 27 12 16 03 05 Canon OPTICS 0024 TRANSMIT GOL k 32 Canon UK 1 27 12 16 08 11 10 Reports and Lists Chapter 11 Chapter 12 Maintenance Your MultiPASS C70 requires no maintenance other than periodic cleaning and replacement of BJ cartridges or BJ tanks EV MultiPASS C70 Guidelines ss
2. normal on cr py 24 t j YELLOW 24 aa jis 24 H t MAGENTA 24 T E oo 24 i t CYAN 64 F 24 i H BLACK Q cz fe fe o 2 Chapter 12 Maintenance 12 15 The following sample shows the nozzle check pattern when the BX 20 Black BJ cartridge is installed If results are unsatisfactory clean the BJ cartridge print head as explained on the next page Then print the nozzle check pattern again to check the BJ cartridge 12 16 Maintenance Chapter 12 A CAUTION A Note IN Note Cleaning the BJ Cartridge Print Head If your printouts become faint or streaked or if their quality otherwise deteriorates clean the print head To maintain the best possible print quality you need to clean the BJ cartridge print head from time to time Cleaning the print head consumes a small amount of ink Cleaning too often reduces the amount of ink in the BJ cartridge If your printing is faint you can often correct the problem by adjusting the print contrast and printing speed 1 Press Function 2 Press Cleaning NOZZLE CHECK 3 Use V or A to select HEAD CLEANING HEAD CLEANING 4 Press Set 2 The MultiPASS C70 cleans the print head When cleaning ends the MultiPASS C70 returns to standby mode You can perform the cleaning procedure up to five consecutive ti
3. 13 20 Troubleshooting Chapter 13 The multi purpose tray may be empty 1 Make sure paper is loaded in the multi purpose tray p 2 40 The sending fax machine may not send the CNG signal that tells the MultiPASS C70 that the incoming signal is a fax 1 Some fax machines cannot send the CNG signal that tells your MultiPASS C70 the incoming signal is from a fax machine In such cases you will have to receive the fax manually D E fe a 2 2 3 o n Cannot receive a document manually You may have disconnected the call by pressing the Start Scan button or dialling the remote receiving ID after hanging up the handset or the handset of the telephone or extension phone m Always press the Start Scan button or dial the remote receiving ID before hanging up the handset Otherwise you will disconnect the call Print quality is poor You may not be using the correct type of paper 1 Make sure you are using paper that meets the paper requirements for the unit gt Chapter 5 Paper Handling The BJ cartridge print head may need cleaning 1 Clean the BJ cartridge print head gt p 12 17 The sending fax machine may not be functioning properly D The sending fax machine usually determines the fax s quality Call the sender and have them make sure the top cover and scanning glass on their fax machine are clean Error Correction Mode ECM may be disabled 1 Make sure ECM is on ECM RX pp
4. 0 Data Registration Set 3 Press Set Cc USER SETTINGS 08 02 4 Use V or A to select PRINTER SETTINGS ca Cc PRINTER SETTINGS Set 5 Press Set RX REDUCTION 08 o2 6 Use V or A to select BOTTOM MARGIN ca cS BOTTOM MARGIN lt gt Set 7 Press Set CD The current setting is displayed Ex NORMAL Chapter 10 Making Copies 10 7 o 2 2 8 dD x 08 02 c gt Set Co Stop 8 Use V or A to select the length of the bottom margin for colour copying colour printing and colour reception Ex SMALLER m You can select from the following settings e NORMAL The bottom margin is longer than the bottom margin of a black amp white printed page 21 mm e SMALLER The bottom margin is the same length as the bottom margin of a black amp white printed page 7 mm 9 Press Set to register your setting SYSTEM SETTINGS 10 Press Stop to return to standby mode Ex 153700 FaxOnly 10 8 Making Copies Chapter 10 Chapter 11 Reports and Lists This chapter shows you how to print lists and reports LY Summary of Lists and Reports cccceesccsesesceceseseeseneeseseseaneeneeceees 11 2 D Summary of Abbreviations Used in Transaction Reports 11 4 ED Activity Repoti visi secessssas sissies deter eisciacaesebsdeitansesastends cesbastacatn cand i sekss 11 5 Cy Transmission TX Reports vssci
5. Chapter 2 Setting Up Your MultiPASS C70 2 15 5 Connect the other end of the cable to the parallel interface port on your PC 6 oa M GA 2 16 Setting Up Your MultiPASS C70 Chapter 2 Connecting the Telephone Line Connect the MultiPASS C70 to a telephone line as follows 1 Connect one end of the supplied telephone line to the jack marked E on the side of the MultiPASS C70 b 28 gt O aV oe 5 o 2 Connect the other end of the line to the telephone jack on your wall Chapter 2 Setting Up Your MultiPASS C70 2 17 Connecting the Handset or a Telephone If you have only one telephone line and plan to use the MultiPASS C70 for both fax transactions and voice calls you will need to connect the handset or a telephone to your unit Connect the line from the handset or the telephone to the jack marked amp on the side of the MultiPASS C70 5 Bl A Ai d If the connector does not fit the jack or does not seat properly contact your local authorised Canon dealer or the Canon help line or your Not telephone company to have the correct connector installed 1 Be sure to connect the handset or the telephone before using your MultiPASS C70 2 18 Setting Up Your MultiPASS C70 Chapter 2 Connecting an Extension Phone Answering Machine or Data Modem In addition to the handset or a teleph
6. LINE MONITOR Select the volume of the line monitor Sound during 0 1 2 3 VOL dialling For no sound select O RX CALL LEVEL Select the volume of incoming calls HIGH STANDARD TEL LINE TYPE Select the dialling method the MultiPASS C70 uses to TOUCH TONE match the telephone line type you have ROTARY PULSE R KEY SETTING Select PBX if your MultiPASS C70 is connected through a PSTN PBX switchboard PBX gt p 9 2 If you select PBX select the PBX type You can select from HOOKING EARTH CONNECTION and PREFIX Default settings are shown in bold type Can only be adjusted for black amp white transmissions For colour transmissions the TTI information is positioned inside the image area 14 6 Summary of Settings Chapter 14 Report Settings Accessing the Report Settings Menu ATS 01 2 Press Data Registration DATA REGSTRATION 7 jo2 3 i Data Registration gt E E i Set 3 Press Set co USER SETTINGS 08 o2 4 Use V or A to select REPORT SETTINGS ca Cc REPORT SETTINGS Set 5 Press Set TX REPORT 6 Refer to the table on the following page and follow these guidelines to select and register settings T Use V or A to move through the settings QO To register a setting or access sub settings press Set 1 To return to a previous level press Data Registration In order for your settings to be regi
7. Q If you are sending in colour to a fax machine with colour capability press Color B amp W to turn on its light gt p 7 3 Q If necessary you can adjust the resolution and contrast for your document pp 7 4 7 6 Press the one touch speed dialling button assigned to the number to which you wish to fax Ex _ TEL 905 795 1111 m The number registered under that one touch speed dialling button is displayed 0 If you press the wrong button press Stop then press the correct button Q If no fax number is assigned to the one touch speed dialling button you press the LCD displays NO TEL If this happens make sure you pressed the correct button and that the number you want to dial is registered under that button D S S a a 2 n Chapter 6 Speed Dialling 6 9 S S 3 Press Start Scan to begin scanning for sending or wait a few seconds for the MultiPASS C70 to begin scanning automatically Q If you prefer the MultiPASS C70 never to scan a document automatically after a few seconds you can turn this feature off TIME OUT pp 14 9 14 10 1 You will see a series of brief messages showing details on the transmission You can also use one touch speed dialling to send a document to more than one destination at a time Sequential Broadcasting p 7 23 N Note 6 10 Speed Dialling Chapter 6 Coded Speed Dialling Registering Numbers for Coded Speed Dialling N
8. USER SETTINGS o8 o2 4 Use V or A to select the menu you want ca Cc Vv A Ex RX SETTINGS T Press V to select the next menu in the list The list will wrap from the last menu in the list to the first T Press A to select the previous menu in the list The list will wrap from the first menu in the list to the last m You can select from the following menus e USER SETTINGS menu gt pp 14 5 14 6 Contains important settings such as date and time setup and registration of the sender information that you may wish to enter when you first set up your unit e REPORT SETTINGS menu gt pp 14 7 14 8 The settings under this menu allow you to select different options for printing transaction reports Chapter 3 Registering Information in the MultiPASS C70 3 5 e TX Transmission SETTINGS menu gt pp 14 9 14 10 Use these settings to customise how the unit sends documents e RX Reception SETTINGS menu pp 14 11 14 12 Use these settings to customise how the unit receives documents e PRINTER SETTINGS menu gt pp 14 13 14 14 Use these settings to customise how the unit prints e SYSTEM SETTINGS menu gt pp 14 15 14 16 Use these settings to set up system defaults such as the date format the language for the LCD display and the transaction speeds Set 5 Press Set to access the settings under the menu you selected Cc gt Ex ECM RX o8 o2 6 Use V or A to select the sett
9. o 2 n 16 Stop 14 1 To enter a space press Space Spaces are optional and are ignored during dialling 1 To enter a pause in the number press C Redial Pause Q To correct a mistake in the number press lt to delete the rightmost digit 1 To delete the entire entry press Clear Press Set to register the fax telephone number DATA ENTRY OK NAME Press Set again Ex Canon Ine Use the numeric buttons to enter the new name over the previous name 1 If you want to keep the same name ignore this step and go to the next step Ex i Canon TOKYO 1 The name can be up to 16 characters long including spaces 1 To enter letters numbers and symbols refer to the instructions on page 3 8 Press Set to register the name DATA ENTRY OK 02 49 39 25 25 To change other entries repeat the procedure from step 7 gt p 6 14 Or To finish changing coded speed dialling entries press Stop to return to standby mode Ex 15 00 FaxOnly 6 16 Speed Dialling Chapter 6 Using Coded Speed Dialling A Note Follow this procedure to send documents using coded speed dialling To use this feature you must first register a number for coded speed dialling gt p 6 11 Be sure to adjust the document feed lever before loading your document p 4 5 Prepare the document and load it face down in the Automatic Document Feeder ADF
10. Provides a higher quality colour resolution 1 After about 10 seconds the LCD display returns to standby mode Ai You can change the resolution setting while the document is being scanned for sending However please note that your new setting will Not only be effective from the next page scanned Chapter 7 Sending Faxes 7 5 Setting the Scanning Contrast Contrast is the difference in brightness between the lightest and darkest parts of a printed document You can adjust the contrast the MultiPASS C70 uses to send faxes Adjust according to how light or dark your document is LA You can also set the scanning contrast from the MultiPASS Desktop Manager gt MultiPASS Suite Software User s Guide Function 1 Press Function 01 2 Press Data Registration DATA REGSTRATION Data Registration Set 3 Press Set co USER SETTINGS Set 4 Press Set again DATE amp TIME 08 o2 5 Use V or A to select SCAN CONTRAST ca Cc lt gt SCAN CONTRAST Set 6 Press Set Cc gt Ex STANDARD 7 6 Sending Faxes Chapter 7 o8 o2 7 Use V or A to select the scanning contrast you want vV A m You can select from the following STANDARD N o x LL dD S lt n This is the default setting Adequate for most documents DARKER Suitable for light documents LIGHTER Suitable for dark documents Set 8 Press Set co
11. There may be a communication problem between the MultiPASS C70 and your PC 1 Make sure the PC and the application are configured correctly for communicating with the MultiPASS C70 gt MultiPASS Suite Software User s Guide The parallel cable may not be securely connected to the MultiPASS C70 and the PC LY Check the parallel cable connection gt p 2 15 The parallel cable may not be the correct type D Make sure the cable is a Centronics compatible parallel cable with bi directional capability IEEE 1284 compliant and is less than 2 metres in length The parallel cable may be too long 1 Make sure the cable is a Centronics compatible parallel cable with bi directional capability IEEE 1284 compliant and is less than 2 metres in length Chapter 13 Troubleshooting 13 29 You may not be using the correct printer driver 1 Make sure you have selected the MultiPASS printer in your application gt MultiPASS Suite Software User s Guide Another hardware device or software application is attempting to communicate with the same parallel interface port to which the MultiPASS C70 is connected 1 Disconnect the peripheral device and uninstall or remove any software associated with this device and any software communicating with the parallel interface port You may not have the best media type selected d Try selecting Coated Paper for the Media Type rather than Plain Paper gt MultiPASS Suite
12. 1 To enter a space press Space Spaces are optional and are ignored during dialling 1 To enter a pause in the number press C Redial Pause a To correct a mistake in the number press lt to delete the rightmost digit 1 To delete the entire entry press Clear 10 Press Set to register the fax telephone number DATA ENTRY OK NAME 6 4 Speed Dialling Chapter 6 Set 11 Press Set again 0 12 Use the numeric buttons to enter the name that goes with the number Ex Canon EUROPA tA 1 The name can be up to 16 characters long including spaces 1 To enter letters numbers and symbols refer to the instructions on page 3 8 Set 13 Press Set to register the name 0 DATA ENTRY OK 14 To continue registering other one touch speed dialling buttons repeat the procedure from step 6 gt p 6 4 Or Stop To finish registering one touch speed dialling entries press Stop to return to standby mode Ex 15 00 FaxOnly You can print the One Touch Speed Dial List showing all the numbers and names registered for one touch speed dialling p 6 26 Keep this list near your MultiPASS C70 so you can refer to it easily when dialling IN Note D S S a a o 2 n Chapter 6 Speed Dialling 6 5 Changing Deleting a One Touch Speed Dialling Entry Follow this procedure to change a one touch speed dialling entry or to delete all information registered under a
13. Bi directional parallel interface port An interface connection that is capable of both sending and receiving For example when you print or send a fax from your PC data goes from your PC to the MultiPASS C70 when you scan or receive a fax into your PC data goes from the MultiPASS C70 to your PC BJ cartridge The printing mechanism that contains the print head unit and ink s BJ tank The special type of ink container housed by the BJ cartridge The BC 21e Colour BJ cartridge contains two BJ tanks one colour BCI 21 Colour which includes cyan magenta yellow and one black BCI 21 Black bps Bits per second Refers to the speed with which a fax machine sends and receives data Broadcasting Transmitting documents to more than one destination Bubble Jet BJ printing An ink jet type printer that heats the ink to a boiling point in a nozzle to form a bubble When the bubble expands there is no room left in the nozzle for the ink and the ink is projected onto paper Glossary C CCITT ITU TS Formerly known as CCITT Consultative Committee for International Telegraph and Telephone CCITT has been replaced by the International Telecommunications Union Telecommunications Sector ITU TS a committee created to set international standards for telecommunications Centronics An interface standard for parallel data transmission The interface on the MultiPASS C70 is a Centronics type parallel interface CNG
14. Dr P N Cundall Mining Surveys Ltd Holroyd Road Reading Berks iN Note The TX Report cannot be printed with a colour document The message The color fax image is not printed on this report will print instead n 2 L a ke E o n 2 fo 2 o oc Chapter 11 Reports and Lists 11 7 Multi Transaction TX RX Report If the transmission was a sequential broadcast then a Multi TX RX Report is printed 27 12 2000 17 23 FAX 123 4567 CANON ld 001 FOI Je FE Fe FE He BE HEHE HE KE HEE AE E E E E E E E E E e tes MULTI TX RX REPORT FOI FE HE FE JE JE FE ICICI EEEE E EE E EEE E TX RX NO 0054 PGS 4 TX RX INCOMPLETE TRANSACTION OK 01 905 795 1111 Canon CANADA 01 03 3758 2111 Canon TOKYO 02 1 49 39 25 25 Canon FRANCE ERROR INFORMATION 2 2 2 For colour transmissions the message COLOR TX is printed next to the TX RX NO 11 8 Reports and Lists Chapter 11 Reception RX Reports Error RX Report You can set the MultiPASS C70 to print a reception RX report when an error occurs during reception RX REPORT pp 14 7 14 8 27 12 2000 14 59 FAX 123 4567 CANON ld 001 FOI IO TOI ae ee RX REPORT FOI IOI IO IIe INCOMPLETE RECEPTION TX RX NO 5003 CONNECTION TEL 1 432 2060 CONNECTION ID Canon OPTICS ST TIME 27 12 14 59 USAGE T 00 04 PGS 0 RESULT NG STOP
15. Note 01 Data Registration 08 02 c gt Set 08 o2 c gt Coded speed dialling allows you to dial a fax telephone number by pressing only three buttons First you press the Coded Dial button and then you enter a two digit code under which you have registered a fax telephone number You can register up to 100 fax telephone numbers for coded speed dialling You can also register numbers for coded speed dialling from the MultiPASS Desktop Manager gt MultiPASS Suite Software User s Guide Follow this procedure to register numbers and names for coded speed dialling 1 Press Function 2 Press Data Registration DATA REGSTRATION 3 Use V or A to select TEL REGISTRATION TEL REGISTRATION 4 Press Set 1 TOUCH SPD DIAL 5 Use V or A to select CODED SPEED DIAL CODED SPEED DIAL Chapter 6 Speed Dialling 6 11 D S S a a o 2 n Set 08 02 c gt 10 Press Set 00 Use V or A to select a coded speed dialling code from 00 to 99 Ex O1 C1 If a coded speed dialling code has already been registered the number registered under that code appears 1 Ifa group is already registered under a coded speed dialling code GROUP DIAL appears Press Set H H EPHONE NUMBER Press Set again TEL Use the numeric buttons to enter the fax telephone number you want to register Ex EL 3 3758
16. Receive Mode 1 Press Receive Mode to select MANUAL MODE O MANUAL MODE 1 After a few seconds the LCD display changes to the following display Ex 15 00 Manual Receiving a Fax Manually Before attempting to receive manually confirm that you have done the following 1 Make sure Manual is displayed in the LCD display Ex 15 00 Manual 2 Make sure you have connected the handset a telephone or an extension phone to the MultiPASS C70 gt pp 2 18 2 19 8 14 Receiving Faxes Chapter 8 Follow the procedure below to receive a fax manually 3 When you hear the handset telephone or extension phone ring co pick up the handset G G MW If you hear a person s voice ania 4 Start your conversation If the caller wants to send a fax after talking to you ask them to press the start button on their fax machine When you hear a slow beep press Start Scan on the MultiPASS C70 to begin receiving the fax Hang up the handset 0 If the telephone is located away from your unit dial 25 the remote receiving ID on your telephone and hang up n x Le to gt o oO o o If you hear a slow beep tone or silence 4 Someone is trying to send you a fax Sut Scan If the telephone is close to your unit press Start Scan on the MultiPASS C70 Hang up the handset 0 If the telephone is located away from your unit dial 25 the remote receiving ID on your telephone and hang up m The M
17. To enter a group registered under a coded speed dialling code Press Coded Dial then use the numeric buttons to enter the two digit code assigned to the group you wish to send the document to Ex Q If you enter the wrong code press Stop then press Coded Dial and enter the correct code Press Start Scan to begin scanning for sending or wait a few seconds for the MultiPASS C70 to begin scanning automatically 0 If you prefer the MultiPASS C70 never to scan a document automatically after a few seconds you can turn this feature off gt TIME OUT pp 14 9 14 10 1 You will see a series of brief messages showing details on the transmission Chapter 6 Speed Dialling 6 25 D S S a a o 2 n Speed Dialling Lists You can print lists of numbers registered for one touch and coded speed dialling and of numbers registered for group dialling Follow this procedure to print the speed dialling lists Printing the One Touch or Coded Speed Dial List Function 1 Press Function gt ZN 07 2 Press Report 08 o2 3 Use V or A to select SPEED DIAL LIST Cc SPEED DIAL LIST Set 4 Press Set 0 1 TOUCH LIST 08 o2 5 Use V or A to select 1 TOUCH LIST or CODED DIAL LIST ca Cc Vv A Ex CODED DIAL LIST Set 6 Press Set SORTED OUTPUT 0 6 26 Speed Dialling Chapter 6 7 Select whether you want the list to be printed with the destinations
18. ccsscsisossessereseossecessssessescsctntasesasisansesnessansdeess 5 2 Printable Areas 5 dcssidniancshiwidiiniinniaieamanh anaes 5 3 PAP OTS sc 5s ss svescsehes ees savas versssasud neseetassededeUaideneia seuss cnsupevaaeslashesateseestiness 5 3 EN VEL OP OSs icsers cave coe cnsesssa dens dda cadecti E E 5 4 Ly selecting Print Media i ossiin hinted etait ie knees danse 5 5 A Print M dia Guidelines oresonn one e E 5 9 A Setting the Paper Thickness DeVeT as sit oer eE En 5 10 A LCoading Paper evccsecscedasecsyad se deire a ER dass EEE 5 13 Guidelines E ainsi haannutnantsanee 5 13 EV Loading Enyvelop S css scssescsssss ses sessessaccteseesesssstavecsssstssseneasnans riisi esti 5 15 LI Using Canon s Specialty Papers sisisi orisi iseis 5 18 Specialty Paper Guidelines csscssscscessssssesssssssansacessstipadenssseosedesassenns 5 18 Uncurling Back Print FDN ssis sana 5 19 e Printing on High Resolution Paper HR 101 0 5 21 Using the Paper Output G ideSssissoi sieis 5 21 Using the Cleaning Sheets zier n R 5 22 e Printing on Fabric Sheet FS I0lnssnrerosesror 5 24 Printing on Barner Paper miiirn aie a a 5 26 te c G I a a Chapter 5 Paper Handling 5 1 Print Media Requirements You can stack the following media in the multi purpose tray Type Size Weight Quantity Plain paper A4 64 90 g m Approx 100 sheets 210 x 297 mm Max 10 mm stack 8 27 x 11 69 in Letter 64 90 g m
19. gt pp 4 6 4 11 m The LCD display shows the following Currently used memory EMORY USE Standby to scan DOCUMENT READY Q If you are sending in colour to a fax machine with colour capability press Color B amp W to turn on its light gt p 7 3 QO If necessary you can adjust the resolution and contrast for your document pp 7 4 7 6 Press Coded Dial l Use the numeric buttons to enter the two digit code assigned to the number to which you wish to fax Ex o1 Ex T eL 03 3758 2111 1 The number registered under that coded speed dialling code is displayed 0 If you enter the wrong code press Stop Then press Coded Dial and enter the correct code dD S S a ke o 2 n Chapter 6 Speed Dialling 6 17 1 If no fax number is assigned to the coded speed dialling code you enter the LCD displays NO TEL If this happens make sure you entered the correct code and that the number you want to dial is registered under that code Smrtjsean 4 Press Start Scan to begin scanning for sending or wait a few seconds for the MultiPASS C70 to begin scanning automatically QO If you prefer the MultiPASS C70 never to scan a document automatically after a few seconds you can turn this feature off TIME OUT pp 14 9 14 10 T You will see a series of brief messages showing details on the transmission You can also use coded speed dialling to send a
20. 81 773 3173 Canon UK Unsorted 27 12 2000 17 23 FAX 123 4567 CANON d 001 FOI SII II ICO ITO TOO II kee FO III IOI SII III I IO II IGG CODED SPEED DIAL LIST tke CONNECTION TEL CONNECTION ID x 00 x 01 ke 02 ek 03 x 21 ke 32 2131 1250 03 3758 2111 1 49 39 25 25 516p488 6700 GROUP DIAL 81 773 3173 Canon DE Canon UK Canon TOKYO Canon FRANCE Canon U S A Canon GROUP 1 UTSCH 6 28 Speed Dialling Chapter 6 Printing the Group Dial List Function 1 Press Function 07 2 Press Report x D gei S ACTIVITY REPORT 08 o2 3 Use V or A to select SPEED DIAL LIST ca Cc SPEED DIAL LIST Set 4 Press Set 1 TOUCH LIST 0 08 o2 5 Use V or A to select GROUP DIAL LIST ca Cc GROUP DIAL LIST lt gt Set 6 Press Set 0 PRINTING REPORT 1 The unit begins printing the list A sample of the list is shown on the following page Chapter 6 Speed Dialling 6 29 D S S m ke D o 2 n Group Dial List 27 12 2000 17 23 FAX 123 4567 CANON 2001 FOI IIT TIO Te wee GROUP DIAL LIST ae FO III IOI IOI TOO II IOI ie 03 Canon GROUP 2 00 2131 1250 Canon DEUTSCH kK 02 1 49 39 25 25 Canon FRANCE 04 2 50921 Canon ITALIA gt 32 81 773 3173 Canon UK 21 Canon GROUP 1 01 905 795 1111 Canon CANADA 03 516p488 6700 Canon U S A 6 30 Speed Dialling C
21. OFFHOOK ALARM Stop 9 Press Stop to return to standby mode Ex 15 00 FaxOnly Chapter 7 Sending Faxes 7 7 Dialling Methods There are several ways of dialling the number of the party you want to send to m Regular Dialling Dial a fax number by using the numeric buttons just like dialling a telephone number One Touch Speed Dialling Dial a fax number by pressing the one touch speed dialling button 01 to 12 that the number is assigned to For details on registering and using one touch speed dialling refer to Chapter 6 Speed Dialling Coded Speed Dialling Dial a fax number by pressing the Coded Dial button followed by the two digit code 00 to 99 that the number is assigned to For details on registering and using coded speed dialling refer to Chapter 6 Speed Dialling Group Dialling Send a document to a predefined group of fax numbers The numbers must already be registered under one touch speed dialling buttons or coded speed dialling codes For details on creating groups and using group dialling refer to Chapter 6 Speed Dialling PC Dialling Dial a fax number from your PC using the MultiPASS Desktop Manager gt MultiPASS Suite Software User s Guide 7 8 Sending Faxes Chapter 7 Sending Methods Overview N x LL D S lt o Yn This section describes the methods and advantages of the two main sending methods 11 Memory sending Allows you to send a document
22. USER SETTINGS Chapter 8 Receiving Faxes 8 5 2 x o Le to gt o oO o co 08 2 4 Use V or A to select RX SETTINGS ca Cc RX Set 5 Press Set S ETTINGS 0 ECM RX 08 o2 6 Use V or A to select RX MODE ca cS RX MODE Set 7 Press Set CD Ex FAX TEL AUTO SW 08 o2 8 Use V or A to select FAX ONLY MODE ca CS Set 9 Press Set FAX ONLY MODE INCOMING RING 0 Stop 10 Press Stop to return to standby mode Ex 15700 FaxOnly 8 6 Receiving Faxes Chapter 8 11 Confirm that FaxOnly is displayed in the LCD display 1 If FaxOnly is not displayed press Receive Mode to select FAX ONLY MODE After a few seconds the LCD display returns to standby mode Ex 15 00 FaxOnly 1 The MultiPASS C70 assumes all incoming calls are from fax machines sending faxes It receives the documents automatically and disconnects all voice calls 2 x Le to 2 gt o tS o oc In FAX ONLY MODE you can control whether or not the MultiPASS C70 rings when it receives a fax call INCOMING RING pp 14 11 14 12 You can also set this option from the MultiPASS Desktop Manager gt MultiPASS Suite Software User s Guide Please note that even if you enable this option the MultiPASS C70 will only ring if you have the handset a telephone or an extension phone connected to it IN Note Chapter 8 Receiving Faxes 8 7 Receiving Both
23. 9 11 9 12 9 13 14 16 Pause button See O Redial Pause button entering 9 5 9 6 PBX See Switchboard PBX setting 9 3 14 6 PC colour fax features 1 6 connecting to MultiPASS C70 2 15 2 16 dialling 7 8 when power off 8 18 PHOTO INK IN USE message 13 14 Photo kit 5 8 Plain paper fax features 1 4 1 5 requirements 5 2 selecting 5 5 PLAIN PAPER setting 10 5 14 14 PLEASE WAIT message 13 14 Power cord 2 6 2 7 connecting 2 20 to 2 22 connector 2 21 2 24 Power cut 13 36 PREFIX setting 9 3 9 4 14 6 PRINT ERROR ONLY setting 14 8 Print head See BJ cartridge print head Print media See also individual print media names films 5 7 guidelines 5 9 papers 5 5 5 6 5 7 5 8 requirements 5 2 selecting 5 5 to 5 8 Index I 11 special 1 12 Print quality problems 13 25 13 26 PRINT W BC 22e message 13 14 PRINT WITH IMAGE setting 14 8 Printer features 1 8 Printer cover 2 23 2 24 cleaning inside 12 5 to 12 7 PRINTER SETTINGS menu 3 6 14 4 14 13 14 14 Printing 1 Touch Spd Dial List 6 26 6 27 banner paper 5 26 to 5 31 Coded Speed Dial List 6 26 to 6 28 document in memory 7 29 to 7 32 fabric sheet 5 24 5 25 features 1 8 Group Dial List 6 29 6 30 high resolution paper 5 21 to 5 24 list of documents in memory 7 28 nozzle check pattern 12 15 12 16 problems 13 27 to 13 31 13 32 to 13 34 setting length of bottom margin for colour 10 7 10 8 User s Data List 3 18 while receiving 8 27 Pr
24. CALLING message 13 8 CALLING VOLUME setting 14 6 Cancelling automatic redialling 7 18 7 19 manual redialling 7 17 receiving 8 31 restriction 9 12 9 13 sending 7 14 Canon specialty papers See Specialty papers Capacity Automatic Document Feeder ADF 4 2 Index multi purpose tray 5 2 Cartridge See BJ cartridge Cartridge button See El button Cartridge container See BJ cartridge container Cartridge holder 2 24 CARTRIDGE JAMMED message 13 8 CD ROM MultiPASS Suite software printer driver 2 7 CHANGE CARTRIDGE message 8 29 13 9 Changing coded speed dialling entry 6 14 to 6 16 group dialling entry 6 23 one touch speed dialling entry 6 6 to 6 8 CHECK DOCUMENT message 13 4 13 9 CHECK PAPER SIZE message 13 9 CHECK PRINTER message 13 9 13 10 Cleaning BJ cartridge print head 12 17 button 2 27 2 28 5 23 12 15 12 17 inside of MultiPASS C70 12 5 to 12 11 outside of MultiPASS C70 12 4 periodic 12 4 to 12 11 rollers 5 22 to 5 24 12 11 scanner components 12 8 to 12 11 sheet 5 22 to 5 24 Clear button 2 27 2 28 CLEAR PAPER JAM message 8 29 13 6 13 10 Coded Dial button 2 25 2 26 Coded Speed Dial List 6 26 to 6 28 11 3 Coded speed dialling 6 2 7 8 changing entry 6 14 to 6 16 deleting entry 6 14 to 6 16 list 6 26 to 6 28 11 3 registering 6 11 to 6 13 using 6 17 6 18 COLOR COPY MEDIA setting 10 5 14 14 COLOR INK EMPTY message 8 28 13 10 COLOR RX setting 8 26 14 12 Color B amp W
25. Canon Glossy Photo Paper GP 201 Canon Banner Paper Canon High Resolution Paper HR 101 Canon Bubble Jet Paper water resistant LC 301 Fabric Sheet FS 101 for Canon Bubble Jet printers Canon CF 102 Transparencies Canon Back Print Film BF 102 Canon High Gloss Film HG 101 European DL Commercial No 10 Assorted Paper Starter Kit SK 102 o ro Q amp O Q i Approx 2 pages minute Approx 1 5 pages minute Approx 510 cps 10 cpi Approx 360 cps 10 cpi Black 720 x 360 dpi with Smoothing Specifications A 9 Printable Area Papers The shaded portion in the following illustrations shows the printing area for papers 210 mm 8 27 __ __ 3mm 0 12 mee 50 FEED 11 69 DIRECTION E m 3 ub 0 13 215 9 mm 8 5 _ F 3 mm 0 12 279 4 mm LETTER FEED 11 DIRECTION 7mm a 0 28 a mm 0 25 a mm 0 25 355 6 mm 14 6 4mm 215 9 mm 8 5 3 mm LEGAL 0 12 FEED DIRECTION 0 25 7mm 0 28 6 4 mm 0 25 The length of the lower margin varies depending on the printing conditions 7mm 0 28 for monochrome printing when not using the printer driver 4 mm 0 16 when printing from memory 16 mm 0 63 for monochrome and colour printing when using the printer driver 21 mm 0 83 for colour copying and printing of recei
26. D S o 5 3 9 amp MultiPASS C70 Cautions tell you how to avoid actions that could injure you or damage your MultiPASS C70 In order to use your unit safely always CAUTION pay attention to these cautions LA Notes provide advice on using the MultiPASS C70 more effectively describe operating restrictions and tell you how to avoid minor difficulties Reading these is recommended to make the most of your unit and its functions Note gt p n nn A numter preceded by an arrow and enclosed in parenthesis references a page number in this guide which contains more information on the topic of the previous sentence default A setting that remains in effect unless you change it document or A document or fax is the original sheet s of fax paper you send or receive on the unit menu A menu is a list of settings or features from which you select an item to set up or change A menu has a title which appears in the LCD display V and A buttons The V and A buttons are used to select an item in a menu Press V to select the next item and press A to select the previous item transaction number When you send or receive a document your unit automatically assigns the document a unique transaction number A transaction number is a four digit number that will help you keep track of documents you send and receive Chapter 1 Introducing the MultiPASS C70 1 15 TX RX NO On the LCD display TX RX NO
27. DIMENSIONS yeei E EE EEEE E E EEE 2 4 Unpacking Your MultiPASS C70 retai m ieee aE EE aaaea 2 5 Lifting the MultiPASS C70 derrin E 25 Do You Have Everything lorisiri nne re ET 2 6 Removing Shipping Materials cccsssssseseceseesssssnseseseseeneseseeeecenenees 2 9 Removing the Shipping Tape cscccscscescscersssencserssernssssessesessssasensnssenetsens 2 9 Removing the Protective Plastic Piee 2 9 Removing the Protective Sheet and Styrofoam Sheet cccee 2 10 vi Contents Assembling the MultiPASS C70 sccsesessessesssessscsnsssesesensstesssnessasssessessssness 2 12 Attaching the Document SUpPOTt ccccseesteteieeeeeteseseeteneeseseanenenes 2 12 Attaching the Extension and Document Tray cccccecceseseenenees 2 13 Attaching the Handset wis isscneaisaiinininsicsniiennniainaiinies 2 14 Making Connections ssri ireset saros Eai dnei SERERE 2 15 Connecting the MultiPASS C70 to Your PC ssssssssssiseesssssssiesreseese 2 15 Connecting the Telephone Line rsin aeien rE 2 17 Connecting the Handset or a Telephone sssri nnti 2 18 Connecting an Extension Phone Answering Machine or Data MO Cia yeisscacessetsaxtesy ienei a a AEE EE 2 19 Connecting the Power Cordisserip i E 2 20 Main Components of the Mult PASS C70 ss ssaisriiserossessssesrssesssisstsssssesss 2 23 Front VIEW sissvasiiisiisvr ana ddittae abide enaricens univers tactic 2 23 Back ViGW svassevces sssssssuesasiadetsdssdesssassessasedessibeasesessapaestade
28. Ex 2MIN New Zealand 1 to 5 times Chapter 7 Sending Faxes 7 21 13 Use the numeric buttons to enter the time interval between rediallings Ex 5MIN m You can select from 1 to 99 minutes QO The default setting is 2 minutes Set 14 Press Set to register your new setting gt TIME OUT Stop 15 Press Stop to return to standby mode Ex 15 00 FaxOnly 7 22 Sending Faxes Chapter 7 Sequential Broadcasting Sending a Document to More Than One Destination N Note A Note Follow this procedure to scan a document once and send it to several destinations With this sending method called sequential broadcasting you can send the same document to a maximum of 113 destinations N x LL D S lt o Yn This feature allows you to send a document to a number of destinations using a combination of dialling methods as follows 1 One touch speed dialling up to 12 destinations L1 Coded speed dialling up to 100 destinations 1 Regular dialling using the numeric buttons one destination You can enter the one touch speed dialling and coded speed dialling destinations in any order You can also include one destination which you dial using the numeric buttons Be sure to press Set after your entry with the numeric buttons If you frequently send the same document to the same group of recipients you can group them and register these numbers for group dialling You can re
29. a particular implementation of a typeface For example 12 point Courier bold Form feed A printer function that automatically ejects the current page and advances the printer to the top of the next page G G3 Group 3 fax machine Defined by CCITT ITU T Uses encoding schemes to transmit image data while reducing the amount of data that needs to be transmitted thus reducing transmission time G3 fax machines can transmit one page in less than one minute Encoding schemes for G3 fax machines are Modified Huffman MH Modified READ MR and Modified Modified READ MMR Glossary Graphic A written printed or electronically displayed symbol or drawing Also characters or text that have been generated by a computer graphics application program Glossary G 5 Greyscale Representing colour in black amp white as a result of different intensities of colour Different colours and intensities of colours appear as different shades of grey Group dialling A dialling method that enables you to dial up to 111 registered one touch speed dialling or coded speed dialling numbers together as a group This means that you can press just one or three buttons to enter numbers when sending the same document to many destinations H Halftone Using this method the MultiPASS C70 produces shades of grey or of colours by mapping dots to be printed For colour printing different coloured dots of ink are placed closely togethe
30. gt pp 6 3 6 11 Use regular dialling Change to a different BJ cartridge type if necessary p 12 19 Wait until the time and receive mode appear in the LCD display then begin Press the button to print the colour document with the optional BC 22e Photo BJ cartridge or press the button to cancel printing Make sure the BJ cartridge is installed correctly and that the blue cartridge lock lever is down Install a BJ cartridge 13 14 Troubleshooting Chapter 13 UEST RECEIVED IN FILE REC D IN MEMORY START AGAIN TRY AGAIN IN B W TX RX CANCELLED TX RX NO nnnn TX RX NO nnnn SCANNING P nnn Two messages toggle WAIT COOLING Error Code 085 Cause Your PC was off and a document was received in the unit s memory The unit received the fax in memory because paper or ink ran out a paper jam occurred or the wrong BJ cartridge was installed An error has occurred in the telephone line or in the system You tried faxing a colour document to a machine that does not support colour faxing You pressed the Stop button to cancel the transmission When the unit sends or receives a fax it assigns it a unique identification number nnnn The unit is sending a document and its memory is full During printing the BJ cartridge print head may have become too hot Action Upload the document to your PC or print the document gt p 8 18 Add paper
31. jack 2 18 2 24 problems 13 23 TELEPHONE MARK setting 14 6 Telephone line 2 6 2 7 connecting 2 17 jack 2 17 2 24 setting type 3 19 3 20 Testing BJ cartridge print head 12 15 12 16 MultiPASS C70 2 44 Thickness adjusting for paper 5 10 to 5 12 document 4 2 Time entering 3 14 3 15 TIME OUT setting 14 10 Timer sending See Delayed sending Tone dialling setting 3 19 3 20 switching temporarily to 9 7 9 8 Tone button 2 27 2 28 9 7 TOUCH TONE setting 3 19 3 20 14 6 Transaction number definition 1 15 Transmission TX reports 11 2 11 6 11 7 abbreviations used in 11 4 Transparencies 5 2 5 7 5 18 Transporting MultiPASS C70 12 32 12 33 Tray document 2 6 2 7 2 13 2 14 2 23 multi purpose 2 23 output 2 23 TRY AGAIN IN B W message 13 15 TTI POSITION setting 14 6 TX definition 1 16 TX Report 11 2 11 6 11 7 with first page 11 2 11 7 TX REPORT setting 14 8 TX SETTINGS menu 3 6 14 4 14 9 14 10 TX START SPEED setting 14 16 TX TERMINAL ID setting 14 6 TX RX CANCELLED message 13 15 TX RX NO nnnn message 13 15 TX RX NO nnnn SCANNING P nnn message 13 15 Type conventions in this guide 1 15 1 16 I 16 Index U UN LOCK PHONE setting 9 10 9 12 14 16 Uncurling back print film 5 19 5 20 Unit See MultiPASS C70 UNIT NAME setting 3 16 14 6 UNIT TELEPHONE setting 3 15 14 6 Unpacking MultiPASS C70 2 5 to 2 8 Uppercase letter mode 3 8 3 9 3 10 USER DATA LIST setting 3 18 USER
32. make sure you set it in the multi purpose tray with the print side facing upwards Chapter 5 Paper Handling 5 9 te c J I o a Setting the Paper Thickness Lever Before loading paper or other print media in the multi purpose tray set the paper thickness lever The paper thickness lever adjusts the gap between the print head and the print paper to suit the paper s thickness T Set to the left D for paper and most other print media T Set to the right XI for envelopes and Canon Fabric Sheet FS 101 A If the paper thickness lever is not set correctly before printing Nas smudging and poor print quality may result To avoid paper jams smearing and other problems never open the printer cover to set the paper thickness lever while the MultiPASS CAUTION sae C70 is printing Set the paper thickness lever as follows 1 Open the printer cover by grasping the document guides and lifting Q If the printer cover does not open easily slide the document guides outwards and then open the printer cover ISS lt Ne q ae DOCUMENT GUIDE DOCUMENT GUIDE 5 10 Paper Handling Chapter 5 2 Press El Q The cartridge holder moves to the centre of the unit Do not try to manually move or stop the cartridge holder as this may damage the MultiPASS C70 CAUTION 3 Set the paper thickness lever T Set to the left D for paper and most o
33. 1 To enter a space press Space 1 If you make a mistake press Clear and start again Alternatively you can use lt to move back to the character you want to correct and enter the correct character 3 16 Registering Information in the MultiPASS C70 Chapter 3 Set Stop 11 Press Set to register your entry TX TERMINAL ID 12 Press Stop to return to standby mode Ex 15 00 FaxOnly Chapter 3 Registering Information in the MultiPASS C70 3 17 i E Ss 2 D i 2 az D co N S p z o 5 o t E Printing a List to Check the Sender Information To check the sender information you have registered in the MultiPASS C70 and to check the current settings of your unit you can print the User s Data List Follow this procedure Function 1 Press Function 07 2 Press Report ACTIVITY REPORT D G fo a 08 o2 3 Use V or A to select USER DATA LIST ca cS USER DATA LIST Set 4 Press Set PRINTING REPORT 0 m The MultiPASS C70 begins printing the User s Data List 1 You can find the sender information registered in the MultiPASS C70 at the beginning of the list The current settings of your unit are listed after this 27 12 2000 17 23 FAX 123 4567 CANON 001 1 USER SETTINGS UNIT TELEPHONE 123 4567 UNIT NAME CANON TX TERMINAL ID ON TTI POSITION OUTSIDE IMAGE TELEPHONE MARK FAX SCANNING
34. 15 System Settings Menu Name Description UN LOCK PHONE send faxes is restricted PASSWORD setting LOCK PHONE Select if operation of the MultiPASS C70 to make calls and Register a password to restrict access to the LOCK PHONE Restrict or enable the ability to make calls or send faxes Settings 0000 to 9999 OFF ON DATE SETUP Select the date format displayed in the LCD display and printed on faxes you send DD MM YYYY YYYY MM DD MM DD YYYY DISPLAY LANGUAGE Select the language of the LCD display messages ENGLISH FRENCH SPANISH GERMAN ITALIAN DUTCH FINNISH PORTUGUESE NORWEGIAN SWEDISH DANISH SLOVENE CZECH HUNGARIAN TX START SPEED Select the speed at which the MultiPASS C70 starts transmitting Select a lower speed if you have difficulties connecting over long distance or noisy lines 14400bps 9600bps 7200bps 4800bps 2400bps RX START SPEED Select the speed at which the MultiPASS C70 starts receiving Select a lower speed if you have difficulties connecting over long distance or noisy lines 14400bps 9600bps 7200bps 4800bps 2400bps Default settings are shown in bold type 14 16 Summary of Settings Chapter 14 Appendix A Specifications The specifications for the MultiPASS C70 are listed in this section Ell General Specifications esaeen ear reinste s Esos a nee emesis A 2 LSU EEE erst oat I e E EE E E A 4 El COpie isei
35. 3 Periodic Cleaning Your MultiPASS C70 requires little periodic maintenance Follow these guidelines to keep your MultiPASS C70 in good operating condition L1 Before you clean the MultiPASS C70 be sure to print any faxes stored in memory L1 Do not use tissue paper paper towels or similar materials for cleaning they can stick to the components or generate static charges 1 Be sure to disconnect the power cord before cleaning the unit Cleaning the Outside of the MultiPASS C70 LA Note CAUTION Clean the MultiPASS C70 s outer casing as follows When the power cord is disconnected the image memory is completely erased Therefore before you begin cleaning the MultiPASS C70 be sure to print any faxes stored in its memory pp 7 29 8 18 8 28 1 Disconnect the power cord from the MultiPASS C70 2 Wipe the MultiPASS C70 s exterior with a clean soft lint free cloth moistened with water or diluted dishwashing detergent solution Never use volatile liquids such as thinners benzene acetone or any other chemical cleaner to clean the interior of the MultiPASS C70 as they can damage its components 3 Plug the power cord back in 12 4 Maintenance Chapter 12 Cleaning the MultiPASS C70 s Interior Cleaning Inside the Printer Cover To prevent ink spots and paper dust from accumulating inside the MultiPASS C70 and affecting print quality clean the unit s print area periodically as
36. 7 mm 0 28 for monochrome printing when not using the printer driver 4 mm 0 16 when printing from memory 16 mm 0 63 for monochrome and colour printing when using the printer driver 21 mm 0 83 for colour copying and printing of received colour faxes Chapter 5 Paper Handling 5 3 Envelopes The shaded portions below show the printable area of envelopes Make sure your text and graphics fall within these areas 220 mm 8 66 ae 3mm 0 12 110 mm EUROPEAN DL 4 33 7 mm 0 28 6 4 mm 0 25 10 4 mm 0 41 FEED DIRECTION 241 3 mm 9 5 3mm 0 12 U S COMMERCIAL NO 10 7 mm 0 28 ii 6 4 mm 0 25 4 31 4 mm 1 24 FEED DIRECTION 5 4 Paper Handling Chapter 5 Selecting Print Media LA Note This section describes the different print media you can use with your MultiPASS C70 To achieve the best possible printing performance for your MultiPASS C70 be sure to select the correct print media 1 Be sure to test print media before purchasing a large quantity If you have any questions on whether a particular medium is suitable for your MultiPASS C70 please contact your local authorised Canon dealer or the Canon help line 1 Please note that not all print media mentioned here may be available in your area or country Contact your local authorised Canon dealer or the Canon help line for more info
37. Approx 100 sheets 215 9 x 279 4 mm Max 10 mm stack 8 5 x 11 in Legal 64 90 g m Approx 100 sheets 215 9 x 355 6 mm Max 10 mm stack 8 5 x 14 in Envelopes European DL 10 envelopes 220 x 110 mm 8 66 x 4 33 in U S Commercial No 10 241 3 x 104 1 mm 9 5 x 4 1 in 10 envelopes Glossy photo A4 Letter paper 1 sheet Banner paper 210 x Max 1800 mm High resolution A4 Letter 1 sheet 2 to 6 long Approx 10 sheets paper Bubble Jet A4 Letter Approx 100 sheets paper Max 10 mm stack Fabric sheets 241 3 x 355 6 mm 1 sheet Transparencies A4 Letter 50 sheets Back print film A4 Letter 10 sheets High gloss film A4 Letter 1 sheet 75 g m paper 5 2 Paper Handling Chapter 5 Printable Areas The shaded portions below show the printable area of papers Make sure your text and graphics fall within these areas Papers 210 mm 6 27 3mm 0 12 297 mm 11 69 FEED DIRECTION 7mm me 28 3 dn J L 0 13 0 13 215 9 mm 8 5 215 9 mm 8 5 hy 3mm F 3mm 0 12 0 12 279 4 mm LETTER FEED Q 11 DIRECTION 355 6 mm LEGAL FEED 14 DIRECTION to 7mm ave 0 28 E Gy ae i mm 6 4 mm 7 mm 7 0 25 0 25 L 0 28 g 6 4 mm 6 4 mm 0 25 0 25 The length of the lower margin varies depending on the printing conditions
38. Automatic fallback Transmission Speed Black amp white Approx 6 seconds page at 14 4 Kbps ECM MMKR transmitting from memory Transmission Speed Colour Approx 2 minutes page at 14 4 Kbps ECM JPEG transmitting from memory Transmission Reception Memory 1 3 MB DRAM MR storage Up to 42 pages Up to 30 documents LCD displays memory used Uses direct transmission when memory full Fax Scanning Speed 5 8 seconds page Based on Canon FAX Standard Chart No 1 standard mode Based on Canon Colour Chart standard mode A 4 Specifications Appendix A Automatic Document Feeder ADF 20 sheets A4 or letter size 10 sheets legal size Fax Resolution Black amp white Standard mode 8 pels mm x 3 85 lines mm Fine mode 8 pels mm x 7 7 lines mm Photo mode 8 pels mm x 7 7 lines mm with halftones Fax Resolution Colour Standard mode 200 x 200 dpi Fine mode 200 x 200 dpi Fax Printing Speed Black amp white Approx 3 pages minute 2 i Colour Approx 3 minutes page z Dialling 9 2 7 Automatic dialling One touch speed dialling 12 destinations Coded speed dialling 100 destinations Group dialling Maximum 111 destinations Regular dialling with numeric buttons Automatic redialling Manual redialling Pause button D T button 75 g m paper Based on Canon FAX Standard Chart No 1 standard mode Based on Canon Colour Chart standard mode Appendix A Specific
39. B amp W Q For black amp white copying make sure the Color B amp W button s Cs light is off If the Color B amp W button s light is on press Color B amp W to turn it off 10 2 Making Copies Chapter 10 O Color B amp W 4 lt D Resolution O Color B amp W lt D Resolution lt D Press Copy 0 The display now shows COPY the reduction size the copy will be printed at the default is 100 and the number of copies the default is 1 COPY 100 01 To change the copying resolution for colour copying make sure the Color B amp W button s light is on then press Resolution until the resolution you want appears Q 9 LOR DRAFT COLOR FINE COLOR SNAPSHOT Or To change the copying resolution for black amp white copying make sure the Color B amp W button s light is off then press Resolution until the resolution you want appears B amp W TEX B amp W PHOTO o 2 2 8 dD x T When copying in colour e Use COLOR DRAFT resolution for 360 x 360 dpi e Use COLOR FINE resolution for 360 x 360 dpi this results in a much better quality reproduction but takes longer than other settings e Use COLOR SNAPSHOT when scanning photos that are less than 102 mm wide The resolution is 360 x 360 dpi T When copying in black amp white e Use B amp W TEXT resolution for copying most text documents e Use B amp W PHOTO resolution when copying documents that con
40. CONTRAST STANDARD OFFHOOK ALARM ON VOLUME CONTROL CALLING VOLUME KEYPAD VOLUME ALARM VOLUME LINE MONITOR VOL RX CALL LEVEL HIGH SNE TYPE TOUCH 3 18 Registering Information in the MultiPASS C70 Chapter 3 Setting the Telephone Line Type Before using your MultiPASS C70 to make calls or send documents you need to make sure the telephone line type setting of your unit matches the telephone line you have If you are unsure of the type of telephone Data Registration Set CD Set 08 02 c gt Set line you have check with your local telephone company Your MultiPASS is factory set to TOUCH TONE If you need to change this setting follow the procedure below 1 Press Function 2 Press Data Registration DATA REGSTRATION 3 Press Set USER SETTINGS 4 Press Set again DATE amp TIME 5 Use V or A to select TEL LINE TYPE TEL LINE TYPE 6 Press Set 1 The current line type setting is displayed Ex TOUCH TONE Chapter 3 Registering Information in the MultiPASS C70 3 19 5o SS oO Ew rome a 25 TS Lo Bs Ss 0802 7 Use V or A to select the telephone line type setting you want ca Cc ROTARY PULSE Or OUCH TONE Set 8 Press Set to register the new line type R KEY SETTING Stop 9 Press Stop to return to standby mode EX 15200 FaxOnly 3 20 Registering Informa
41. Faxes and Telephone Calls Automatically Fax Tel Mode Set this mode if you want your MultiPASS C70 to automatically switch between voice and fax calls For this mode you need to have the handset a telephone or an extension phone connected to your unit pp 2 18 2 19 Setting Fax Tel Mode Follow the procedure below to set the receive mode to FAX TEL AUTO SW Fax Tel Mode Function 1 Press Function ZIN 01 2 Press Data Registration C2 Data Registration DATA REGSTRATION Set 3 Press Set CD USER SETTINGS 08 2 4 Use V or A to select RX SETTINGS ca Cc RX SETTINGS Set 5 Press Set ECM RX 0 08 o2 6 Use V or A to select RX MODE ca Cc RX MODE 8 8 Receiving Faxes Chapter 8 Set 7 Press Set Cc D gt Ex FAX ONLY MODE 08 o2 8 Use V or A to select FAX TEL AUTO SW ca Cc lt gt FAX TEL AUTO SW Set 9 Press Set RING START TIME x Le to E o oO o am Stop 10 Press Stop to return to standby mode Ex 15 00 FaxTel 11 Confirm that FaxTel is displayed in the LCD display m If FaxTel is not displayed press Receive Mode to select Fax Tel Mode After a few seconds the LCD display returns to standby mode Ex T5300 FaxTel Chapter 8 Receiving Faxes 8 9 Setting Up Fax Tel Mode You can control precisely how your MultiPASS C70 handles incoming calls by adjusting the settings
42. GAP HERE NO GAP HERE PAPER LIMIT MARK 5 14 Paper Handling Chapter 5 Loading Envelopes You can stack up to 10 envelopes in the multi purpose tray to feed them automatically into the MultiPASS C70 Refer to the previous sections for details on the types of envelopes you can load pp 5 2 5 5 1 Make sure the paper thickness lever is set to the right 1 Q For details refer to Setting the Paper Thickness Lever on page 5 10 gt To avoid paper jams smearing and other problems never open the printer cover to set the paper thickness lever while the MultiPASS CAUTION sas C70 is printing Chapter 5 Paper Handling 5 15 e2 3 vj I o S a 2 Arrange the stack of envelopes on a firm clean surface and press down firmly on the edges to make the folds crisp T Press all the way around the envelopes to remove any curls and expel air from inside the envelopes Also press firmly on the area that corresponds to the edges of the flap FLAP PRESS DOWN FIRMLY ON THE EDGES OF THE FLAP 3 Remove any curling from the envelopes by holding the edge of the envelopes diagonally and bending them gently 5 16 Paper Handling Chapter 5 4 Make sure the flaps of the envelopes are flat and not curled TL 5 Insert the stack of envelopes into the multi purpose tray until it stops so that the right edge of the stack is aligned with the right side of the multi p
43. If no document comes in it disconnects after approximately 55 seconds x Le to gt 2 O o You can select these options in the RX MODE submenu of the RX SETTINGS menu when FAX TEL AUTO SW is selected See the following page for details on changing the settings LA You can also set these options from the MultiPASS Desktop Manager es MultiPASS Suite Software User s Guide Australia only After answering the MultiPASS C70 plays You are connected Please hold Chapter 8 Receiving Faxes 8 11 Set the Fax Tel Mode options as follows 1 Follow steps 1 to 9 on pages 8 8 and 8 9 RING START TIME Set 2 Press Set Cc D gt Ex 3 Use the numeric buttons to enter the time the unit waits before ringing when it receives a call 1 You can select from 0 to 30 seconds 1 The factory default setting is eight seconds Ex 9SEC Set 4 Press Set to register your setting F T RING TIME Set 5 Press Set again Cc D gt Ex 22SEC 6 Use the numeric buttons to enter the time the unit rings while waiting for someone to pick up the handset or the handset of the telephone or extension phone OQ You can select from 10 to 60 seconds Q The factory default setting is 22 seconds Ex 30SEC Set 7 Press Set to register your setting EFAULT ACTION 0 8 12 Receiving Faxes Chapter 8 Set 08 02 c gt 8 Press Set agai
44. J 3 gt a e Q 72 MultiPASS C70 4 Prepare a stack of paper by fanning the edge that will feed into the unit first and then tapping the stack on a flat surface to even its edges Chapter 2 Setting Up Your MultiPASS C70 2 41 5 Insert the stack into the multi purpose tray until it stops so that the right edge of the stack is aligned with the right side of the multi purpose tray m The multi purpose tray holds up to 100 sheets of plain paper Ai Make sure the top of the stack is below the paper limit mark I Note PAPER LIMIT MARK 75 g m paper 2 42 Setting Up Your MultiPASS C70 Chapter 2 6 Slide the paper guide snugly against the left edge of the stack J 3 gt os e Q 72 MultiPASS C70 The MultiPASS C70 is now ready to print Chapter 2 Setting Up Your MultiPASS C70 2 43 Testing the MultiPASS C70 After you have assembled your MultiPASS C70 installed the BJ cartridge and loaded the print media you can make sure the MultiPASS C70 is printing properly by making several copies of a document For instructions see Chapter 10 Making Copies If you have problems printing refer to Chapter 13 Troubleshooting 2 44 Setting Up Your MultiPASS C70 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Registering Information in the MultiPASS C70 This chapter describes the methods of entering information in the Mul
45. Jet BJ cartridges BJ tanks and special print media All are designed to work with your MultiPASS C70 to help you produce the finest output possible These supplies are available from your local authorised Canon dealer BJ Cartridges and BJ Tanks IN Note The MultiPASS C70 uses Canon s BJ Bubble Jet cartridges to provide you with first rate crisp print and vibrant colours Canon s BJ cartridges use advanced ink formulas that dry quickly look great on plain paper are not easily affected by light and resist smudging In addition the print heads in the BJ cartridges cap themselves automatically when not in use thus saving ink by keeping the print heads from drying out BJ cartridges are also easy to maintain If your BC 21e Colour BJ cartridge runs out of ink simply replace the empty BJ tank black or colour If the BX 20 Black BJ cartridge or the optional BC 22e Photo BJ cartridge runs out of ink simply replace the entire cartridge 1 For optimum printing results and to avoid printing problems Canon recommends that you use the Canon BC 21e Colour BJ cartridge the Canon BX 20 Black BJ cartridge or the optional Canon BC 22e Photo BJ cartridge with your MultiPASS C70 1 When replacing BJ tanks in the BC 21e Colour BJ cartridge Canon recommends that you use the Canon BCI 21 Colour and the Canon BCI 21 Black BJ tanks The BJ cartridges included with your MultiPASS C70 may vary depending on the country of pu
46. MACHINE MODE or NET SWITCH If you have set ANS MACHINE MODE confirm that an answering machine is connected to the MultiPASS C70 and that it is turned on with an outgoing message properly recorded The MultiPASS C70 may have a document stored in memory d Print out any faxes stored in memory pp 7 29 8 18 8 28 The MultiPASS Desktop Manager may have received the fax 1 Check the In Box of the Desktop Manager gt MultiPASS Suite Software User s Guide An error may have occurred during reception 1 Check the LCD display for an error message p 13 7 The multi purpose tray may be empty I Make sure paper is loaded in the multi purpose tray p 2 40 The telephone line may not be connected properly I Make sure all line connections are secure p 2 17 The MultiPASS C70 does not switch automatically between telephone and fax reception The MultiPASS C70 may not be set to switch automatically between telephone and fax reception d For the MultiPASS C70 to switch automatically the receive mode must be set to Fax Tel Mode ANS MACHINE MODE or NET SWITCH If you have set ANS MACHINE MODE confirm that an answering machine is connected to the MultiPASS C70 and that it is turned on with an outgoing message properly recorded An error may have occurred during reception LY Check the LCD display for an error message gt p 13 7 D Print the Activity Report and check for an error gt p 11 5
47. PC may have been turned on when you connected the parallel cable I Unplug the unit and turn off the PC Plug the unit back in and turn the PC back on again The orange tape may not be removed from the BJ cartridge 11 Be sure to remove the orange tape from the BJ cartridge before you install it gt p 2 34 Chapter 13 Troubleshooting 13 27 The BJ cartridge or a BJ tank may not be installed properly 1 Make sure the BJ cartridge and the BJ tank s are installed properly gt pp 2 31 12 26 The BJ cartridge print head may need cleaning 1 Clean the BJ cartridge print head gt p 12 17 The BJ cartridge or the BJ tank s may need to be replaced d Replace the BJ cartridge or the BJ tank s gt pp 12 19 12 26 The application you are printing from may not be set up properly 1 Check the PC and the application to make sure they are configured correctly 1 Make sure your application has the MultiPASS C70 selected as the printer gt MultiPASS Suite Software User s Guide The MultiPASS C70 may not be set as the default printer or the selected printer 1 Make sure the MultiPASS C70 is selected as the default or current printer gt MultiPASS Suite Software User s Guide 1 Make sure the MultiPASS Service MPService is running gt MultiPASS Suite Software User s Guide The printer driver may be configured with the wrong port 0 Make sure the MultiPASS printer driver is configured to use t
48. SETTINGS menu 3 5 14 3 14 5 14 6 User s Data List 3 18 11 3 User s Guide MultiPASS Suite Software 1 13 2 7 this guide 1 13 1 14 2 7 type conventions 1 15 1 16 V VERTICAL ONLY setting 14 14 Volume ALARM VOLUME setting 14 6 CALLING VOLUME setting 14 6 KEYPAD VOLUME setting 14 6 LINE MONITOR VOL setting 14 6 RX CALL LEVEL setting 14 6 VOLUME CONTROL setting 14 6 VOLUME CONTROL setting 14 6 Ww WAIT COOLING message 13 15 Warranty 2 8 sheet 2 7 Weight document 4 2 paper 5 2 Index I 17 I 18 Index Canon CANON INC 3 30 2 Shimomaruko Ohta ku Tokyo 146 8501 Japan CANON U S A INC One Canon Plaza Lake Success N Y 11042 U S A CANON CANADA INC 6390 Dixie Road Mississauga Ontario LST 1P7 Canada CANON EUROPA N V Bovenkerkerweg 59 61 P O Box 2262 1180 EG Amstelveen The Netherlands CANON DEUTSCHLAND GmbH P O Box 528 47705 Krefeld Europark Fichtenhain A10 47807 Krefeld Germany CANON U K LTD Woodlhatch Reigate Surrey RH2 8BF United Kingdom CANON FRANCE S A 17 quai du President Paul Doumer 92414 Courbevoie Cedex France CANON LATIN AMERICA INC 6505 Blue Lagoon Drive Suite 325 Miami Florida 33126 U S A CANON AUSTRALIA PTY LTD 1 Thomas Holt Drive North Ryde Sydney N S W 2113 Australia CANON SINGAPORE PTE LTD 79 Anson Road 09 01 06 Singapore 079906 CANON HONG KONG CO LTD 9 F The Hong Kong Club Building 3A Chater Road Central H
49. Settings 14 5 User Settings Menu Name Description Settings DATE amp TIME Set the date using the numeric buttons Set the time 24 hour clock using the numeric buttons UNIT TELEPHONE Enter your fax telephone number using the numeric buttons up to 20 digits UNIT NAME Enter your name or company name you want to appear at the top of each fax page you send up to 24 characters TX TERMINAL ID Set the TTI POSITION and TELEPHONE MARK features ON OFF TTI POSITION Select the position for the identification header TTI that OUTSIDE IMAGE appears on every page you send INSIDE IMAGE OUTSIDE IMAGE Position the TTI outside the image area INSIDE IMAGE Position the TTI inside the image area TELEPHONE MARK Select the prefix for the number FAX TEL SCAN CONTRAST Select the contrast of the reproduction STANDARD DARKER Select for light originals DARKER LIGHTER Select for dark originals LIGHTER OFFHOOK ALARM Enable disable the off hook alarm The alarm alerts you ON OFF that the handset or the handset of the telephone or extension phone is off hook VOLUME CONTROL Select the audio level of the following sounds CALLING VOLUME Select the volume of the ring produced when the 1 2 3 MultiPASS C70 detects a voice call KEYPAD VOLUME Select the volume of the keypad touch beep For no 0 1 2 3 sound select 0 ALARM VOLUME _ Select the volume of the error alarm sound For no sound 0 1 2 3 select O
50. Software User s Guide Previous software settings may not be cleared 1 Make sure the MultiPASS C70 was cleared of the previous software settings before the print job started See the application s documentation Printout does not match paper size Paper may not be loaded and aligned correctly in the multi purpose tray 1 Make sure the paper is loaded and aligned correctly gt p 2 40 The application s page size and margin settings may be incorrect 1 Make sure the page size and margin set in your application are correct for the paper in the multi purpose tray The MultiPASS printer driver may not be selected 1 Make sure the MultiPASS is selected as the default printer in your application gt MultiPASS Suite Software User s Guide If the BJ cartridge print head prints on the platen clean the ink off the platen by launching Notepad and setting the application to print 2 or 3 blank sheets of paper iN Note 13 30 Troubleshooting Chapter 13 The MultiPASS C70 suspends printing after each line The BJ cartridge print head may have become too hot If this happens the MultiPASS C70 may be slowing its printing speed at the end of each line to protect the BJ cartridge print head 1 Stop your print operation and wait several minutes to allow the unit to cool Then start your operation again D E 2 fe a 2 2 3 Print jobs vanish or you are printing garbage Another Wi
51. You must install the MultiPASS Desktop Manager to use your MultiPASS C70 as a printer scanner or PC fax N Noise A term applied to a variety of problems that impair the operation of telephone lines used for faxing Noise level See dB A Numeric buttons The round numbered buttons on the operation panel marked the same as a standard telephone keypad Press them to perform regular dialling They are also used to enter numbers letters and symbols when registering numbers and names and for entering two digit codes for coded speed dialling G 8 Glossary O Off line The printer s communication status in which you cannot transfer data from your PC to the printer On line The printer s communication status in which it is being controlled by your PC and is ready to receive data One touch speed dialling An automatic dialling method that allows you to dial a fax or telephone number by pressing a single one touch speed dialling button The MultiPASS C70 can store up to 12 numbers for one touch speed dialling One touch speed dialling buttons The buttons numbered 01 to 12 on the operation panel each of which may be registered as a fax or telephone number Once a number is registered you press one button to dial the entire number P Page orientation Refers to the direction of print on the page Printing across the width of a page is called portrait orientation Printing across the length of a page is calle
52. be about 2 5 cm in diameter 3 Keep the film rolled up for about five minutes 1 You may want to fasten the roll with a small piece of tape G 5 20 Paper Handling Chapter 5 Printing on High Resolution Paper HR 101 To load High Resolution Paper HR 101 in the MultiPASS C70 follow the same procedure as for loading paper in the multi purpose tray p 2 40 However before printing be sure to raise the paper output guides as described below After using a package of High Resolution Paper be sure to perform the cleaning operation described on the following page Using the Cleaning Sheet Using the Paper Output Guides When printing on Canon High Resolution Paper HR 101 or Canon Banner Paper you should use the guides on the MultiPASS C70 s paper output tray to help support the printed sheet as it exits the unit This will keep the sheet from sagging and pulling through the unit as it exits which can lead to poor print quality 1 Raise both paper output guides to a vertical position 1 You can hold the document tray up for easy access to the paper output guides Le 3 c Go I o a LA Always raise both paper output guides Note Chapter 5 Paper Handling 5 21 2 When you finish printing on Canon High Resolution Paper HR 101 or Canon Banner Paper lower the paper output guides Always lower the paper output guides when using the MultiPASS C70 as a fax machine
53. document 4 2 envelopes 5 2 fabric sheets 5 2 glossy photo paper 5 2 high gloss film 5 2 high resolution paper 5 2 plain paper 5 2 transparencies 5 2 Software MultiPASS Desktop Manager 1 10 MultiPASS Suite Software User s Guide 1 13 2 7 requirements for MultiPASS Desktop Manager 1 10 Space button 2 27 2 28 Special function buttons 2 25 2 26 2 27 2 28 See also individual button names using 3 4 Special print media supplies 1 12 Specialty papers See also individual print media names guidelines 5 18 5 19 requirements 5 2 selecting 5 6 to 5 8 using 5 18 to 5 31 Speed dialling coded 6 2 6 11 to 6 18 7 8 definition 6 2 group 6 2 6 19 to 6 25 7 8 lists 6 26 to 6 30 11 3 methods 6 2 one touch 6 2 6 3 to 6 10 7 8 Standby mode 2 21 3 7 START AGAIN message 13 15 Start Scan button 2 25 2 26 Stop button 2 25 2 26 Storing BJ cartridge 2 37 2 38 Supplies BJ cartridges 1 11 BJ tanks 1 11 special print media 1 12 Support cradle 2 6 2 7 See also Appendix B Handset customer 1 17 13 2 13 3 document 2 6 2 7 2 12 2 23 Switchboard dialling through 9 2 to 9 4 Rbutton 2 27 Index I 15 registering access type 9 2 to 9 4 registering outside line access number 9 2 to 9 4 registering R button 9 2 to 9 4 Symbols 3 8 entering 3 11 SYSTEM SETTINGS menu 3 6 14 4 14 15 14 16 T Tank See BJ tank TEL LINE TYPE setting 3 19 14 6 Telephone connecting 2 18 features 1 7
54. for Colour Copying For best results when copying in colour adjust the MultiPASS C70 for the type of paper you are using The default paper type setting is PLAIN PAPER Follow the procedure below Function 1 Press Function 01 2 Press Data Registration DATA REGSTRATION 0 Data Registration Set 3 Press Set ae USER SETTINGS 08 _ o2 4 Use V or A to select PRINTER SETTINGS ca Cc PRINTER SETTINGS Set 5 Press Set RX REDUCTION 08 o2 6 Use V or A to select COLOR COPY MEDIA ca Cc lt gt COLOR COPY MEDIA Set 7 Press Set CD 1 The current paper type setting is displayed Ex PLAIN PAPER Chapter 10 Making Copies 10 5 o 2 2 8 D x 08 8 Use V or A to select the paper type setting you want for colour 2 i paper typ 8y V A copying Ex m You can select from the following settings e PLAIN PAPER e HIGH RES PAPER High resolution paper Set 9 Press Set to register your setting Stop 10 Press Stop to return to standby mode Ex 1500 FaxOnly 10 6 Making Copies Chapter 10 Setting the Length of the Bottom Margin for Colour Printing You can adjust the length of the bottom margin for colour copying colour printing and colour reception The default margin length is NORMAL 21 mm Follow the procedure below Function 1 Press Function 01 2 Press Data Registration DATA REGSTRATION
55. from your PC N Please note that all settings that can be performed from the MultiPASS C70 operation panel can also be adjusted using your MultiPASS Desktop Manager for Windows software MultiPASS Suite Software User s Guide Note How to Use This Guide To make the best use of this guide in learning how to set up and operate your MultiPASS C70 be sure to do the following 1 Read this chapter to learn about the MultiPASS C70 s main features available supplies and guidelines on using the unit safely d Carefully follow the instructions in Chapter 2 Setting Up Your MultiPASS C70 to get your MultiPASS C70 unpacked assembled and ready to operate 1 Read Chapter 3 Registering Information in the MultiPASS C70 to learn how to enter information in the MultiPASS C70 via the operation panel and how to register your sender information d Refer to Chapter 4 Document Handling for details on the document requirements for your MultiPASS C70 and how to load documents for automatic and manual feed Chapter 1 Introducing the MultiPASS C70 1 13 d Refer to Chapter 5 Paper Handling for details on paper and other print media you can use with your unit and instructions for loading these in the MultiPASS C70 d Read Chapter 6 Speed Dialling to learn how to register numbers for speed dialling how to change your entries and how to use speed dialling to send documents 1 Read Chapters 7 through 10 to master the
56. ieas eaei tarit aE n E er EEEE EE ENEE EE EE A 6 i Telephone serene e RE E E EEE Seren reer A 7 E A n oE ES E TA A 8 i B Carte consone aE RERA A 12 gt i SCAM CT aoaea a a Aa a E A teats auateae es tacts A 13 1 MultiPASS Desktop Manager for Windows ccsseseseeteseseees A 17 D a Appendix A Specifications A 1 General Specifications Power Source 200 240 V 60 Hz Power Consumption Approx 46 2 W Maximum Approx 6 9 W Standby Dimensions W x D x H 367 x 340 x 209 mm Main unit no tray no handset 453 x 606 x 277 mm Main unit including tray and handset Weight Approx 5 4 kg Environmental Conditions Temperature 10 32 5 C Humidity 20 85 Liquid Crystal Display LCD 16 x1 Display Languages English French Spanish German Italian Dutch Finnish Portuguese Norwegian Swedish Danish Slovene Czech Hungarian Applicable standards e Electrical safety GS FIMKO e Radiation CISPR Pub 22 Class B e PIT e Energy Star compliant A 2 Specifications Appendix A Space Requirements 606 mm 476 mm o fa 2 2 i Appendix A Specifications A 3 Facsimile Applicable Line Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN Compatibility G3 Data compressing system MH MR MMR JBIG JPEG Modem Type Fax modem Modem speed 14400 9600 7200 4800 2400 bps
57. is enabled Cancelling Manual Redialling To cancel manual redialling press the Stop button Automatic Redialling LA Note When you are sending using memory sending and the other party s line is busy the unit waits the specified time and then dials the same number again You can set the MultiPASS C70 to redial several times if the previous attempts failed because the line was busy This feature is called automatic redialling What is Automatic Redialling After the initial dial attempt the unit is factory set to wait two minutes and try to dial again If the second attempt fails because the line was busy the unit will again wait for two minutes and make a final attempt to complete the call Automatic redialling can be turned off and on The number of redialling attempts and the time interval between attempts can also be adjusted gt p 7 20 If all redial attempts are unsuccessful the unit will cancel the transmission and print an Error TX Report to remind you that the transmission was not completed p 11 6 The automatic redialling feature can also be set up from the MultiPASS Desktop Manager gt MultiPASS Suite Software User s Guide Chapter 7 Sending Faxes 7 17 When automatic redialling is in use the LCD display alternately displays AUTO REDIAL and the transaction number TX RX NO while it is waiting to redial AUTO REDIAL TX RX NO 0013 When it begins redialling the LCD
58. is the abbreviation used for transaction number RX Denotes receiving TX Denotes sending In addition this guide uses bold type letters to show the names of buttons on the unit such as Data Registration Stop and Start Scan Text that appears in the unit s LCD display is shown as in this example PRINTING REPORT 1 16 Introducing the MultiPASS C70 Chapter 1 Customer Support Your MultiPASS C70 is designed with the latest technology to provide trouble free operation If you have a problem with the unit s operation try to solve it by using the information in Chapter 13 Troubleshooting If you cannot solve the problem or if you think your MultiPASS C70 needs service contact your local authorised Canon dealer or the Canon help line o Ez dD S o 5 3 9 amp MultiPASS C70 Chapter 1 Introducing the MultiPASS C70 1 17 Important Safety Instructions Read these safety instructions thoroughly before using your MultiPASS C70 and keep them handy in case you need to refer to them later Except as specifically described in this guide do not attempt to CAUTION service the MultiPASS C70 yourself Never attempt to disassemble the unit opening and removing its interior covers will expose you to dangerous voltages and other risks For all service contact your local authorised Canon dealer or the Canon help line m m Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the MultiPASS C7
59. it face down in the Automatic EMORY USE Standby to scan DOCUMENT READY O b 3 5 G IL S Q Q 2 Q If you are sending in colour to a fax machine with colour capability press Color B amp W to turn on its light gt p 7 3 OQ If necessary you can adjust the resolution and contrast gt pp 7 4 7 6 2 Use the numeric buttons to dial the international access code Ex _ TEL 00 1 If you make a mistake during dialling press Stop 1 For details on the international access code contact your local telephone company Chapter 9 Special Features 9 5 C Pause 3 O Pause 5 O Start Scan If necessary press C Redial Pause to enter a pause Ex _ TEL OOP T A pause entered within a number p is two seconds long Q1 If you need a longer pause you can press the C Redial Pause button again for another two second pause Alternatively you can change the length of the pause in the MID PAUSE SET setting in the TX SETTINGS menu gt pp 14 9 14 10 Use the numeric buttons to dial the country code the area code and the fax telephone number of the other party Ex _ TEL 00p8112345 Q If you make a mistake during dialling press Stop and start again from step 2 When you have entered the fax telephone number if necessary press O Redial Pause to enter a pause Ex _ TEL 00p8112345P 0 A pause at the end of a
60. light gt p 7 3 Q If necessary you can adjust the resolution and contrast gt pp 7 4 7 6 1 You may not be able to use memory sending if the percentage shown in the MEMORY USED display is close to 100 In this case use manual sending via the handset to send your document 2 Dial the other party s fax number C1 Use one of the dialling methods described earlier in this chapter gt p 7 8 Ex TEL 9p7654321 C1 If you enter the wrong number press Stop then enter the correct number Q If you must first dial a digit to get an outside line 9 for example add a pause after that digit by pressing Redial Pause as shown in the example above 7 10 Sending Faxes Chapter 7 Sua Sean 3 Press Start Scan to begin scanning for sending C1 If you used speed dialling to dial the number the unit will automatically begin scanning the document into memory a few seconds after making the entry If you prefer the MultiPASS C70 never to scan a document automatically after a few seconds you can turn this feature off gt TIME OUT pp 14 9 14 10 1 You will see a series of brief messages showing details on the transmission N x LL dD S lt o Yn 1 To cancel the transmission once the unit has started to dial press Stop The LCD display then asks you to confirm cancelling Press to cancel sending p 7 14 LA 1 You can scan up to 30 different documents for me
61. modem before using your MultiPASS C70 Note Chapter 2 Setting Up Your MultiPASS C70 2 19 Connecting the Power Cord Follow these guidelines when connecting your MultiPASS C70 toa power source CAUTION 1 The MultiPASS C70 is intended for domestic use only and requires 200 240 V AC Do not use it outside the country for which it is intended 1 Only plug the unit into a 200 240 volt AC 50 60 Hz three prong grounded outlet d Use only the power cord that came with the unit Using a longer cord or extension cord can cause the unit to malfunction C1 Unplug the unit only by pulling on the plug itself Never pull on the cord 1 The MultiPASS C70 is equipped with a three prong grounding type plug provided with a third grounding pin This plug will only fit into a grounding type outlet This is a safety feature If you are unable to insert the plug into your outlet contact an electrician to replace your outlet Do not defeat the safety purpose of the grounding type plug by breaking off the third prong or using a 3 to 2 adaptor 1 Do not plug the MultiPASS C70 into the same circuit as an appliance such as an air conditioner electric typewriter television or copier Such devices generate electrical noise that can interfere with your MultiPASS C70 s ability to send and receive faxes 1 Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord and do not locate the unit where the cord will be walked on Make sure the cor
62. on ECM RX pp 14 11 14 12 Errors occur frequently while receiving The telephone lines may be in poor condition or you may have a bad connection 1 Lower the reception speed gt RX START SPEED pp 14 15 14 16 The sending fax machine may not be functioning properly 1 The sending fax machine usually determines the fax s quality Call the sender and have them make sure the top cover and scanning glass on their fax machine are clean 13 22 Troubleshooting Chapter 13 Telephone Problems You cannot dial The telephone line may not be connected properly 1 Make sure the telephone line is connected properly to the MultiPASS C70 gt p 2 17 D 2 e a 2 Q o n The unit may not be getting power 1 Make sure the power cord is connected to the MultiPASS C70 and to an AC outlet gt p 2 20 Make sure the AC outlet has power The MultiPASS C70 may not be set for the type of telephone line in use pulse tone 1 If you have a pulse line make sure the MultiPASS C70 is set for pulse dialling gt p 3 19 The telephone disconnects while you are talking The power cord may not be plugged in securely 1 Check that the power cord is plugged securely into the unit and into the wall outlet gt p 2 20 If the unit is plugged into a power strip make sure the power strip is plugged in and turned on If the MultiPASS C70 is in ANS MACHINE MODE and the INCOMING RING set
63. only Do not touch the print head the sharp edges around the print head the silver plate on the bottom CAUTION of the BJ cartridge or the silver metal or circuit area on its side HOLD HERE PRINT HEAD DO NOT TOUCH 5 Remove and dispose of the BJ cartridge or store it in the BJ cartridge container QO If disposing of the BJ cartridge you may want to place it ina plastic bag to keep any residual ink from spilling 12 22 Maintenance Chapter 12 6 Peel the cover off the new BJ cartridge s protective packaging and remove the BJ cartridge Hold the BJ cartridge by its sides only Do not touch the print head the sharp edges around the print head the silver plate on the bottom CAUTION of the BJ cartridge or the silver metal or circuit area on its side HOLD HERE PRINT HEAD DO NOT TOUCH 7 Lift the orange cap off the BJ cartridge s print head then remove the orange tape CAP TAPE Maintenance Chapter 12 Maintenance 12 23 LJ Spilled ink can stain any surface protect yourself and your work area LI Discard the cap and tape immediately Never attempt to reattach the cap or tape to the print head or you can adversely affect the ink flow or quality of the ink colour iN Note 8 Hold the BJ cartridge so that its label faces outwards then slide it into the cartridge holder Q Be careful not to touch the silver plate on th
64. or they can cause the faxes to pile up and jam iN Note Using the Cleaning Sheet Canon s High Resolution Paper HR 101 is designed for high quality printing This paper is specially coated to produce delicate colour output After using a package of High Resolution Paper HR 101 200 sheets you need to use the cleaning sheet provided with the paper to remove paper dust from the unit s rollers this will help prevent paper feed problems 1 Make sure the paper thickness lever is set to the left D 1 For details refer to Setting the Paper Thickness Lever on page 5 10 l ME To avoid paper jams smearing and other problems never open the printer cover to set the paper thickness lever while the MultiPASS C70 is printing CAUTION 5 22 Paper Handling Chapter 5 2 Remove the covers from the two pieces of tape on the cleaning sheet gt x 3 With the sticky side out towards you and down going into the multi purpose tray insert the sheet into the multi purpose tray until it stops so that the right edge of the sheet is aligned with the right side of the multi purpose tray Then slide the paper guide snugly against the left edge of the cleaning sheet Function 4 Press Function o ZINN 3 i aq 10 5 Press Cleaning A Cleaning NOZZLE CHECK 08 02 6 Use V or A to select ROLLER CLEANING V A ROLLER CLEANING Chapter 5 Paper Hand
65. other party s fax unit press Start Scan on your unit and then hang up the handset QO The unit begins sending the document T You will see a series of brief messages showing details on the transmission A Note Be sure to hang up the handset after you press the Start Scan button on your unit If you hang up first you will disconnect the call If the offhook alarm starts beeping make sure the handset is resting properly in its cradle If you send a colour document to a fax machine that does not support colour faxing the document will not be sent and the LCD display will show this message TRY AGAIN IN B W Try sending again in black amp white Chapter 7 Sending Faxes 7 13 Cancelling Sending Follow this procedure if you want to stop sending a document before transmission is completed Stop 1 Press Stop 1 For manual sending the transmission is cancelled 1 For memory sending the MultiPASS C70 asks you to confirm that you want to cancel CANCEL KYES NO 2 Press to cancel sending T Sending is not cancelled until you press Q If you change your mind and want to continue sending press m To cancel transmission of a document waiting to be sent because the unit is waiting to redial refer to Deleting a Document From Memory gt p 7 33 Q To cancel transmission of a document waiting to be sent from memory delayed sending for example refer to Deleti
66. out any documents that are stored in memory gt p 7 29 Then start the operation again Divide the document and send each part separately To free the unit s memory print or delete any faxes in memory you no longer need gt pp 7 29 7 33 If you need more space wait for the unit to send any faxes Also print or delete any faxes in memory you no longer need gt pp 7 29 7 33 Chapter 13 Troubleshooting 13 13 UEST NO ANSWER NO RX PAPER NO TEL NOT AVAILABLE PHOTO INK IN USE PLEASE WAIT PRINT W BC 22e PUT IN CARTRIDGE Error Code 005 012 022 025 Cause The receiving fax machine does not answer The other party s fax machine is out of paper or its memory is full The one touch speed dialling button or coded speed dialling code you entered has not been registered In manual sending you entered a speed dialling number that is assigned to a group The optional BC 22e Photo BJ cartridge is installed in the unit The unit is warming up The unit is confirming that it is all right to print a colour document in memory with the optional BC 22e Photo BJ cartridge The BJ cartridge is not installed correctly The BJ cartridge is not installed Action Make sure you dialled the correct number Try again later Contact the other party and have them install paper in their fax machine Register the speed dialling button or code
67. print the received colour fax in memory with the optional BC 22e Photo BJ cartridge gt p 7 29 You can also convert a received colour fax in memory to black amp white and print the fax with the BX 20 Black BJ cartridge gt p 7 29 Remove the optional BC 22e Photo BJ cartridge and install the BX 20 Black or BC 21e Colour BJ cartridge p 12 19 13 12 Troubleshooting Chapter 13 UEST INSTALL BC21e 20 Cta LINE IN USE LOAD PAPER MEMORY FULL MEMORY USED nn Error Code 037 Cause You tried to print a received black amp white fax print a report or print a black amp white document in memory with the optional BC 22e Photo BJ cartridge installed The unit is set for Fax Tel Mode and you are receiving a telephone call The multi purpose tray is empty The unit s memory is full because it has received too many documents or a very long or detailed document Memory is full because you tried to send too many pages at once or a very long or detailed document Shows the percentage of memory currently in use Action Remove the optional BC 22e Photo BJ cartridge and install the BX 20 Black or BC 21e Colour BJ cartridge gt p 12 19 D c fe Ea 7 w is n Answer the call Load paper in the multi purpose tray gt p 2 40 Make sure the stack does not exceed the paper limit mark pl Then press the Resume button Print
68. scanning 1 Wait until the last sheet in the Automatic Document Feeder ADF starts feeding 2 Load up to 20 additional sheets 10 legal size 1 Insert the first new sheet so that it overlaps the last sheet by about 2 5 cm Ai Wait until all pages of your document have been scanned completely oe before starting a new job 4 10 Document Handling Chapter 4 Loading Documents for Manual Feed 1 Make sure the document feed lever is set to manual document feed J d 2 Adjust the document guides to the width of the document o or ES 2E 8s T Chapter 4 Document Handling 4 11 3 Gently insert the document face down top of the document towards you into the Automatic Document Feeder ADF until you hear a beep m The document is now ready for scanning Ai Wait until your document has been scanned completely before starting a new job Note J When you have finished scanning your document be sure to slide the document guides outwards Leaving the document guides near the centre of the Automatic Document Feeder ADF may obstruct opening the printer cover and cause damage to the unit CAUTION 4 12 Document Handling Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Paper Handling This chapter describes how to select prepare and load print media for the different functions your MultiPASS C70 can perform EY Print M dia REQuitements
69. sorted Press to print the list with the names of the destinations in alphabetical order Or Press to print the list in code or button order 1 The unit begins printing the list Samples of the lists are shown below and on the following page One Touch Speed Dial List Sorted 27 12 2000 17 23 FAX 123 4567 CANON d 001 FOI IO III IOI IOI II ior ae 1 TOUCH SPD DIAL LIST bladed FOI IOI IOI TOI IOI TOO I IGGr NO CONNECTION TEL CONNECTION ID 12 2 887 0166 Canon AUSTRALIA 01 905 795 1111 Canon CANADA 03 GROUP DIAL Canon EUROPA 04 250921 Canon ITALIA 05 1 432 2060 Canon OPTICS Unsorted 27 12 2000 17 23 FAX 123 4567 CANON 001 FOI IOI OOOO ITO IIe wee 1 TOUCH SPD DIAL LIST wee FOI IOI III IOI I IOI III IIe NO CONNECTION TEL CONNECTION ID 01 905 795 1111 Canon CANADA 03 GROUP DIAL Canon EUROPA 04 2 50921 Canon ITALIA 05 1 432 2060 Canon OPTICS 12 2 887 0166 Canon AUSTRALIA Chapter 6 Speed Dialling 6 27 D S a ge Q 7 Coded Speed Dial List Sorted 27 12 2000 17 23 FAX 123 4567 CANON 001 wee CODED SPEED DIAL LIST kkk NO CONNECTION TEL CONNECTION ID x 00 2131 1250 Canon DEUTSCH x 02 1 49 39 25 25 Canon FRANCE k 21 GROUP DIAL Canon GROUP 1 Pk 01 03 3758 2111 Canon TOKYO k 03 516p488 6700 Canon U S A Kk 32
70. step 13 press the Clear button to delete the name D S S a a 2 n Chapter 6 Speed Dialling 6 23 Using Group Dialling Follow this procedure to send a document to a group of destinations registered under a one touch speed dialling button or a coded speed dialling code To use this feature you must first register a group of fax numbers for one touch speed dialling or coded speed dialling gt Creating Groups p 6 19 Be sure to adjust the document feed lever before loading your document p 4 5 IN Note Document Feeder ADF pp 4 6 4 11 m The LCD display shows the following Currently used memory gt 1 Prepare the document and load it face down in the Automatic EMORY USE Standby to scan DOCUMENT READY Q If you are sending in colour to fax machines with colour capability press Color B amp W to turn on its light gt p 7 3 Q If necessary you can adjust the resolution and contrast for your document pp 7 4 7 6 2 Enter the group registered under a one touch speed dialling button or coded speed dialling code To enter a group registered under a one touch speed dialling button Press the one touch speed dialling button assigned to the group you wish to send the document to TEL GROUP DIAL 1 If you press the wrong button press Stop then press the correct button 6 24 Speed Dialling Chapter 6 Start Scan
71. the BJ tank from the BJ cartridge 12 28 Maintenance Chapter 12 5 Dispose of the BJ tank properly m You may want to place it in a plastic bag to keep any residual ink from spilling 6 Take the new BJ tank out of its bag and remove its orange cap Be careful not to touch the bottom of the BJ tank as you may get ink on your hands CAUTION DO NOT TOUCH Maintenance Chapter 12 Maintenance 12 29 7 Slide the new BJ tank into the empty slot 8 Press firmly on the tab on top of the new BJ tank in the direction shown below until the tank snaps into place 12 30 Maintenance Chapter 12 9 If you need to replace the other tank repeat steps 4 to 8 gt p 12 28 10 Press Bl Q The cartridge holder moves to its home position on the right side of the unit and begins cleaning the print head This process takes about 55 seconds Do not try to manually move or stop the cartridge holder as this may damage the MultiPASS C70 CAUTION 11 Close the printer cover Ai Unplug the MultiPASS C70 only when it is in standby mode time and receive mode shown in the LCD display Do not unplug the MultiPASS C70 when the cartridge holder is not in its home position on the right If you unplug the unit while it is printing or move the cartridge holder from its home position the BJ cartridge will not be capped and can dry o
72. unit s operating procedures such as sending and receiving faxes special dialling restricting use of the MultiPASS C70 and making copies d Refer to Chapter 11 Reports and Lists to learn about the reports and lists that can be automatically or manually printed from your MultiPASS C70 Look over Chapter 12 Maintenance to become familiar with procedures for cleaning the MultiPASS C70 replacing BJ cartridges and BJ tanks and transporting the MultiPASS C70 LY If your unit is not operating properly use Chapter 13 Troubleshooting to try to solve the problem LY Refer to Chapter 14 Summary of Settings to learn how to change default settings on your MultiPASS C70 and how to customise your unit to your needs d Refer to Appendix A Specifications for the MultiPASS C70 s technical specifications d Refer to Appendix B Handset for instructions on attaching the handset to your MultiPASS C70 and for details on its functions and maintaining your handset If you still have questions about how to use your MultiPASS C70 please contact your local authorised Canon dealer or the Canon help line They will be happy to answer your questions 1 14 Introducing the MultiPASS C70 Chapter 1 Type Conventions Used in This Guide Please read the list below of symbols terms and abbreviations used in this guide and make sure you know what they mean A complete glossary of terms is included at the end of this guide o Ez
73. your PC to print on the fabric sheet 4 When the fabric sheet is printed let it dry for about one hour to allow the ink to dry completely 5 When dry peel the film backing from the printed fabric sheet 6 Wash the printed fabric sheet for about three minutes under lukewarm running water to remove extra ink 7 Hang the fabric sheet up to dry it again 8 Iron the dried fabric sheet with a clothes iron ke c vj I o a LA See the booklet that comes with the Fabric Sheet FS 101 for details on Noe drying and washing Chapter 5 Paper Handling 5 25 Printing on Banner Paper Banner paper is a continuous sheet of paper with perforations at equal distances along its length where it can be cut to the length required For best results use Canon s Banner Paper To set up a print job on banner paper you must decide on the number of sheets you need You can print banners from two to six sheets in length Always leave an extra sheet at the end of the banner just in case the type runs over N Note The shaded portions of the illustration below show the maximum recommended printing area of banner paper APPROX 1800 mm 6 SHEETS MAX 2 SHEETS MIN 297 mm D Printing on banner paper requires quite a bit of ink If you think your BJ cartridge may run out of ink use a new BJ cartridge N Note D For best print results on banner pap
74. your details in your MultiPASS C70 so that whenever you send a fax the other party will know who sent it and when it was sent The following page shows an example of the sender information printed on a received fax 3 12 Registering Information in the MultiPASS C70 Chapter 3 27 12 2000 10 12 FAX 123 4567 CANON CANON CANADA 001 DATE AND TIME Date and time of transmission THE SLEREXE CC MPANY LIMITED SAPORS LANE BOOI E DORSET BH25 8ER FAX TELEPHONE TELEPHONE BOOLE ft5 13 51617 FAX 123456 NUMBER Your fax telephone number You can select FAX or TEL to an be displayed in front Our Ref 350 PJC EAC of the number UNIT NAME Your name or company name DESTINATION If you used memory sending and dialled the fax number using one touch or coded speed dialling the other party s name appears here PAGE NUMBER The page number of the fax The following pages explain how to enter this information via the MultiPASS C70 operation panel LA You can also enter this information from the MultiPASS Desktop ice Manager gt MultiPASS Suite Software User s Guide Chapter 3 Registering Information in the MultiPASS C70 3 13 i E Ss 2 D i 2 az D gt co o S p lt ao lt S S Entering the Date and Time Follow this procedure to set the current date and time Function 1 Press Function lt CTN 01 2 Pr
75. 0 Place the MultiPASS C70 on a level surface To avoid serious damage from falling never place the unit on an unstable cart stand or table Do not use the MultiPASS C70 near water Make sure that no wet or humid objects come into contact with the unit To ensure reliable operation of the MultiPASS C70 and to protect it from overheating which can cause it to operate abnormally and create a fire risk never block or cover any openings on the unit by placing it on a bed sofa rug or other similar surface Do not place the unit in a cupboard or built in installation or near a radiator or other heat source unless proper ventilation is provided See Choosing a Location for Your MultiPASS C70 on page 2 3 for guidelines on how much space the unit needs for ventilation Only operate the MultiPASS C70 from the type of power source indicated on the unit s label If you are not sure of the type of power available consult your dealer or local power company The MultiPASS C70 is equipped with a three prong grounding type plug provided with a third grounding pin This plug will only fit into a grounding type outlet This is a safety feature If you are unable to insert the plug into your outlet contact an electrician to replace your outlet Do not defeat the safety purpose of the grounding type plug by breaking off the third prong or using a 3 to 2 adaptor The shape of the plug varies depending on the country of purchase 1 18 Int
76. 0 is plugged in 2 Open the printer cover by grasping the document guides and lifting 0 If the printer cover does not open easily slide the document guides outwards and then open the printer cover ISS KI DNN Q SS DOCUMENT GUIDE DOCUMENT GUIDE os i gt am OS SO 12 26 Maintenance Chapter 12 Do not touch the round shaft guide rail or ribbon cable Touching these parts may adversely affect operation of the unit and or cause CAUTION 5 print quality deterioration DO NOT TOUCH THE ROUND SHAFT DO NOT TOUCH THE GUIDE RAIL DO NOT TOUCH THE RIBBON CABLE The cartridge holder moves to the centre of the unit Maintenance Chapter 12 Maintenance 12 27 1 Do not try to manually move or stop the cartridge holder as this CAUTION may damage the MultiPASS C70 d The MultiPASS C70 includes an automatic protection feature that helps keep it from overheating If the cartridge holder does not move unplug the MultiPASS C70 and let it cool for several minutes When it has cooled plug it in again and press the El button to move the cartridge holder LA The colour BJ tank is on the left and the black BJ tank is on the right Note BCI 21 COLOUR BJ TANK BCI 21 BLACK BJ TANK 4 Remove the empty BJ tank by grasping the tab on the top of the empty BJ tank and pulling forward to release it Then lift out
77. 1 432 2060 CONNECTION ID Canon OPTICS ST TIME 27 12 14 59 USAGE T 00 00 PGS SENT 0 RESULT NG 018 BUSY NO SIGNAL TX Report You can change the TX REPORT setting to print a transmission TX report for every document you send gt TX REPORT pp 14 7 14 8 27 12 2000 14 59 FAX 123 4567 CANON 001 FOI III II ITO FOI III IOI IO e TRANSMISSION OK TX RX NO 0003 CONNECTION TEL 1 432 2060 CONNECTION ID Canon OPTICS ST TIME 27 12 14 59 USAGE T 00 18 PGS SENT 1 RESULT OK For colour transmissions the message COLOR TX is printed next to the TX RX NO 11 6 Reports and Lists Chapter 11 TX Report With First Page WHEN YOU SET THE FAX TO PRINT THE FIRST PAGE OF THE DOCUMENT You can adjust the TX REPORT setting to print the first part of the document on the transmission report to remind you of the content of the document gt PRINT WITH IMAGE pp 14 7 14 8 This is only effective when you send documents in black amp white using memory sending 27 12 2000 14 59 FAX 123 4567 CANON ld 001 FOOT IORI TX REPORT FOOT TOR ae TRANSMISSION OK TX RX NO 0004 CONNECTION TEL 20 545 8545 CONNECTION ID Canon EUROPA ST TIME 27 12 14 59 USAGE T 00 18 PGS SENT 1 RESULT OK THE SLEREXE COMPANY LIMITED SAPORS LANE BOOLE DORSET BH25 8ER TELEPHONE BOOLE 945 13 51617 FAX 123456 Our Ref 350 PJC EAC 27 December 2000
78. 1 The BJ cartridge may need to be replaced p 12 18 Replace as necessary p 12 19 Output appears jagged The resolution selected via the printer driver may be Draft 1 Check your printer driver to see what Print Mode you have selected Printing in Draft mode will give the output a jagged look Changing the Print Mode to Text should correct this problem gt MultiPASS Suite Software User s Guide Chapter 13 Troubleshooting 13 25 Fonts do not print as smoothly rounded characters Bitmapped fonts designed for dot matrix printers do not print smoothly rounded characters when used with high resolution printers like the MultiPASS C70 1 Make sure you installed an outline font manager such as Adobe Type Manager or Bitstream Facelift or that you are choosing a TrueType font Certain MS fonts such as MS Serif will print jagged d Choose another font Output is faint You may be using Draft print quality I Try using a different print mode gt MultiPASS Suite Software User s Guide Printing takes too much time You may be using Fine mode 1 Turn off Fine mode gt MultiPASS Suite Software User s Guide The printout contains blurred or smudged ink The print medium you are using may not be supported by the MultiPASS C70 1 Try a different paper type However use only print media specified in this guide gt Chapter 5 Paper Handling You may be printing on the wrong side of the shee
79. 11 RX Settings Menu Name Description Settings ECM RX Enable disable Error Correction Mode ECM during ON OFF reception RX MODE Select the receive mode Refer to Chapter 8 Receiving FAX ONLY MODE Faxes for details on setting the receive mode FAX TEL AUTO SW NET SWITCH If you select FAX TEL AUTO SW you can select sub settings For details on these sub settings refer to page 8 10 INCOMING RING When the MultiPASS C70 is set to FAX ONLY MODE ON OFF enable disable ringing when the MultiPASS C70 receives a call Select the number of incoming rings before the MultiPASS 2 TIMES C70 answers 1 to 99 MAN AUTO SWITCH When the MultiPASS C70 is in MANUAL MODE determine ON OFF if the MultiPASS C70 switches to fax receive mode after it rings for a specified time If you select ON select the length of time the MultiPASS 15 SEC C70 rings before switching to fax receive mode 1 to 99 REMOTE RX Enable disable remote receiving ON OFF If you select ON select the remote receiving ID 25 00 to 99 MEMORY RX Enable disable memory receiving of a document ON OFF COLOR RX Enable disable colour fax reception ON OFF Default settings are shown in bold type Even if you have set INCOMING RING to ON the MultiPASS C70 will only ring if you have connected the handset a telephone or an extension phone to your unit New Zealand 1 to 5 14 12 Summary of Settings Chapter 14 Printer Settings Accessin
80. 14 11 14 12 Faxes do not print The orange tape may not be removed from the BJ cartridge L1 Be sure to remove the orange tape from the BJ cartridge before you install it p 2 34 The BJ cartridge or a BJ tank may not be installed properly 1 Make sure the BJ cartridge and the BJ tank s are installed properly gt pp 2 31 12 26 Chapter 13 Troubleshooting 13 21 The BJ cartridge print head may need cleaning 1 Clean the BJ cartridge print head gt p 12 17 The BJ cartridge or the BJ tank s may need to be replaced 1 Replace the BJ cartridge or the BJ tank s gt pp 12 19 12 26 Fax images print blotched or uneven The telephone lines may be in poor condition or you may have a bad connection 1 Error Correction Mode ECM sending receiving should eliminate such problems However if the telephone lines are in poor condition you may have to try again The sending fax machine may not be functioning properly 1 The sending fax machine usually determines the fax s quality Call the sender and have them make sure the top cover and scanning glass on their fax machine are clean Cannot receive using Error Correction Mode ECM The other party s fax machine may not support ECM 1 Some fax machines do not support ECM If the other party s fax machine does not support ECM then the document is sent and received in normal mode without error checking ECM may be disabled 1 Make sure ECM is
81. 2 fe 3 o n m If a multipage document is loaded remove the entire document from the Automatic Document Feeder ADF If the paper does not pull out easily do not force it Contact your local authorised Canon dealer or the Canon help line IN Note 4 When you are finished close the operation panel by pressing it down from the centre LA Be sure to close the operation panel until it locks into place Otherwise the unit will not function properly Note Resume 5 Press Resume to clear the error message then start the operation O again Be sure to fan and stack your document before reinserting the stack in the Automatic Document Feeder ADF Chapter 13 Troubleshooting 13 5 Jams in the Multi Purpose Tray Use this procedure if the recording paper jams or misfeeds in the multi purpose tray If this happens the message CLEAR PAPER JAM appears in the display 1 Gently pull any jammed paper out of the unit as shown 1 You can hold the document tray up for easy access to the jammed paper 2 Remove the paper stack from the multi purpose tray and reload it gt p 2 40 T Make sure you push the paper to the back and right of the multi purpose tray and that the stack is not higher than the paper limit mark I Resume 3 Press Resume to clear the error message O Q If you are printing from a Windows application follow the instructions displayed by the softwar
82. 2110_ The fax telephone number can be up to 120 digits long including spaces and pauses 1 To enter a space press Space Spaces are optional and are ignored during dialling 1 To enter a pause in the number press C Redial Pause Q To correct a mistake in the number press lt to delete the rightmost digit 1 To delete the entire entry press Clear 6 12 Speed Dialling Chapter 6 15 Stop 13 Press Set to register the fax telephone number DATA ENTRY OK Press Set again Use the numeric buttons to enter the name that goes with the number Ex Canon Inc 1 The name can be up to 16 characters long including spaces 1 To enter letters numbers and symbols refer to the instructions on page 3 8 Press Set to register the name DATA ENTRY OK x02 To continue registering other coded speed dialling codes repeat the procedure from step 7 gt p 6 12 Or To finish registering coded speed dialling entries press Stop to return to standby mode Ex 15 00 FaxOnly Ai You can print the Coded Speed Dial List showing all the numbers and names registered for coded speed dialling p 6 26 Keep this list near your MultiPASS C70 so you can refer to it when dialling Note D S S a a o 2 n Chapter 6 Speed Dialling 6 13 Changing Deleting a Coded Speed Dialling Entry Follow this procedure to change a coded speed dialling e
83. 6 2 6 19 to 6 25 7 8 long distance number 9 5 9 6 methods 7 8 one touch speed 6 2 6 3 to 6 10 7 8 PC 7 8 regular 7 8 restricting 9 10 9 11 speed See Speed dialling switching temporarily to tone 9 7 9 8 through switchboard 9 2 to 9 4 Dimensions MultiPASS C70 2 4 Display LCD 2 25 DISPLAY LANGUAGE setting 14 16 Doc Memory List 7 28 11 2 DOC TOO LONG message 13 11 Document adding pages in Automatic Document Feeder ADF 4 10 copying 10 2 to 10 4 definition 1 15 feed lever 2 25 4 5 feeding multipage 4 6 to 4 10 guides 2 23 in memory 7 28 to 7 34 jams 13 4 13 5 loading 4 6 to 4 8 4 11 4 12 loading for automatic feed 4 6 to 4 8 Index I 5 loading for manual feed 4 11 4 12 problem 4 3 quantity 4 2 removing from Automatic Document Feeder ADF 7 15 7 16 requirements 4 2 4 3 size 4 2 thickness 4 2 trouble with multipage 4 9 weight 4 2 Document in memory deleting 7 33 7 34 printing 7 29 to 7 32 printing list 7 28 DOCUMENT READY message 13 11 Document support 2 6 2 7 2 23 attaching 2 12 Document tray 2 6 2 7 2 23 attaching 2 13 2 14 Documentation 2 6 MultiPASS Suite Software User s Guide 1 13 2 7 User s Guide 1 13 2 7 using this guide 1 13 1 14 warranty sheet 2 7 E EARTH CONNECTION setting 9 3 9 4 14 6 ECM RX message 13 11 setting 14 12 ECM TX message 13 11 setting 14 10 ECONOMY PRT setting 14 14 Envelopes 5 5 5 6 loading 5 15 to 5 17 printable area 5 4 requi
84. 70 for safe use CAUTION d Put the MultiPASS C70 in a cool dry clean well ventilated place e Make sure the area is free from dust b 3 gt Q D S o n MultiPASS C70 e Make sure the location is not affected by extreme temperature changes and always stays between 10 and 32 5 C e Make sure the area s relative humidity is always between 20 and 85 1 Keep the MultiPASS C70 away from direct sunlight If you have to place the unit near a window install heavy curtains or blinds to protect the unit from sunlight 1 If possible put the MultiPASS C70 near an existing telephone outlet to avoid the expense of installing a new one 1 Place the unit near a standard 200 240 V AC power outlet 1 Place the MultiPASS C70 near the PC you will be connecting it to Make sure you can reach it easily as you will be using it as a fax machine copier telephone printer and scanner 4 Do not use or store the unit outdoors 1 To avoid damage to the unit from overheating do not block the exhaust vent Install the unit approximately 10 cm away from walls or other equipment d Do not plug the MultiPASS C70 into the same circuit as an appliance such as an air conditioner electric typewriter television or copier Such devices generate electrical noise that can interfere with your MultiPASS C70 s ability to send and receive faxes T Set the MultiPASS C70 on a flat stable vibration free surface that is
85. 9 Chapter 10 Making Copies This chapter describes how to use your MultiPASS C70 to make copies and explains how to adjust settings for copying and printing EN Documents You Can COPY s issccssssssesssscsetecssasspsstessaconssniosecansssessaneasenises 10 2 El Copying Documents icsiiiienunidisinucuiedenamndaiaiis 10 2 T Setting the Paper Type for Colour Copying cccceeeeseeeeteteeceees 10 5 LI Setting the Length of the Bottom Margin for Colour Printing 10 7 Chapter 10 Making Copies 10 1 o Q 2 8 D x Documents You Can Copy For information on the types of documents you can copy their requirements and details on loading documents refer to Chapter 4 Document Handling Copying Documents One of the MultiPASS C70 s convenient features is its ability to make up to 99 high quality black amp white copies It can also make one colour copy of a document at a time To make copies do the following Be sure to adjust the document feed lever before loading your document p 4 5 N Note Document Feeder ADF pp 4 6 4 11 m The LCD display shows the following Currently used memory e 1 Prepare the document and load it face down in the Automatic EMORY USE Standby to scan DOCUMENT READY 2 Select colour or black amp white copying Color B amp W D For colour copying press Color B amp W to turn on its light O Color
86. AL No XXXXXXX 1 MultiPASS Desktop Manager version number The version number of the MultiPASS Desktop Manager is included in the About information In the Desktop Manager click Help and then click About 13 2 Troubleshooting Chapter 13 LY Place of purchase D Nature of problem Steps you have taken to solve the problem and the results D E T e e 0 2 re 3 o n Chapter 13 Troubleshooting 13 3 Clearing Jams On occasion the document feeding into the MultiPASS C70 s Automatic Document Feeder ADF or the paper in its multi purpose tray may misfeed or jam If this happens you can usually fix the problem using one of the procedures described in this section LA You do not need to unplug the MultiPASS C70 while clearing paper Note jams Jams in the Automatic Document Feeder ADF Use this procedure if the document in the MultiPASS C70 s Automatic Document Feeder ADF jams or misfeeds If this occurs the message CHECK DOCUMENT appears in the LCD display Stop 1 Press Stop 2 Open the operation panel by gently pulling it towards you m It opens only slightly A Do not try to pull the document out without opening the operation panel or you may tear or smudge the document 13 4 Troubleshooting Chapter 13 3 While holding the operation panel remove the document 1 Pull it in either direction but do not force it D E e e a
87. ASS C70 ccccccssesescenetesesesneneteeseeeeees 1 3 Colour and Plain Paper Fax Features ccccesescessececeseseeteneneneseane 1 4 PC Colour Fax Features cd iseiirais a an a E E 1 6 Colour Copier Features syrologi eir e E sient 1 7 Telephone Featureset neru investi amines ens 1 7 Colour Printer Features 0 cscs tccsecectryeareneeiernetearornianiats 1 8 Colour Scanner Features ircre ae E E E 1 9 d Using the MultiPASS C70 With the MultiPASS Desktop Manager for WiINdOWS nisser tirni ni ene oisi eaae eissis 1 10 e Hardware and Software Requirements c cccecccceeseeeneneeees 1 10 A Supph S eiie ne EE nns EEEE EESE EE EES E SNE ERER EE ees 1 11 BJ Cartridges and B Tanks csc ccc cs isscecsescecstetendisectstacseseetosvaseineush sheet 1 11 Special Print Mediasie ii sir Enei e iasi rE is ES 1 12 TL Using Your D cumentatlONssss sosisini 1 13 How to Use This Guide ccccssessonesscssecsccrsecaravepesescievinycoresenneannseseanetss 1 13 Type Conventions Used in This Guidet issen 1 15 LD Customer SUpport sisi vce diuetatcheesseacsastaceesenesduezanichuedseshatessbiersetsonersedhe 1 17 i Important Safety Instructions sener EE 1 18 Chapter 1 Introducing the MultiPASS C70 1 1 o Ez D S o 5 3 9 MultiPASS C70 Welcome Thank you for purchasing the new Canon MultiPASS C70 We are sure that your MultiPASS C70 will help you work more effectively and help you meet your fax and te
88. BJ cartridge The BC 22e Photo BJ cartridge is available as an option for the MultiPASS C70 For details on purchasing any of these cartridges contact your local authorised Canon dealer Note b 3 gt Q D S o n MultiPASS C70 BJ Cartridge Guidelines The most important thing you can do to ensure the best possible print quality as well as extend the life of your MultiPASS C70 is to take care of the MultiPASS C70 s BJ cartridges following these guidelines 1 Store BJ cartridges at room temperature 1 Keep BJ cartridges in their sealed containers until you are ready to use them Do not shake BJ cartridges vigorously while handling O To change a BJ cartridge be sure to press the l button inside the unit to move the cartridge holder to the centre 1 Install the BJ cartridge immediately after removing its print head cap and protective tape 1 Always use the BJ cartridge within one year of unpacking it 1 When changing BJ cartridges always store the unused BJ cartridge in the SB 21 BJ cartridge container provided with the MultiPASS C70 1 Do not remove the BJ cartridge from the MultiPASS C70 unless necessary The BJ cartridges included with your MultiPASS C70 may vary depending on the country of purchase Chapter 2 Setting Up Your MultiPASS C70 2 29 The ink in the BJ cartridges is difficult to clean up if spilled To avoid spilling ink always be sure to follow these precaut
89. Calling Tone This is a signal sent by fax machines to identify the call as an incoming document When the receiving fax detects this signal it automatically starts to receive the fax transmission The majority of fax machines in use today can send and detect CNG signals Coded speed dialling An automatic dialling method that allows you to dial a fax or telephone number by pressing the Coded Dial button and a two digit code using the numeric buttons cps Characters per second A unit of measurement that indicates the printer s speed Cursor The underline symbol you see in the LCD display when you register numbers and names in the MultiPASS C70 Glossary D dB A Stands for decibel level a decibel being a unit of measurement for the intensity of the sound coming from the unit adjusted for background noise Glossary G 3 Delayed sending The ability to send a document at a preset time in the future You do not have to be in your office to use delayed sending to one or more destinations You can only set up one delayed transmission at a time with the MultiPASS Desktop Manager Dialling methods Ways of pressing one or more buttons to access a number to connect to an outside party or fax machine Dialling methods include one touch coded speed dialling group dialling and manual regular dialling Document The sheet of paper containing the data that you send to or receive from a unit dpi Dots per in
90. Canon Multi PASS C70 USER S GUIDE Although this equipment can use either loop disconnect or DTMF signalling only the performance of the DTMF signalling is subject to regulatory requirements for correct operation It is therefore strongly recommended that the equipment is set to use DTMF signalling for access to public or private emergency services DTMF signalling also provides faster call set up Copyright Copyright 1999 by Canon Inc All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced transmitted transcribed stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language or computer language in any form or by any means electronic mechanical magnetic optical chemical manual or otherwise without the prior written permission of Canon Inc ii Preface Trademarks Canon and BJ are registered trademarks BCI MultiPASS UHQ and Bubble Jet are trademarks of Canon Inc Centronics is a registered trademark of Centronics Data Computer Corporation IEEE is a trademark of Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers Inc Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation All other product and brand names are registered trademarks trademarks or service marks of their respective owners As an ENERGY STAR Partner Canon has determined that the MultiPASS C70 meets the Grov yy Energy Star guidelines for energy efficiency The Inte
91. Chapter 4 Selecting Automatic Manual Document Feed With the MultiPASS C70 you can select whether you want to scan documents automatically or manually Automatic document feed is used when scanning multipage documents on normal paper Use manual document feed to scan one sheet at a time of the following types of documents d Thick paper Thin paper Documents with uneven surfaces Photographs Small documents business cards or postcards for example OCOD Special types of paper When using manual feed use a carrier sheet to avoid scratching the surface of important documents photographs for example Contact your Canon dealer or the Canon help line for details on purchasing a carrier sheet N Note o or ES me IS 68 T Use the document feed lever located at the top of the operation panel to select automatic document feed or manual document feed AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEED MANUAL DOCUMENT FEED Chapter 4 Document Handling 4 5 Loading Documents for Automatic Feed 1 Make sure the document feed lever is set to automatic document feed 2 Ifthe document has multiple pages tap it on a flat surface to even the stack s edges 4 6 Document Handling Chapter 4 3 Adjust the document guides to the width of the document 4 Gently insert the document face down top of the document towards you int
92. Clear an Then press Function again and enter the correct destination 1 You must dial the second number within five seconds of dialling the first number All subsequent numbers must be dialled within 10 seconds If you wait longer than the time out interval before dialling the next number the unit will start scanning the document The time out interval can be turned off gt TIME OUT pp 14 9 14 10 1 If you want to review the numbers you entered press Function and use V or A to scroll through the numbers Sut Sean 3 Press Start Scan to begin scanning for sending or wait a few seconds for the MultiPASS C70 to begin scanning automatically 1 The MultiPASS C70 then scans the document into memory and begins sending it to the destinations QO If you prefer the MultiPASS C70 never to scan a document automatically after a few seconds you can turn this feature off TIME OUT pp 14 9 14 10 1 You will see a series of brief messages showing details on the transmission 1 To cancel sending press Stop You will be asked to confirm cancelling Press to cancel Sending to all destinations you specified in step 2 will be cancelled You cannot cancel only one destination Chapter 7 Sending Faxes 7 25 Ai 1 Ifa number is busy the unit will continue sending to the other Pri destinations and then redial the number that was busy Q If the MultiPASS C70 s memory becomes full while scanning your document
93. Colour Printing and Colour Copying Problems c ccccccseseseeens 13 32 General Problems ss s cdiideiiate Whitin a iand eatin nnn 13 35 Tf as POW er Cut OCC TS sizes 4 ilenieai casein EE 13 36 Chapter 14 Summary of Settings The M li PASS C70 Settings spiria i EEE E E E EE 14 2 Understanding the Menu Syste ni s sisters iever reaa inisee 14 3 Summary Of Menus iisip ER E N E 14 3 Contents xiii WUSOr Ott GS E 14 5 Accessing the User Settings Meniscus tisini 14 5 User Settings MENU wssscisseccsssasasssnsssvessonsnstvenscsestsdenressossosasaalesiescecksnaestetes 14 6 Report SetUNg Sierraren esiin Eein aS e SEEE ants EPERE E EEE ENES 14 7 Accessing the Report Settings Metser eai 14 7 Report Settings Meni ssiri e ER 14 8 TX Transmission Settings cissiiccsesiessscsocessosassousseviassseesescnes savnensnsssesventies 14 9 Accessing the TX Settings Menu ccccccceseseseeseseeneseseeceteesesesneeees 14 9 TX settings Ment ssis piu ie ae taeuc nbc EEE 14 10 RX Reception Settings tescsiesctcscsevastuensersesaensineessvenseecscosaeseevsesevstiens 14 11 Accessing the RX Settings Menu ccccseseesesceeeseseesenesesesesnenenens 14 11 RX Settings MOM da sccsesisses tase sessesescsesseasensneasesssnssseptacen sdsasdesenasnesensedeates 14 12 Printer Setun gS i csncis untainted netean ENESES AEE SEARE 14 13 Accessing the Printer Settings Menu cccccccecceseee cee 14 13 Printer Settings MCnU sssi sirisser iesst ies eE
94. ERVAL Select the period of time between redial attempts 2 MIN 1 to 99 TIME OUT Enable disable the TIME OUT feature ON OFF ON Scanning starts 10 seconds after the last number is entered when sending to multiple destinations five seconds if only sending to one destination OFF After entering the last number press the Start Scan button or else the MultiPASS C70 will return to standby mode after 60 seconds Default settings are shown in bold type New Zealand 1 to 5 14 10 Summary of Settings Chapter 14 RX Reception Settings Accessing the RX Settings Menu ATS 01 2 Press Data Registration DATA REGSTRATION 7 jo2 i Data Registration gt E E i Set 3 Press Set co USER SETTINGS 08 o2 4 Use V or A to select RX SETTINGS ca Cc RX SETTINGS lt gt Set 5 Press Set ECM RX 6 Refer to the table on the following page and follow these guidelines to select and register settings T Use V or A to move through the settings QO To register a setting or access sub settings press Set 1 To return to a previous level press Data Registration In order for your settings to be registered be sure to press Set after ae making a selection or entering information Stop 7 When you have finished changing settings press Stop to return to standby mode Ex 15 00 FaxOnly Chapter 14 Summary of Settings 14
95. ESEE EEEE eSEE 14 14 Syste ni SCLIN SSH arte E E E EE 14 15 Accessing the System Settings Menu ss ssssssssississssrirsisisssesseseeses 14 15 System Settings MeN Uire eaae E E 14 16 Appendix A Specifications General Specifications e peene e E Ee SEa EEEE E EE A 2 PACSUN seines e e e Eiaa E EEA REE EEE E E Eia A 4 COPICl rererere not iessen ESENES s SNE asin SEERE EEEE ESTA SEENE EEE EES ESTEE EE E A 6 Telephone vi cszss stesasssseste Sess sscesassacssassestadessetasdanstadzen ts Sedsavtecasebisneasisedbasistostesens A 7 Printer sisisisesisnsatestess E E A 8 B Cartridges esseri cases seas esess sd addesanscressoscosesassegssdederdearnessnofedbededeavedeessdessenns A 12 SCANNED aane E E E E A 13 MultiPASS Desktop Manager for Windows ss ssnssssnssressssesresnerenesen A 17 Appendix B Handset Handset a oct ssslaseecaestanse sears babes veeevbcssectsetsatecesss B 2 Package COMERS irian a orate rae atcha bean otoethaductacsedeneataels B 2 Attaching the Handset to Your MultiPASS C70 cccseesseseeseesesesees B 3 Maintaining Your Handset serisinin oesie i a e B 9 xiv Contents Contents xO xvi Contents Chapter 1 Introducing the MultiPASS C70 This chapter introduces you to your MultiPASS C70 and describes the main features It also explains the supplies available for use with your MultiPASS C70 Eli WECOME gt is itectadec sta ntstecethtedenttnesths dain Shatin nie at eR 1 2 LY Main Features of the MultiP
96. Entry 6 6 Using One Touch Speed Dialling c ccc teteeeeeteseeeenenenenees 6 9 EV Coded Speed Dialing wccsscssscccssesesssscaseiessossoseaeatadecsovsestisasdnedusssressnavaseeeds 6 11 e Registering Numbers for Coded Speed Dialling cccceeee 6 11 e Changing Deleting a Coded Speed Dialling Entry ccccce 6 14 Using Coded Speed Dialing sisirin iuern 6 17 LV Group Dialing sesir aa east aioli E E 6 19 Creatine Groups enirere E E EE E EERE 6 19 e Changing Deleting a Group Dialling Entry cece 6 23 Using Group Dialling s sesccssscseresteshecseetessvearsnesstecetesnnbiovenennecteseapetees 6 24 LI Speed Dialling Mists oiccconasusisnsaidienacn meicaniansan mnie 6 26 e Printing the One Touch or Coded Speed Dial List cee 6 26 One Touch Speed Dial List nscsitiicaiiiacn cas ccnctnisiean ane 6 27 Coded Speed Dial List sssri kiersi irisaren sisne esai 6 28 Printing the Group Dial List siscssississciisctecsiessnaatesesscstecoites 6 29 Group Dial List iss tessesdesncsstosasesdsvessaseaserseaeetaceneazandarssesseosseabarnees 6 30 Chapter 6 Speed Dialling 6 1 D S S a a D 2 n What is Speed Dialling Speed dialling allows you to streamline and customise dialling procedures by registering a fax telephone number and name under a button or code You can then dial that number by pressing only one or a few buttons Speed Dialling Methods The three speed dialli
97. MEMORY FULL appears in the LCD display If this happens remove the remainder of the document from the Automatic Document Feeder ADF you may need to open the operation panel to do so then divide the document into several sections and send each section individually 1 The document is automatically deleted from memory when sequential broadcasting is completed Sending a Document Using Group Dialling If you frequently send faxes to the same group of people you can create a group Groups are stored under one touch speed dialling buttons or coded speed dialling codes For details on group dialling refer to page 6 19 7 26 Sending Faxes Chapter 7 Delayed Sending Your MultiPASS C70 allows you to scan a document into your PC s hard disk and send it automatically at a preset time This feature is called Delayed sending or Timer sending By using this feature you can take advantage of lower long distance rates at night for example o o x LL D S lt o 22 A d You can only set this feature from the MultiPASS Desktop Manager Nat gt MultiPASS Suite Software User s Guide 0 To use this feature your PC must be turned on and connected to the MultiPASS C70 Sending Other Documents While the MultiPASS C70 is Set for Delayed Sending The MultiPASS C70 is a multitasking unit so you can send receive print or copy other documents even when you have set the MultiPASS C70 for delayed sendin
98. Manager Chapter 3 Registering Information in the MultiPASS C70 3 7 Entering Numbers Letters and Symbols Each numeric button has a number and a group of uppercase and lowercase letters assigned to it Use the chart below to determine which numeric button to press for each character Button Uppercase Letter Mode A Lowercase Letter Number Mode Mode a 1 ABCAAAAAAFEG DEFDEEEE defd e GHI ghiiiit JKL jkl MNO mnongdd066 PQRSP pqrsp TUVUUUU tuvduud WXYZY wxyzy Uppercase Letter gt Lowercase Letter gt Number Mode 1 Mode A Mode a K I iA _ amp lt gt When you come to a step that requires you to enter a name or number follow the procedures on the following pages 3 8 Registering Information in the MultiPASS C70 Chapter 3 Changing Between Number Mode and Letter Mode Press the button repeatedly to select number mode uppercase letter x mode or lowercase letter mode When you are in number mode 1 appears on the right of the LCD display When you are in uppercase letter mode A appears on the right of the LCD display When you are in lowercase letter mode a appears on the right of the LCD display So sk sO Ew 50 a 25 TS Lo 2 Ss oc To enter letters 1 Press repeatedly to s
99. N PHONE POWER CORD are tear CONNECTOR L C TELEPHONE LINE JACK Inside View El CARTRIDGE BUTTON Press this button to move the cartridge holder to its centre position for replacing the BJ cartridge or BJ tank PAPER THICKNESS LEVER Adjust for the type of print media you are using gt p 5 10 CARTRIDGE HOLDER Handset For details on the components of the handset refer to Appendix B Handset 2 24 Setting Up Your MultiPASS C70 Chapter 2 Operation Panel LCD DISPLAY Receive Mode BUTTON Alarm LIGHT ONE TOUCH SPEED DIALLING SPECIAL FUNCTION BUTTONS Color B amp W BUTTON DOCUMENT FEED LEVER j Data Registration 04 05 lt Memory Reference Space Tonels 07 08 09 Report Vv 10 11 Cleaning Function Clear Set O Resume Copy BUTTON Stop BUTTON Resolution BUTTON NUMERIC BUTTONS C REDIAL Pause BUTTON Hook BUTTON Coded Dial BUTTON Start Scan BUTTON Document Feed Lever gt p 4 5 Sets the Automatic Document Feeder ADF to 4 automatic document feed for feeding multipage documents or to f manual document feed for feeding single sheets Color B amp W Button gt p 7 3 10 2 Sets the unit for colour or black amp white transmission or copying For colour transmission or colour copying press this button to turn on its light LCD Display D
100. NE MONITOR VOL setting 14 6 Lists 1 Touch Spd Dial 6 26 6 27 11 3 Coded Speed Dial 6 26 to 6 28 11 3 Doc Memory 7 28 11 2 documents in memory 7 28 Group Dial 6 29 6 30 11 3 summary 11 2 11 3 User s Data 3 18 11 3 LOAD PAPER message 8 28 13 13 Loading documents for automatic feed 4 6 to 4 8 documents for manual feed 4 11 4 12 envelopes 5 15 to 5 17 guidelines 5 13 5 14 paper 2 39 to 2 43 5 13 5 14 Location choosing for MultiPASS C70 2 3 2 4 I 8 Index LOCK PHONE setting 9 11 9 13 14 16 Long distance number dialling 9 5 9 6 Lowercase letter mode 3 8 3 9 3 10 M Maintenance BJ cartridge 12 14 BJ tank 12 14 cleaning BJ cartridge print head 12 17 cleaning MultiPASS C70 12 4 to 12 11 MAN AUTO SWITCH setting 14 12 Manual document feed loading documents 4 11 4 12 requirements for documents 4 2 4 3 selecting 4 5 MANUAL MODE 8 3 receiving with 8 14 8 15 setting 8 14 Manual redialling cancelling 7 17 using 7 17 Manual sending via handset 7 9 7 12 7 13 Memory Clear Report 11 2 11 10 13 36 deleting document from 7 33 7 34 documents in 7 28 to 7 34 list of documents in 7 28 printing document in 7 29 to 7 32 receiving in 8 28 to 8 30 Memory Clear Report 11 2 11 10 13 36 MEMORY FULL message 13 13 Memory Reference button 2 27 7 28 7 29 7 33 8 18 MEMORY RX setting 14 12 Memory sending 7 9 to 7 11 MEMORY USED nn message 13 13 Menu See also individual menus accessing 3 5
101. PORT setting 14 8 RX SETTINGS menu 3 6 14 4 14 11 14 12 RX START SPEED setting 14 16 S Safety instructions 1 18 to 1 21 SB 21 BJ cartridge container See BJ cartridge container SCAN CONTRAST setting 7 6 14 6 Scanner colour features 1 9 features 1 9 Scanner components cleaning 12 8 to 12 11 Scanning document requirements 4 2 4 3 features 1 9 image area 4 4 Scanning contrast setting 7 6 7 7 Scanning resolution sending 7 4 7 5 setting for black amp white sending 7 4 7 5 setting for colour sending 7 5 Screws with plugs 2 6 2 7 See also Appendix B Handset Sender information definition 3 12 printing list to check 3 18 registering 3 12 to 3 17 sample 3 13 Sending black amp white 7 3 cancelling 7 14 colour 7 3 contrast 7 6 7 7 delayed 7 27 document requirements 4 2 4 3 manual via handset 7 9 7 12 7 13 memory 7 9 to 7 11 methods 7 9 to 7 13 overview 7 9 preparing for 7 3 to 7 8 problems 13 18 13 19 resolution 7 4 7 5 restriction 9 10 9 11 scanning contrast 7 6 7 7 I 14 Index scanning resolution 7 4 7 5 sequential broadcasting 7 23 to 7 26 timer See Delayed sending Sequential broadcasting group dialling 7 26 sending to more than one destination 7 23 to 7 26 Serial number 13 2 Set button 2 27 2 28 Settings See also individual setting names MultiPASS C70 14 2 Shipping materials removing 2 9 to 2 11 Size back print film 5 2 banner paper 5 2 5 26 Bubble Jet paper 5 2
102. Q If you change your mind and want to keep the document in memory press m The MultiPASS C70 deletes the document 8 To continue deleting other documents in memory repeat the procedure from step 5 gt p 7 33 Or Stop Press Stop to return to standby mode Ex 15200 FaxOnly 7 34 Sending Faxes Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Receiving Faxes This chapter describes the different methods for receiving faxes You will also find instructions on setting the MultiPASS C70 to receive colour faxes LI Different Ways to Receive a Fax ccccecccsesesese cesses sseesseeseee cess 8 3 e Receiving Faxes Automatically FAX ONLY MODE 8 5 Setting FAX ONLY MODE sssrinin 8 5 e Receiving Both Faxes and Telephone Calls Automatically Fax Tel MOR Eisra E T R E 8 8 Setting Fax Tel Mode siririna AER 8 8 Setting Up Fax Tel Mode eccccccccscsseesssnstesesssnetsnenescseesessseeans 8 10 e Receiving Faxes Manually MANUAL MODE ccccseeeeteees 8 14 Setting MANUAL MODE ccssseskstvsissonsnseuttioesssskcoeancossnevestevessvoniases 8 14 Receiving a Fax Manually eissien eiaeia 8 14 e Receiving With an Answering Machine ANS MACHINE MODE sesinin nai A TA N Ee a EE 8 16 Setting ANS MACHINE MODE o cscacscatsciacoiacsnlacetisessiocsssenniees 8 16 Using the MultiPASS C70 With an Answering Machine 8 17 e Receiving Faxes to the MultiPASS Desktop Managet 004 8 18 When Your PCs Olt sirean esie tities EEEE 8 18 e Network FAX TEL
103. SS C70 near devices that contain magnets or generate magnetic fields such as speakers Do not subject the MultiPASS C70 to strong physical shock or vibration Make sure the area where you use the unit is free from dust Keep the MultiPASS C70 clean Dust accumulation can prevent the unit from operating properly To ensure proper electrical contact make sure the unit is firmly plugged in Never pull on the cord to unplug the MultiPASS C70 Pull on the plug itself Do not overload the electrical outlet where the MultiPASS C70 is plugged in For your safety unplug the MultiPASS C70 during electrical storms To avoid damage to the unit from overheating do not block the exhaust vent Install the unit approximately 10 cm away from walls and other equipment 12 2 Maintenance Chapter 12 QO Always lift the MultiPASS C70 as shown below Never lift it by its multi purpose tray document support document tray extension or handset cradle Also please note the following 11 When the power cord is disconnected the image memory is completely erased Therefore before you begin cleaning the MultiPASS C70 be sure to print any faxes stored in its memory gt pp 7 29 8 18 8 28 L If you disconnect the MultiPASS C70 while it is waiting to send a document you will have to set the MultiPASS C70 to send your document again once the unit is reconnected Q fe fe o 2 Chapter 12 Maintenance 12
104. SS C70 receives the faxes automatically without ringing if the call is from a person the MultiPASS C70 rings to alert you to pick up the handset or the telephone connected to your unit to answer the call This mode is economical in that it allows you to have telephone and fax service without the expense of an additional telephone line 2 x 3 Le om gt o oO o co This mode also includes settings that let you control precisely how it handles incoming calls To adjust these via the operation panel refer to the instructions later in this chapter p 8 10 You can also adjust these settings from the MultiPASS Desktop Manager gt MultiPASS Suite Software User s Guide 1 MANUAL MODE gt p 8 14 Use this mode if you will frequently use the MultiPASS C70 to receive voice calls through the handset telephone or extension phone connected to your unit and want to answer every call yourself including fax calls The MultiPASS C70 then rings for every call whether telephone or fax and you must press the Start Scan button to begin receiving a fax 1 ANS MACHINE MODE gt p 8 16 Use this mode if you plan to connect an answering machine to the MultiPASS C70 to receive faxes and telephone messages The MultiPASS C70 then receives incoming faxes normally and routes incoming telephone calls to the answering machine Chapter 8 Receiving Faxes 8 3 d Receiving Faxes to the MultiPASS Desktop Manager gt
105. Switching Australia Only ccceeeeeee 8 19 Setting the MultiPASS C70 for Network Switch 8 19 Network Switch System Operation cccccceseeeetesceeeteseseeens 8 21 e Network FAX TEL Switching New Zealand Only 8 22 Setting the MultiPASS C70 for Network Switch 8 22 Network Switch System Operation s rseserssssssressssessssssrsressssess 8 24 El Receiving in Colour cuncadtisiiiiinnn tid nae dmierinne 8 25 Setting Colour Reception siseste teacsa sines sane 8 25 Chapter 8 Receiving Faxes 8 1 n x Le to gt o oO o o D Receiving While Registering Copying or Printing 8 27 LY Receiving Faxes in Memory When a Problem OCCUIS c ccsce 8 28 EV Cancelling RECOLVING 50s scsserec ssssessesset iver seesesessessecssasteaseseabasnaesecbensensedts 8 31 8 2 Receiving Faxes Chapter 8 Different Ways to Receive a Fax The MultiPASS C70 provides you with several modes for receiving faxes To decide which mode will best suit your requirements consider how you want to use the MultiPASS C70 1 FAX ONLY MODE gt p 8 5 Use this mode if the MultiPASS C70 will be connected to a separate telephone line used only for faxing The MultiPASS C70 then answers all calls and receives all faxes automatically 1 Fax Tel Mode gt p 8 8 Use this mode if you will occasionally use the MultiPASS C70 as a telephone In this mode if an incoming call is from a fax machine the MultiPA
106. T ECM 3 OK 01 18 27 12 14 10 905 795 1111 Canon CANADA 5003 AUTO RX ECM 1 OK 00 18 27 12 14 16 2 887 0166 Canon AUSTRALIA 5004 AUTO RX ECM 4 OK 0059 27 12 14 27 20 545 8545 Canon EUROPA 0002 TRANSMIT COL 1 OK 01 20 o 27 12 14 30 20 545 8545 Canon EUROPA 0003 TRANSMIT COL 1 OK 04 12 D 27 12 14 53 03 3758 2111 Canon TOKYO 5005 AUTO RX 1 OK 01 16 27 12 14 57 2 887 0166 Canon AUSTRALIA 0004 TRANSMIT COL 3 NG 0051 3 SToP 27 12 14 59 1 432 2060 CANON OPTICS 0005 TRANSMIT OING 00 01 G o 018 N i T 2 TRANSACTION NUMBER T cc TRANSACTION MODE IF MARKED WUR COLOUR TRANSACTION AN ASTERISK THE ENTRY HAS TRANSACTION VIA ERROR CORRECTION MODE APPEARED ON A THE NUMBER OF THE PAGE WITH AN ERROR PREVIOUS REPORT ERROR CODE DESCRIBES THE NATURE OF THE ERROR THE Stop BUTTON WAS PRESSED DURING THE TRANSACTION Chapter 11 Reports and Lists 11 5 Transmission TX Reports For details on enabling or disabling printing of the transmission report refer to the TX REPORT setting in the REPORT SETTINGS menu gt pp 14 7 14 8 Error TX Report The MultiPASS C70 is set to print a report if an error occurs during sending This is the default setting for the TX REPORT setting TX REPORT pp 14 7 14 8 27 12 2000 14 59 FAX 123 4567 CANON 001 FEO ICICI E E E IOI IOC III Ke FE ICI KE FE E E E E E SE IOI IOI Fe Ke TX FUNCTION WAS NOT COMPLETED TX RX NO 0003 CONNECTION TEL
107. TE sccrcesessicescssessessiassasconesasstasanediansdeensssensnsapsbdaganeaplinenednsetsedtss 11 5 Transmission IX Reports iriserai eesse ri eie r eieaa n E nT EENS 11 6 Error TX Repottiissiisessitissetrisseretisissessskuseeksiesisisriieakesi en sssn tbar dariis EnEn 11 6 TX REPOT esas eiie a Stas wees aa a AE E 11 6 TX Report With First Papesse e ER 11 7 Multi Transaction TX RX Report iia 11 8 Reception RX Reports iiscssietsieiiscocssssiaversssinvisiseccssotosson steed aan iaaa 11 9 Error RX Report ccccccccceesecccsesesesescscsesesesescscsesssesescscsssesesescsessseseseseseses 11 9 RX Repoti cs ss 5e5 ccs cote ces eae exe acia aah E R E R EE EE 11 9 Memory Clear Report sa scc iccccssessasnssite sub ssaessssendesessessessesesnseasesserenset ca iiaea rnis 11 10 Chapter 12 Maintenance MulltiPASS C70 Guidelines s cssccssssossestesessasessassscapiisensssesesnsadsessasesosanseaseees 12 2 Periodic Cleaning sn cinctincinisianunniticninukiianamanan nanan 12 4 Cleaning the Outside of the MultiPASS C70 ccceeseseseseneeeeeees 12 4 Cleaning the MultiPASS C70 s Interior cccccccseeseecesesceeesescsnenenens 12 5 Cleaning Inside the Printer COver sis sessile einn 12 5 Cleaning the Scanner Component srren 12 8 Cleaning the Rollerss ini nvedisnintiichescad roma E 12 11 xii Contents BY Cart de sa cusssssczsetacastesessssensisentadasessupsensdsnnsneasessapbasdssaden isesdesenssncssngutiates 12 12 B Cartridges and B Tanks enss
108. TRY OK Ex X 94 1 TOUCH SPD To continue registering other groups repeat the procedure from step 7 gt p 6 20 Or To finish registering groups press Stop to return to standby mode Ex 15 00 FaxOnly 6 22 Speed Dialling Chapter 6 Vi You can print the Group Dial List showing all the numbers and names registered for group dialling gt p 6 29 Keep this list near your aes MultiPASS C70 so you can refer to it when dialling Changing Deleting a Group Dialling Entry If you want to change the entries in a group or delete a group follow the instructions in Creating Groups p 6 19 but note the following 1 To add a destination to a group e In step 7 select the group you want to add a destination to e Instep 10 enter the destinations you want to add to the group 1 To change the name of a group e Instep 7 select the group to which you want to change the name e In step 13 press the Clear button and then enter the new name 1 To delete an entry from a group e In step 7 select the group you want to make changes to e In step 10 use the V button or A button to select the entry you want to delete then press the Clear button Press the Set button to register your changes then the Stop button to return to standby mode 11 To delete a group completely e Instep 7 select the group you want to delete e In step 10 press the Clear button until all entries are deleted TEL appears e In
109. The unit s multi purpose tray holds up to 100 sheets of A4 letter and legal paper 50 transparencies 10 sheets of back print film or 10 envelopes Economy ink saving printing The MultiPASS C70 includes an economy printing mode for black amp white printing that uses up to 50 less ink resulting in longer cartridge life Photo quality printing Canon s optional BC 22e Photo BJ cartridge enables the MultiPASS C70 to print excellent photo quality images 75 g m paper 1 8 Introducing the MultiPASS C70 Chapter 1 Colour Scanner Features Full colour and 256 level greyscale The MultiPASS Desktop Manager allows you to scan images in full colour or with 256 levels of grey rather than just in black amp white ensuring that the images are reproduced as clearly as possible o Ez D S o 5 3 9 amp MultiPASS C70 Automatic Document Feeder ADF The MultiPASS C70 includes an Automatic Document Feeder ADF that makes it easy to scan up to 20 pages A4 or letter size at a time when using Windows applications that support the TWAIN scanning standard and multipage scans Adjustable resolution The MultiPASS Desktop Manager allows you to adjust the resolution for documents you are scanning into your PC TWAIN compatible The MultiPASS C70 supports the TWAIN scanning standard which allows you to scan images using any graphics or optical character recognition OCR application that also supports
110. Yellow Black colour Due to the technology differences when cyan and magenta are mixed together blue prints dark blue or purple compared to the screen 1 Within the MultiPASS printer driver selecting a matching process in the Color dialog box will result in a lighter blue If you are not using screen matching decreasing the amount of magenta by 30 produces a royal blue MultiPASS Suite Software User s Guide d If you are just looking for a nice blue colour try cyan It prints beautifully and fast and is available in almost all applications that support colour gt MultiPASS Suite Software User s Guide Colour images are missing some detail Check to see if your MultiPASS printer driver is set to Plain Paper Color Mode and Halftoning Diffusion 1 If so change the Media Type setting from Plain Paper to Coated Paper gt MultiPASS Suite Software User s Guide 13 34 Troubleshooting Chapter 13 General Problems The MultiPASS C70 has no power The power cord may not be plugged in securely 1 Check that the power cord is plugged securely into the unit and into the wall outlet p 2 20 If the unit is plugged into a power strip make sure the power strip is plugged in and turned on D E fe a amp 2 3 n The power cord may not be supplying power 1 Check the power cord by substituting another or by using a voltmeter to test it for continuity The MultiPASS C70 will not prin
111. a Problem Occurs If the MultiPASS C70 encounters a problem when it is receiving a fax the unit will automatically store the unprinted pages of the fax in memory and the LCD display will show REC D IN MEMORY as well as one or several of the following messages Unit has run out of paper The MultiPASS C70 has run out of paper while printing LOAD PAPER Load paper in the multi purpose tray gt p 2 40 Then press the Resume button to print the pages stored in memory BCI 21 Colour BJ tank has run out of ink The BCI 21 Colour BJ tank in the BC 21e Colour BJ cartridge installed in the MultiPASS C70 has run out of ink while printing COLOR INK EMPTY Change the BCI 21 Colour BJ tank in the BC 21e Colour BJ cartridge gt p 12 26 The unit automatically prints the pages stored in memory BCI 21 Black BJ tank has run out of ink The BCI 21 Black BJ tank in the BC 21e Colour BJ cartridge installed in the MultiPASS C70 has run out of ink while printing BLACK INK EMPTY Change the BCI 21 Black BJ tank in the BC 21e Colour BJ cartridge gt p 12 26 The unit automatically prints the pages stored in memory 8 28 Receiving Faxes Chapter 8 BJ cartridge has run out of ink The BJ cartridge installed in the MultiPASS C70 has run out of ink while printing CHANGE CARTRIDGE Change the BJ cartridge p 12 19 The unit automatically prints the pages stored in memory BJ cartridge not installed Th
112. a copy machine to make a reduced copy of the document and send the copy Send the document scan the document or make the copy ECM receptions may take longer than normal transmissions Turn off ECM if you need to receive quickly or if you know your local lines are in good condition ECM RX pp 14 11 14 12 ECM transmissions may take longer than normal transmissions Turn off ECM if you need to transmit quickly or if you know your local lines are in good condition ECM TX pp 14 9 14 10 Chapter 13 Troubleshooting 13 11 D c fe Ea 7 2 re n UEST HANG UP PHONE INSTALL BC 21e INSTALL BC21e 20 Error Code Cause The handset or the handset of the telephone or extension phone is off hook You tried to make colour copies with the BX 20 Black BJ cartridge installed You tried to print a received colour fax with the BX 20 Black or the optional BC 22e Photo BJ cartridge installed You tried to make black amp white copies with the optional BC 22e Photo BJ cartridge installed Action Place the handset properly in its cradle Remove the BX 20 Black BJ cartridge and install the BC 21e Colour or the optional BC 22e Photo BJ cartridge gt p 12 19 Remove the BX 20 Black or the optional BC 22e Photo BJ cartridge and install the BC 21e Colour BJ cartridge gt p 12 19 If you do not have a BC 21e Colour BJ cartridge available you can
113. al Function Buttons The buttons located on the right of the operation panel have two functions One Touch Speed Dialling Buttons The buttons marked 01 to 12 can be used to dial fax telephone numbers registered under these buttons For details refer to page 6 2 To use the one touch speed dialling buttons the Function button s light must be off Special Function Buttons To access the special functions marked under or to the sides of the buttons press the Function button to turn on its light and then press the button you wish to access 01 02 gt Data Registration A 05 Memory Reference Space 07 08 Report V 10 11 12 C L Cleaning Clear Function Set D gt Foams 3 4 Registering Information in the MultiPASS C70 Chapter 3 Understanding and Accessing the Menus The menu system accessed with the Data Registration button contains settings that allow you to register important information and set up different features of your MultiPASS C70 In this section we will describe the general procedure for displaying and accessing the menus and describe them briefly The content of each menu is described in detail in Chapter 14 Summary of Settings To access the menus follow the general procedure below Function 1 Press Function 01 2 Press Data Registration DATA REGSTRATION 0 Data Registration Set 3 Press Set Cc So 5 S oO Ew o a 25 TS Lo 2 S Ss oc
114. ame time Paper may not be loaded correctly 1 Make sure the paper stack is loaded properly in the multi purpose tray and that the paper guide is adjusted correctly p 2 40 Sheets of paper may be sticking together Be sure to fan the paper stack before placing it in the multi purpose tray gt p 2 41 The multi purpose tray may contain too many sheets D Make sure the paper stack in the multi purpose tray does not exceed the paper limit mark Pl p 2 42 D Do not load more than approximately 100 sheets of plain paper in the multi purpose tray T Do not force the paper stack into the multi purpose tray 75 g m paper 13 16 Troubleshooting Chapter 13 Transparencies or back print film do not feed correctly Different types of paper may be loaded in the multi purpose tray I Load just one type of paper 1 Make sure you are loading paper that meets the paper requirements for the unit gt Chapter 5 Paper Handling D E s fe a 2 2 3 o n The transparencies or back print film may not be loaded correctly 1 Make sure you load no more than 50 sheets of transparencies or 10 sheets of back print film in the multi purpose tray Repeated paper jams occur The paper you are using may be causing the jams 1 Be sure to fan the paper stack before loading it in the multi purpose tray This keeps the sheets of paper from sticking together gt p 2 41 1 Check that the pap
115. and returns the MultiPASS C70 to standby mode Copy Button gt p 10 3 Sets the MultiPASS C70 to make copies 2 26 Setting Up Your MultiPASS C70 Chapter 2 Special Function Buttons Memory Reference Space 07 b 3 gt 25 to Q 72 MultiPASS C70 Cleaning Clear Function Set O CS 1 Data Registration Button gt p 3 5 Accesses the different menus for setting speed dialling user preferences sending and receiving options and many other important settings O V A Buttons Scroll through the settings so you can see other selections in the menus during data registration 11 R Button gt p 9 2 Dials the outside line access number when the MultiPASS C70 is connected through a switchboard PBX You must register this button before you can use it 1 Memory Reference Button gt pp 7 28 7 29 7 33 8 18 Performs operations with documents currently stored in memory including printing a list of documents printing a document and deleting a document Also prints documents in memory you no longer want to upload to your PC Chapter 2 Setting Up Your MultiPASS C70 2 27 1 Space Button Enters a space between letters and numbers when registering information 11 Tone Button gt p 9 7 Allows you to switch temporarily to tone dialling when your MultiPASS C70 is set for pulse dialling Also enters a plus sign when registering your unit fax telephone number O l
116. ations A 5 Networking Sequential broadcast Up to 113 destinations Automatic receiving Non ring reception Deactivate ECM Network Switch Report Reference Activity report up to 20 transactions Non delivery report TTI Transmitter Terminal Identification Ink Saver Economy mode for printing received black amp white faxes extends cartridge life Copier Scanning Resolution B amp W TEXT 360 x 360 dpi B amp W PHOTO 360 x 360 dpi with halftone COLOR DRAFT 360 x 360 dpi full colour COLOR FINE 360 x 360 dpi full colour COLOR SNAPSHOT 360 x 360 dpi full colour Black amp white direct copy 360 x 360 dpi Black amp white memory copy 8 pels mm x 7 7 lines mm Printing Resolution 360 x 360 dpi Default Size 100 Reduction Sizes 70 80 90 A 6 Specifications Appendix A Copy Speed Black amp white copy A4 size Up to 3 1 pages minute Colour copy COLOR DRAFT mode A4 size Approx 3 minutes COLOR FINE mode A4 size Approx 9 minutes COLOR SNAPSHOT 102 x 152 mm Approx 3 minutes 50 seconds Multiple Copies Up to 99 copies of a black amp white document 1 copy of a colour document Telephone Automatic Fax Tel switchover Handset Telephone connection Answering machine connection CNG detecting signal o lt Q 3 O Q i Extension phone Data modem connection Remote reception by telephone Remote receiving ID Default 25 Tone button Pause button D T b
117. automatically print out a list of documents that were stored in memory at the time of the power cut 27 12 2000 17 23 FAX 123 4567 4 001 MEMORY FILES DELETED TX RX NO MODE CONNECTION TEL ID SET TIME 0023 0024 B CAST TRANSMIT COL 01 Canon CANADA 05 Canon OPTICS k 32 Canon UK 27 12 27 12 16 03 16 08 LA If there is no paper in the multi purpose tray when power is restored Note the LCD displays LOAD PAPER If this happens press Resume to return to standby mode The Memory Clear Report will not be printed 13 36 Troubleshooting Chapter 13 Chapter 14 Summary of Settings This chapter contains comprehensive tables of all the settings you can perform from the operation panel of your MultiPASS C70 5 gt l Q The MultiPASS C70 Settings cscosssssssssssssssssesssssnssssnsessesenssenenssee 14 2 2 LY Understanding the Menu System sissies 14 3 ED Summary OL MENUS sscecesurassesesseacsnescedeseshenssssesavavenssasssunsedcssescetegenstces 14 3 IV User Seiho S sims inari sachs yans tesa EE E S EE 14 5 e Accessing the User Settings Menu sisis issieiyireese iieis 14 5 ser Settings Men secisssoi n nE harstetss 14 6 Ll Report Seting Seansni E cas slesetess E ETE 14 7 e Accessing the Report Settings Ment sssini 14 7 Report settings Menu sicicsciaesiicuicnahncanrnitnanheananehne 14 8 A TX ransmission Seting Ssstt kierie seisis reee ce
118. ble 2 15 2 16 power cord 2 20 to 2 22 telephone 2 18 telephone line 2 17 Connections 2 15 to 2 22 Connector power cord 2 21 2 24 Contrast setting 7 6 7 7 CONVERT CLR gt B amp W message 13 10 Copier colour features 1 7 features 1 7 Copy button 2 25 2 26 10 3 Copying 10 2 to 10 4 document requirements 4 2 4 3 features 1 7 in black amp white 10 2 to 10 4 in colour 10 2 to 10 4 problems 13 24 13 32 to 13 34 setting length of bottom margin for colour 10 7 10 8 setting paper type for colour 10 5 while receiving 8 27 Correcting mistake 3 11 Cover printer 2 23 2 24 I 4 Index Cradle handset 2 6 2 7 See also Appendix B Handset support 2 6 2 7 See also Appendix B Handset Customer support 1 17 13 2 13 3 D D T button 2 27 2 28 9 9 Data modem connecting 2 19 jack 2 19 2 24 Data Registration button 2 27 3 5 3 7 Date entering 3 14 3 15 DATE amp TIME setting 3 14 14 6 DATE SETUP setting 14 16 Default 14 3 definition 1 15 DEFAULT ACTION 8 10 8 11 setting 8 12 8 13 Delayed sending 7 27 sending other documents when MultiPASS C70 set for 7 27 Deleting coded speed dialling entry 6 14 to 6 16 document from memory 7 33 7 34 group dialling entry 6 23 one touch speed dialling entry 6 6 to 6 8 Desktop Manager See MultiPASS Desktop Manager Dial tone confirming 9 9 DIALING message 13 11 Dialling coded speed 6 2 6 11 to 6 18 7 8 confirming dial tone 9 9 group
119. button Function 1 Press Function 01 2 Press Data Registration c2 z o8 o2 3 Use V or A to select TEL REGISTRATION lt gt VO A TEL REGISTRATION Set 4 Press Set Set 5 Press Set again CS ase o8 o2 6 Use V or A to select the one touch speed dialling button you want S x to change Ex QO If a group is already registered under the one touch speed dialling button you select GROUP DIAL appears Set 7 Press Set TELEPHONE NUMBER 6 6 Speed Dialling Chapter 6 Set gt 11 e Clear Set Ca Stop 8 Press Set again Ex EL 20 545 8545_ To delete a number 9 Press Clear TEL 10 Press Set ERASING END NAME QO The fax telephone number and name registered under that button are deleted 11 Press Stop to return to standby mode Ex 15700 FaxOnly To change the number or name 9 Press Clear TEL 10 Use the numeric buttons to enter the new fax telephone number Q If you only want to change the name ignore this step and go to the next step Ex EL 2 50921_ 1 The fax telephone number can be up to 120 digits long including spaces and pauses 0 To enter a space press Space Spaces are optional and are ignored during dialling 1 To enter a pause in the number press C Redial Pause D S S a a o 2 n Chapter 6 Speed Dialling 6 7 1 To correct a mistake in the number us
120. button 2 25 7 3 10 2 10 3 Colour copier features 1 7 copying 10 2 to 10 4 fax features 1 4 1 5 PC fax features 1 6 printer features 1 8 receiving in 8 25 8 26 scanner features 1 9 Colour copying 10 2 to 10 4 features 1 7 problems 13 32 to 13 34 setting length of bottom margin 10 7 10 8 setting paper type 10 5 10 6 Colour printing features 1 8 problems 13 32 to 13 34 setting length of bottom margin 10 7 10 8 Index Colour reception setting 8 25 8 26 setting length of bottom margin 10 7 10 8 Colour sending setting 7 3 setting resolution for 7 5 Components 2 6 2 7 2 23 to 2 28 BC 21e Colour BJ cartridge 2 6 2 7 BCI 21 Black BJ tank 2 6 2 7 cradle support 2 6 2 7 See also Appendix B Handset document support 2 6 2 7 2 23 document tray 2 6 2 7 2 23 documentation 2 6 extension 2 6 2 7 2 23 handset 2 6 2 7 2 23 See also Appendix B Handset handset cradle 2 6 2 7 See also Appendix B Handset MultiPASS C70 2 6 2 7 MultiPASS Suite software printer driver CD ROM 2 7 MultiPASS Suite Software User s Guide 2 7 parallel cable 2 8 power cord 2 6 2 7 SB 21 BJ cartridge container 2 6 2 7 screws with plugs 2 6 2 7 See also Appendix B Handset telephone line 2 6 2 7 User s Guide 2 7 warranty sheet 2 7 Connecting answering machine 2 19 datamodem 2 19 extension phone 2 19 handset 2 18 See also Appendix B Handset MultiPASS C70 to PC 2 15 2 16 parallel ca
121. canned by a fax machine and sent over telephone lines in the form of electrical pulses to another fax machine is a sending transmission The MultiPASS C70 also allows you to send a black amp white document directly from your PC PC faxing Sending speed The rate at which faxes are transmitted through the telephone line See also bps bits per second Smoothing mode A printer mode in which the printer enhances the horizontal resolution of black ink STANDARD A document setting for sending normal typewritten or printed documents containing only text and no drawings photographs or illustrations Standby The mode in which the MultiPASS C70 is on and ready to use All operations start from standby mode when the LCD displays the time and reception mode T Timed sending Glossary See Delayed sending Tone pulse setting The ability to set the MultiPASS C70 to match the telephone dialling system your telephone line uses touch tone or rotary pulse Glossary G 13 Transaction number A unique number assigned to each document sent TX NO or each fax received RX NO by the MultiPASS C70 and used to identify that particular fax Transmit See Sending TTI Transmit Terminal ID See Sender ID TWAIN An industry standard that allows you to input image data directly from a scanner or other input device Because your MultiPASS C70 supports TWAIN you can use the scanning features of the MultiPASS C70
122. cettsosessassdeeeussescaseseanandens 8 3 Receiving Faxes Automatically FAX ONLY MODE ccccceseee 8 5 Setting FAX ONLY MODE ass sianestasseraseactoiasestactninss Cacnandeasnmsieaoad 8 5 Receiving Both Faxes and Telephone Calls Automatically Faxy TELM of ge On er AO een E E TT I EEE 8 8 Setting Fax Tel ModE ssdcsipncednenennuunnr araras 8 8 Setting Up Fax Tel MOA sssrinin 8 10 Receiving Faxes Manually MANUAL MODE ccccccccsteseestenees 8 14 Setting MANUAL MODE visicssihnisiisninndonisivns decries 8 14 Receiving a Fax Mania ly ssscs scossssossseesssreseseesessovessesasvicsesesosseaentanes 8 14 Receiving With an Answering Machine ANS MACHINE MODE ccesanssiats uibusniesennonsisas ansvosiecesnpustidetnupettdotdsensevonte EELE r iaa EAA 8 16 Setting ANS MACHINE MODE sssisiissisisirisirni eisie ssai 8 16 Using the MultiPASS C70 With an Answering Machine 8 17 Receiving Faxes to the MultiPASS Desktop Manager s0008 8 18 When Your PCAs ORs cc ien cseteetoeindelete E E E EEE 8 18 Network FAX TEL Switching Australia Only 0 cece 8 19 Setting the MultiPASS C70 for Network Switch 8 19 Network Switch System Operations ne 8 21 Network FAX TEL Switching New Zealand Only ccceseeseee 8 22 Setting the MultiPASS C70 for Network Switch 8 22 Network Switch System Operation 8 24 Receiving i COLOUE ia usas ss dssescesssesseses sntsedecacdedeeshinspeseeschsesestasdasavesteseistaeadeaes 8 25 petti
123. ch A unit of measurement for indicating a printer s resolution Dual access Multitasking Enables the MultiPASS C70 to receive a fax even if it is copying or printing a document Also enables you to scan other faxes into memory make copies print out reports print documents or register information while the MultiPASS C70 sends a fax from memory E ECM Error Correction Mode The ability of your MultiPASS C70 to reduce system and line errors when sending or receiving from another fax machine with ECM capability ECM is most effective in areas where the telephone lines are in poor condition or there is frequent interference on the line Extension phone A telephone connected to the MultiPASS C70 usually placed away from the unit You can use the extension phone to manually activate incoming faxes Glossary F Factory default The MultiPASS C70 is preprogrammed in the factory with settings that we recommend These are known as factory default settings You can customise your MultiPASS C70 by programming settings other than the factory default settings FAX TEL switching The ability of the MultiPASS C70 to automatically detect whether a call is from a fax machine or telephone With this feature one telephone line can be shared by both the telephone and the fax machine FINE The resolution setting for documents with very small characters and lines Font A complete set of characters of the same size and type
124. cssssesessessnesssssasvessesssenssstosesasassnsesseasensoes 12 2 El Periodic Cleaning sissies Ei sinir EE eE Sne SEEN NE EEA ENEE RSE EEEE 12 4 e Cleaning the Outside of the MultiPASS C70 ou 12 4 e Cleaning the MultiPASS C70 s IMETO sosite nee 12 5 Cleaning Inside the Printer Covens iiniu 12 5 Cleaning the Scanner COMponENlS sireeni 12 8 Cleanings the Rollers ieii E nE E O E e 12 11 LV BJ Cartridge sreiessisseneiie e e ra e 12 12 BJ Cartridges and B Tanks w sccsccsdsieniiecdsdisneccieiedsivetineesseeticctics 12 12 Maintenance seis sssssscisvesessasshsedessesssneseaesss nts avsayeseasesndsessbenssasessones 12 14 e Testing and Cleaning the BJ Cartridge Print Head 0 0000 12 15 Printing the Nozzle Check Pattern ccccscesceesesceeeeseseenens 12 15 Cleaning the BJ Cartridge Print Headsin 12 17 e When to Replace the BJ Cartrid ge ccccceesceseeseeteteseseeteseseeeens 12 18 Replacing the BJ Cartridge oseere ot iaee 12 19 e Replacing a BJ Tank in the BC 21e Colour BJ Cartridge 12 26 1 Transporting the Muli PASS C70 cccceescces cece escsesteneeseseeeeenees 12 32 Q fe fe o 2 Chapter 12 Maintenance 12 1 MultiPASS C70 Guidelines Follow these guidelines to avoid damage to your MultiPASS C70 and harm to you or others a Place the MultiPASS C70 on a stable surface Do not use an angled stand Avoid setting the unit in direct sunlight Do not install the MultiPA
125. cted to the MultiPASS C70 The default code is 25 Remote reception Activating reception of a fax by answering a telephone or extension phone that is connected to the MultiPASS C70 but that is not located near the MultiPASS C70 You need to dial the remote receiving ID to start remote reception Reports A document printed by the MultiPASS C70 containing information about the faxes it has sent or received Resolution The density of dots for any given output device Expressed in terms of dots per inch dpi Low resolution causes font characters and graphics to have a jagged appearance Higher resolution means smoother curves and angles as well as a better match to traditional typeface designs Resolution values are represented by horizontal data and vertical data for example 360 x 360 dpi Rotary pulse A telephone dialling system where a dial is rotated to send pulses to the telephone switching system When you pulse dial you hear clicks When you touch tone dial the most common dialling system you hear tones RX See Receiving S Scanning contrast A setting that darkens or lightens the scanning of documents G 12 Glossary Sender ID Information printed at the top of a fax also called TTI or Transmit Terminal ID This data appears only if the sending fax machine has been programmed with the information Sending Sending transmission is also defined by TX or Transmit A fax document that has been s
126. cument The size of the paper in the multi purpose tray and that specified in the PAPER SIZE setting are different There may be an obstruction that is not allowing the cartridge holder mechanism to move right or left Action Clean the BJ cartridge print head gt p 12 17 If the message remains in the LCD display replace the BJ cartridge gt p 12 19 The unit will then print automatically any faxes received in memory D c fe Ea 7 w is n Remove the document you are trying to send or copy and start again Set the document feed lever to automatic document feed Q gt p 4 5 Set the correct paper size in the PAPER SIZE setting gt PAPER SIZE pp 14 13 14 14 Check for a paper clip or that the plastic orange cap is removed from the BJ cartridge Check also for a paper jam and clear the jam if necessary Then press the Resume button and try your operation again Chapter 13 Troubleshooting 13 9 UEST CHECK PRINTER Ctd CLEAR PAPER JAM COLOR INK EMPTY CONVERT CLR gt B amp W Error Code Cause The BJ cartridge may be defective There is a paper jam The BCI 21 Colour BJ tank in the BC 21e Colour BJ cartridge is empty or its ink may have dried out The unit is confirming that it is all right to print a colour document in memory with the BX 20 Black BJ cartridge in black amp white Action Press the Resume button Rein
127. d is not knotted or kinked 1 Make sure that the total ampere rating of all products plugged into the wall outlet does not exceed the current amperage of the circuit breaker 11 Make sure the operation panel of the MultiPASS C70 is properly closed and that there are no documents in this area The shape of the plug varies depending on the country of purchase 2 20 Setting Up Your MultiPASS C70 Chapter 2 Connect the power cord as follows 1 Plug the supplied power cord into the power cord connector on the back of the MultiPASS C70 2 Plug the other end of the power cord into a properly grounded AC outlet three pronged outlet Ai The MultiPASS C70 has no power switch so its power is on as long as it is plugged in Once connected though the unit still needs to warm up Note before you can use it m While the MultiPASS C70 is warming up the Alarm light blinks and the following message appears in the LCD display PLEASE WAIT 1 When the time and receive mode appear the MultiPASS C70 is in standby mode and ready for use Ex IIRO FaxOnly Chapter 2 Setting Up Your MultiPASS C70 2 21 MultiPASS C70 3 gt Q ke2 o n Ai If the BJ cartridge has not been installed yet the following message and Pris the standby mode display alternate in the LCD display PUT IN CARTRIDGE Ex 13230 FaxOnly 2 22 Setting Up Your MultiPASS C70 Chapte
128. d landscape orientation Pause A timing entry required for registering certain long distance numbers and for dialling out through some telephone systems or switchboards Pressing the O Redial Pause button enters a pause between digits of a fax telephone number Glossary PC fax An electronic way to send and receive faxes A PC fax is sent from or received in a PC Using the MultiPASS C70 allows you to send and receive PC faxes and the MultiPASS Desktop Manager lets you save sort and print the PC faxes Glossary G 9 Photo The document setting you use for sending or copying documents with intermediate tones such as photographs Platen The printer component that holds the paper in position during ink transfer Portrait orientation Refers to printing across the width of the page letter style This is the opposite of landscape orientation which is printing across the length of the page Print head The printing mechanism that contains print nozzles and ejects the ink for printing Print head capping An automatic protection function that prevents the BJ cartridge print head unit and BJ cartridges from drying out or becoming clogged with dust Printable area The area of a sheet of paper on which a printer can reproduce text or graphics the printing area is smaller than the paper Printer driver Software that sends printing instructions to a printer in this case the MultiPASS C70 The printer
129. described below IN The options described below can also be set from the MultiPASS flo Desktop Manager gt MultiPASS Suite Software User s Guide m RING START TIME When a call comes in the unit checks to see if it is a person wishing to speak to you or a fax machine trying to send a document If your unit does not have enough time to detect the fax tone it assumes the call is from a telephone Use the RING START TIME setting to increase the time the unit takes to check whether a call is from a fax machine or a telephone You can select a time between 0 and 30 seconds The default setting is eight seconds 1 F T RING TIME When your unit is set to receive both fax and telephone calls automatically it rings to alert you to pick up the handset or the handset of the telephone or extension phone if the call is from a person If you do not pick up the handset within a certain amount of time the unit stops ringing Use this option to change the length of time the unit rings from 10 to 60 seconds The default setting is 22 seconds 1 DEFAULT ACTION Not all fax machines are capable of sending a fax tone the CNG tone that warns the receiving fax machine that a fax is coming In those cases the unit may think that the call coming in is a voice call and rings to alert you of the call the amount of time it is going to ring is determined by the F T RING TIME setting above If you do not answer the call one of two things can
130. display shows details on the transmission If the receiving fax machine is still busy on the last attempt the LCD display shows BUSY NO SIGNAL the transaction number TX RX NO and prints the Error TX report if set to print one BUSY NO SIGNAL TX RX NO 0013 PRINTING REPORT If this happens try sending again later Cancelling Automatic Redialling Automatic redialling cannot be cancelled with the Stop button while the unit is waiting to redial To cancel automatic redialling do the following 1 Wait until the MultiPASS C70 begins redialling DIALING Stop 2 Press Stop T The MultiPASS C70 asks you to confirm that you want to cancel CANCEL YES NO 7 18 Sending Faxes Chapter 7 3 Press to cancel redialling T Redialling is not cancelled until you press Q If you change your mind and want to continue redialling press 1 The unit then prints an error report if set to print one Sending Faxes Ai LI If the TX Report feature is deactivated the Error TX Report will not be printed TX REPORT pp 14 7 14 8 d If you want to cancel a transmission while the unit is waiting to redial refer to Deleting a Document From Memory gt p 7 33 Note Chapter 7 Sending Faxes 7 19 Setting Up Automatic Redialling You can set up the following options for automatic redialling d Whether or not the MultiPASS C70 redials automatically 1 The number of times
131. document to more than one destination at a time gt Sequential Broadcasting p 7 23 A Note 6 18 Speed Dialling Chapter 6 Group Dialling Creating Groups If you frequently send the same document to several destinations you can create a group of these destinations and register them under a speed dialling button or code This enables you to press a single one touch speed dialling button or press the Coded Dial button and enter one two digit code to send the same document to all the destinations in your group 1 You can only group numbers that have already been registered for one touch or coded speed dialling IN Note 1 A group can contain up to 111 destinations 1 You can also create groups from the MultiPASS Desktop Manager gt MultiPASS Suite Software User s Guide Follow this procedure to register numbers and names for group dialling Function 1 Press Function 01 2 Press Data Registration DATA REGSTRATION 0 Data Registration 08 o2 3 Use V or A to select TEL REGISTRATION ca Cc TEL REGISTRATION Set 4 Press Set 1 TOUCH SPD DIAL Chapter 6 Speed Dialling 6 19 D S S a a o 2 n 08 02 c gt Set 08 02 c gt 6 8 Use V or A to select GROUP DIAL GROUP DIAL Press Set Ex Q01 1 TOUCH SPD Select a one touch speed dialling button or coded speed dialling code under which you want to register the group To reg
132. driver keeps track of the attributes of a printer and the codes the program must send to access those attributes Pulse See Rotary pulse G 10 Glossary Q Quick on line sending Quick on line sending is the easiest and quickest way to send a document After a document is set in the Automatic Document Feeder ADF the MultiPASS C70 begins to scan the entire document into the memory As the first page of a multiple page document is being scanned your MultiPASS C70 will begin to call the other party and transmit the information even as the remaining pages are being scanned R RAM Random Access Memory Memory that is used for temporary storage of information such as documents you want to print scanned and received documents and downloaded fonts Receiving Receiving transmission is also defined as RX or Reception This refers to how the MultiPASS C70 receives a fax Reception See Receiving Redialling automatic See Automatic redialling Redialling manual See Manual redialling Reduction mode See Automatic image reduction Glossary Registering A process by which you place fax or telephone numbers names and other information in the MultiPASS C70 s memory Glossary G 11 Regular dialling Pressing the individual numeric buttons to dial a fax or telephone number Remote receiving ID The two digit code that enables you to manually activate a fax using a telephone or extension phone conne
133. e lt to delete the rightmost digit 1 To delete the entire entry press Clear Set 11 Press Set to register the fax telephone number DATA ENTRY OK NAM m Set 12 Press Set again C_D Ex Canon EUROPA tA 13 Use the numeric buttons to enter the new name over the previous name C1 If you want to keep the same name ignore this step and go to the next step Ex Canon ITALIA ee 1 The name can be up to 16 characters long including spaces 1 To enter letters numbers and symbols refer to the instructions on page 3 8 Set 14 Press Set to register the name DATA ENTRY OK 0 Ex 05 1 432 2060 15 To change other entries repeat the procedure from step 6 p 6 6 Or Stop To finish changing one touch speed dialling entries press Stop to return to standby mode 2 Ex 15 00 FaxOnly 6 8 Speed Dialling Chapter 6 Using One Touch Speed Dialling Follow this procedure to send documents using one touch speed dialling To use this feature you must first register a number for one touch speed dialling gt p 6 3 A Note Be sure to adjust the document feed lever before loading your document p 4 5 Prepare the document and load it face down in the Automatic Document Feeder ADF gt pp 4 6 4 11 1 The LCD display shows the following Currently used memory EMORY USE Standby to scan DOCUMENT READY
134. e EREE TE E 6 11 Registering Numbers for Coded Speed Dialling ccccceeeeee 6 11 Changing Deleting a Coded Speed Dialling Entry ccceeeee 6 14 Using Coded Speed Dialing isseire a 6 17 Group DIANE sosete e EE EE E alee Ss 6 19 Creating GrOUPSieiorrannp iee E E EE 6 19 Changing Deleting a Group Dialling Entry ccccsssesssseeeeseeeeees 6 23 Using Group Dialling vs ccssssscsscsessssassesessesescessacsnsseerieseneatnassnnssszesespnaennases 6 24 Speed Dialling ListSep siret Hae ne NeR EE nsara 6 26 Printing the One Touch or Coded Speed Dial List 6 26 One Jouch Speed Dial Lists acsiisiaisateernin consieendeetoned 6 27 Coded Speed Dia MMist ciccienniniie dctasanuia naan el 6 28 Printing the Group Dial Listssssrisenerisrarsrio irnir 6 29 Group Dial LAS be seccaysses veccocccsececscshestteniachenttaetsyacsuer bavesussbaedsvasettaeeties 6 30 Contents ix Chapter 7 Sending Faxes Preparing to Send a Faresi senei EEEE mae dunna ines 7 3 Documents YOu Can Fax ssvsticssiesnes ennn A T 7 3 Adjusting the Quality of Your Faxes ccccsccsescecsseseecenesesesnsneneneees 7 3 Setting Colour or Black amp White Transmission 0ccccceeee 7 3 Setting the Scanning Resolution s yecnet E 7 4 Setting the Scanning COnttaStsesssspi err u E 7 6 Dialling Methods is aiss concern en sS EE aese SE CENTENATS 7 8 e iato kt ateli KE ato Lo l AA E E 7 9 Oia A E daneneaniaes 7 9 Memory SQn ine csscercssasesvsssateses sacs iea
135. e LCD display shows this message PUT IN CARTRIDGE The MultiPASS C70 comes with one BX 20 Black BJ cartridge and one BC 21e Colour BJ cartridge The steps in this section show the BC 21e Colour BJ cartridge However please note that the installation procedure is the same for the BX 20 Black BJ cartridge and the optional BC 22e Photo BJ cartridge IN Note To install your BJ cartridge follow these steps 1 Make sure the MultiPASS C70 is plugged in 2 Open the printer cover by grasping the document guides and lifting C1 If the printer cover does not open easily slide the document guides outwards and then open the printer cover Aa DOCUMENT GUIDE DOCUMENT GUIDE The BJ cartridges included with your MultiPASS C70 may vary depending on the country of purchase Chapter 2 Setting Up Your MultiPASS C70 2 31 3 gt Q ke o n MultiPASS C70 When you plug in the MultiPASS C70 for the first time the cartridge holder automatically moves to the centre of the unit so you can install the BJ cartridge If the cartridge holder is not in the centre press the El button inside the unit IN Note 1 Do not try to manually move or stop the cartridge holder as this may damage the MultiPASS C70 1 Do not touch the round shaft guide rail or ribbon cable Also do not touch the small circuit board on the cartridge holder Touching these parts may ad
136. e MultiPASS C70 B 6 Handset Appendix B 8 Plug the power cord back into the power cord connector on the back of the MultiPASS C70 9 Install the BJ cartridge back in the cartridge holder inside the unit Q For details refer to Installing the BJ Cartridge in the MultiPASS C70 gt p 2 31 Ai When carrying the MultiPASS C70 do not lift it by the handset cradle as hoe it may break Appendix B Handset B 7 Ss iy S WY K Q Q Q O ee A Ai TAS A A D BSN Dry RINGER SWITCH Allows you to select the ring volume of the handset for incoming calls Set to HI LO or OFF according to your preference B 8 Handset Appendix B Maintaining Your Handset To maintain your handset in top working condition be sure to follow these guidelines m m m Do not leave your handset exposed to direct sunlight Do not install your handset in hot or humid conditions Do not spray aerosol polishes on your handset as they may enter the holes on your handset and cause damage Use a damp cloth to clean your handset Appendix B Handset B 9 B 10 Handset Appendix B Glossary A AC Alternating current The type of electrical current available from a wall outlet Activity report A journal of the MultiPASS C70 s fax transactions both sent and received Address Book The MultiPASS Desktop Manager for Windows provides yo
137. e bottom of the BJ cartridge or the silver metal or circuit area on its side 9 Lower the blue cartridge lock lever completely 1 Do not use excessive force 1 The BJ cartridge is now locked into position 12 24 Maintenance Chapter 12 10 Press El 0 The cartridge holder moves to its home position on the right side of the unit and begins cleaning the print head This process takes about 55 seconds Do not try to manually move or stop the cartridge holder as this may damage the MultiPASS C70 CAUTION 11 Close the printer cover Ai Unplug the MultiPASS C70 only when it is in standby mode time and receive mode shown in the LCD display Do not unplug the MultiPASS C70 when the cartridge holder is not in its home position on the right If you unplug the unit while it is printing or move the cartridge holder from its home position the BJ cartridge will not be capped and can dry out Note Q fe fe o 2 Chapter 12 Maintenance 12 25 Replacing a BJ Tank in the BC 21e Colour BJ Cartridge The LCD display will indicate which BJ tank in the BC 21e Colour BJ cartridge needs replacing Message Action BLACK INK EMPTY Replace the BCI 21 Black BJ tank right tank COLOR INK EMPTY Replace the BCI 21 Colour BJ tank left tank Leave the BC 21e Colour BJ cartridge in the MultiPASS C70 when replacing a BJ tank 1 Make sure the MultiPASS C7
138. e help by holding the box while you lift the MultiPASS C70 and its protective packaging out of the carton DOCUMENT SUPPORT POWER CORD _ TELEPHONE LINE Dy lt 7 DOCUMENTATION BC 21e COLOUR BJ CARTRIDGE SCREWS WITH PLUGS 4 DOCUMENT TRAY MultiPASS C70 UNIT SB 21 BU CARTRIDGE CONTAINER CRADLE SUPPORT EY EXTENSION BCI 21 BLACK BJ TANK HANDSET 2 6 Setting Up Your MultiPASS C70 Chapter 2 Make sure you have the following items lt DOCUMENT TRAY and DOCUMENT POWER CORD EXTENSION SUPPORT 3 gt os e Q 72 MultiPASS C70 Q y TELEPHONE LINE BC 21e COLOUR BCI 21 BLACK SB 21 BU CARTRIDGE BJ CARTRIDGE BJ TANK CONTAINER MultiPASS C70 MultiPASS SUITE SOFTWARE MultiPASS SUITE SOFTWARE USER S GUIDE This guide USER S GUIDE PRINTER DRIVER CD ROM NY ATES HANDSET HANDSET CRADLE CRADLE SUPPORT SCREWS WITH PLUGS 4 The shape of the power cord varies depending on the country of purchase The shape of the telephone line varies depending on the country of purchase Chapter 2 Setting Up Your MultiPASS C70 2 7 d If any of the items are damaged or missing notify your local authorised Canon dealer or the Canon help line immediately 1 In addition to the items shipped with your MultiPASS C70 you will need a Centronics compatible parallel cable IEEE 1284 compliant which you can purchase from your local auth
139. e is sent out from the network so that the call is handled as a voice call This means that there is no switching delay at the caller s end O Triple ring short short short for fax receiving Three short rings at regular intervals 2 x 3 Le to gt o ts o co D Any ring except triple ring depending on your switchboard for telephone conversation You can also set the MultiPASS C70 for network FAX TEL switching from the MultiPASS Desktop Manager gt MultiPASS Suite Software User s Guide Setting the MultiPASS C70 for Network Switch Follow the procedure below to set the receive mode to NET SWITCH 1 Press Function 2 Press Data Registration DATA REGSTRATION 3 Press Set USER SETTINGS Chapter 8 Receiving Faxes 8 19 08 2 4 Use V or A to select RX SETTINGS ca Cc RX SETTINGS Set 5 Press Set 0 ECM RX 08 o2 6 Use V or A to select RX MODE ca cS RX MODE Set 7 Press Set CD Ex FAX ONLY MODE 08 2 8 Use V or A to select NET SWITCH ca Cc lt gt ET SWITCH Set 9 Press Set 0 INCOMING RING Stop 10 Press Stop to return to standby mode Ex 15 00 NET SW 8 20 Receiving Faxes Chapter 8 Network Switch System Operation The procedure for using the network switch system is almost the same as when using the MultiPASS C70 over a normal telephone line When you receive calls however the u
140. e on your PC Ai If the paper jam occurred while a fax was being received into the MultiPASS C70 s memory that fax will print automatically when the Not aes a jam is cleared and you press the Resume button 13 6 Troubleshooting Chapter 13 LCD Messages D S The following messages are displayed in the LCD display when the 3 MultiPASS C70 is performing a function or encounters an error The 9 error code appears in the Activity Report gt p 11 5 3 Message Error Code Cause Action AUTO REDIAL The unit is waiting to Wait for the unit to redial the other party s try redialling If that number because the does not work wait line was busy or the until the unit starts to other party did not dial the number then answer when you tried press the Stop button to send the document to cancel redialling Try to send the document again at a later time BLACK INK EMPTY The BCI 21 Black BJ Clean the BJ cartridge tank in the BC 2le print head Colour BJ cartridge is gt p 12 17 If the empty or its ink may message remains in have dried out the LCD display replace the BJ tank gt p 12 26 The unit will then print automatically any faxes received in memory BUSY NO SIGNAL 005 018 The telephone number Try sending the you dialled is busy document at a later time The fax number dialled Check the fax number was incorrect and dial again The other party s fax Contact the other machine is not party a
141. easily and quickly d Manual sending via the handset If you have the handset a telephone or an extension phone connected to your MultiPASS C70 this mode allows you to talk to the other party before you send the document Memory Sending N Note Memory sending is a quick and easy way to send a document The MultiPASS C70 scans the document into its memory and as the first page of a multipage document is being scanned the unit begins calling the other party and transmitting the information even as the remaining pages are being scanned Since the MultiPASS C70 is multitasking you can even scan a document into memory while sending another document receiving a document or printing a report The unit has enough memory to store up to 42 pages fewer if the document contains many graphics or particularly dense text Follow the instructions on the next page to send a document with memory sending Be sure to adjust the document feed lever before loading your document p 4 5 Based on Canon FAX Standard Chart No 1 standard mode Chapter 7 Sending Faxes 7 9 1 Prepare the document and load it face down in the Automatic 3S Document Feeder ADF gt pp 4 6 4 11 m The LCD display shows the following Currently used memory EMORY USE Standby to scan DOCUMENT READY Q If you are sending in colour to a fax machine with colour capability press Color B amp W to turn on its
142. eception Your MultiPASS C70 is factory set to receive in colour when you receive faxes from other colour fax machines Follow this procedure to disable or enable this setting 1 Press Function 2 Press Data Registration DATA REGSTRATION Chapter 8 Receiving Faxes 8 25 Set 3 Press Set USER ETTINGS 08 o2 4 Use V or A to select RX SETTINGS ca Cc RX SETTINGS Set 5 Press Set ECM RX 0 08 o2 6 Use V or A to select COLOR RX CD Cc COLOR RX lt gt Set 7 Press Set CD Ex ON 08 o2 8 Use V or A to select OFF or ON ca cS V A Ex OFF Set 9 Press Set co PRINTER SETTINGS Stop 10 Press Stop to return to standby mode FaxOnly Ex aaa 15 00 8 26 Receiving Faxes Chapter 8 Receiving While Registering Copying or Printing As the MultiPASS C70 is a multitasking device it can receive faxes and telephone calls while you are entering your user information making copies or printing If you receive a fax while you are making copies or printing the MultiPASS C70 stores the incoming fax in memory Then as soon as you finish making copies or printing the MultiPASS C70 automatically prints the fax If you are entering registration information the fax is printed as soon as it is received and does not go into memory n x Le to E o oO o o Chapter 8 Receiving Faxes 8 27 Receiving Faxes in Memory When
143. ed areas of the operation panel Q Dirt and dust particles that collect on the underside of the operation panel affect the quality of the documents you copy or send 5 Use a soft dry clean cloth to wipe up paper dust from the areas shaded surrounding the separation roller SEPARATION ROLLER 12 10 Maintenance Chapter 12 6 When you are finished close the operation panel by pressing it down from the centre as shown Be sure to close the operation panel until it locks into place or the unit will not function properly A Note 7 Plug the unit back in Cleaning the Rollers You will need to clean the unit s rollers after using a package of High Resolution Paper HR 101 This process removes paper dust from the printer s rollers preventing paper feed problems For details refer to Using the Cleaning Sheet on page 5 22 Q Oo i o c o Z Chapter 12 Maintenance 12 11 BJ Cartridge BJ Cartridges and BJ Tanks Canon offers several BJ cartridges and BJ tanks for use in the MultiPASS C70 1 BC 21e Colour BJ Cartridge Included with the MultiPASS C70 Contains the print head unit and two replaceable BJ tanks one colour cyan magenta yellow and one black You can replace the BJ tanks without replacing the print head unit when you run out of ink d BX 20 Black BJ Cartridge Included with the MultiPASS C70 Contains the print head
144. eed Dialling Registering Numbers for One Touch Speed Dialling A Note Data Registration 08 02 c gt Set Set One touch speed dialling allows you to dial a fax telephone number at the press of one button You can register up to 12 fax telephone numbers one for every one touch speed dialling button on the operation panel You can also register numbers for one touch speed dialling from the MultiPASS Desktop Manager gt MultiPASS Suite Software User s Guide Follow this procedure to register numbers and names for one touch speed dialling 1 Press Function 2 Press Data Registration DATA REGSTRATION 3 Use V or A to select TEL REGISTRATION TEL REGISTRATION 4 Press Set 1 TOUCH SPD DIAL 5 Press Set again 01 Chapter 6 Speed Dialling 6 3 D S S a a o 2 n 08 02 c gt Set Use V or A to select a one touch speed dialling button from 01 to 12 Ex Q If a one touch speed dialling button has already been registered the number registered under that button appears 1 If a group is already registered under a one touch speed dialling button GROUP DIAL appears Press Set TELEPHONE NUMBER Press Set again TEL _ Use the numeric buttons to enter the fax telephone number you want to register Ex EL 20 545 8545_ The fax telephone number can be up to 120 digits long including spaces and pauses
145. eesasashesdessasavedenssasesastercs sesvetasebenisors 7 9 Manual Sending Via the Handset s ssisssrse ariii 7 12 Canceling Sen Ging sissies i arte diate tees E 7 14 Removing the Document From the Automatic Document Feeder ADE arn tsigane e cesta dees E os 7 15 Redialling When the Line is BUSY ccccccscsesestetesssesteteesceeeeeseseseanenens 7 17 Manual Redialling scsi nn ita E aster Ret en EERE 7 17 Cancelling Manual Redialing asioi 7 17 Automatic Redialing sisii a e nce anata 7 17 What is Automatic Redialling c cesses ce eeeesesesnenenenenes 7 17 Cancelling Automatic Redialling isss seiis tsei 7 18 Setting Up Automatic RedialliNg sissiiisrisssisssiisressssesnsssis 7 20 Sequential Broad casting wi isisecircstentsinienciunhase dadaiesasiane 7 23 Sending a Document to More Than One Destination 006 7 23 Sending a Document Using Group Dialling ccecccceeeeeeteteee 7 26 Delayed Sending issart urena E aed diets EERE 7 27 Sending Other Documents While the MultiPASS C70 is Set for Delayed Sending sssri uyo ti toa RTE 7 27 Documents Stored in MeMOTY ssicsssemsranisrru rr rE 7 28 Printing a List of Documents in MeMOTY sse anren ioir 7 28 Printing a Document in MeMOTy ccceseecceeeteeeteeeeeneneneteteteeneneneees 7 29 Deleting a Document From Memory ccccccsesescsesesteteteseeceteseseeeenens 7 33 Contents Chapter 8 Receiving Faxes Different Ways to Rec ivea FAX ts s s sessecsasescastsestess
146. eet is aligned with the right side of the multi purpose tray 1 Make sure the sheets behind the unit are aligned with the multi purpose tray 8 Slide the paper guide against the left edge of the sheet leaving a 1 mm gap between the paper guide and the edge of the sheet 1 Make sure the sheet is under the tabs on the multi purpose tray TAB 5 30 Paper Handling Chapter 5 9 Your MultiPASS C70 is now ready to print Set your PC to print on the banner paper 1 Allow the paper to flow over the edge of the table as it exits the MultiPASS C70 Ai When you finish printing on banner paper make sure you lower the Naa paper output guides e 3 c Ge I o a Chapter 5 Paper Handling 5 31 5 32 Paper Handling Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Speed Dialling This chapter describes how to register and use the speed dialling features of your MultiPASS C70 EV What is Speed Dialing csssesscssecssssssstsessencsespsacentssestevesasstosesasissupessessas tienes 6 2 Speed Dialling Methods tiiciccccccnsciecsaiiuhecanamastisieaniiess 6 2 One Touch Speed Dialing sisside ar 6 2 Coded Speed Dialling i ia e TEE Ea A 6 2 Group Dialling ssiri E dance E E RE 6 2 L One Touch Speed Dialling cccsssssvecerccneeccrstecessssrancnesrersteacsaoine aerseoaaentens 6 3 e Registering Numbers for One Touch Speed Dialling 00 6 3 e Changing Deleting a One Touch Speed Dialling
147. elections and register your entries You will also find information on entering numbers letters and symbols to register fax telephone numbers and names When entering information always keep the following points in mind 1 If you pause while entering information and do not make an entry for more than 60 seconds the MultiPASS C70 returns automatically to standby mode and loses all information you had entered up to that point You will have to start again d If the MultiPASS C70 is set for manual receiving and the unit rings while you are entering information press the Stop button and lift the handset or the handset of the telephone or extension phone The MultiPASS C70 will automatically save all the information entered up to the last time you pressed the Set button So 5 S oO Ew o a 25 TS Lo 2 Ss oc e If you hear nothing or a slow beep someone is trying to send a fax press the Start Scan button on the MultiPASS C70 or dial 25 remote receiving ID on the telephone or extension phone to activate reception of the fax Then hang up the handset gt Receiving a Fax Manually p 8 14 e If you hear a voice you are receiving a normal telephone call e If your MultiPASS C70 is set to receive faxes automatically you do not have to press the Stop button The MultiPASS C70 will automatically receive the fax Chapter 3 Registering Information in the MultiPASS C70 3 3 Using the One Touch Speed Dialling Speci
148. ents These settings are important because they determine how the unit operates when it receives a document PRINTER SETTINGS gt pp 14 13 14 14 Use these settings to set how the MultiPASS C70 prints documents These features include specifying a paper size for the multi purpose tray reducing the size of received documents and selecting economy print SYSTEM SETTINGS gt pp 14 15 14 16 Use these settings to set up important defaults such as the format in which the date is displayed selecting the language for the LCD display and sending and receiving start speeds 14 4 Summary of Settings Chapter 14 User Settings Accessing the User Settings Menu ATS 01 2 Press Data Registration DATA REGSTRATION Data Registration 2 gt fo Gs Ps 50 7p Set 3 Press Set lt a gt USER SETTINGS Set 4 Press Set again DATE amp TIME 5 Refer to the table on the following page and follow these guidelines to select and register settings T Use V or A to move through the settings QO To register a setting or access sub settings press Set 1 To return to a previous level press Data Registration Ai In order for your settings to be registered be sure to press Set after ioe making a selection or entering information Stop 6 When you have finished changing settings press Stop to return to standby mode Ex 15 00 FaxOnly Chapter 14 Summary of
149. er use light design patterns D To prevent ink from running over the edges of the sheet print within the margins shown in the illustration above 5 26 Paper Handling Chapter 5 1 Place the MultiPASS C70 near the edge of a table so that the paper can flow over the edge as it exits the unit T Make sure the paper rest is extended PAPER REST 2 Make sure the paper thickness lever is set to the left D Q For details refer to Setting the Paper Thickness Lever on page 5 10 dD I o 2 A To avoid paper jams smearing and other problems never open the printer cover to set the paper thickness lever while the MultiPASS CAUTION tie C70 is printing Chapter 5 Paper Handling 5 27 3 Raise both paper output guides to a vertical position 1 You can hold the document tray up for easy access to the paper output guides 4 Cut the banner paper along one of the perforations to the length required 1 Your banner can be up to six sheets 1800 mm long 5 28 Paper Handling Chapter 5 5 Place the banner paper behind the unit on a flat surface 6 Gently fold along the perforations between the first and second sheets dD I o 2 A Chapter 5 Paper Handling 5 29 7 Insert the first sheet into the multi purpose tray until it stops so that the right edge of the sh
150. er you are using and your printing environment are within the specifications of the unit gt Chapter 5 Paper Handling Envelopes do not load Envelopes may not be loaded correctly 1 Make sure the envelopes are loaded correctly gt p 5 15 T Make sure there are no more than 10 envelopes in the multi purpose tray You may need to choose the envelope setting in your printer driver Q Make sure you select the correct envelope size in the Paper dialog box in your printer driver gt MultiPASS Suite Software User s Guide The envelopes you are using may not meet the requirements for the unit 0 Envelopes must be European DL or U S Commercial No 10 envelopes pp 5 2 5 5 Chapter 13 Troubleshooting 13 17 Faxing Problems Sending Problems You cannot send a fax The MultiPASS C70 may have overheated 1 Unplug the unit and let it cool for several minutes Then plug the unit back in and try sending again The MultiPASS C70 may not be set for the type of telephone line in use pulse tone 1 If you have a pulse line make sure the MultiPASS C70 is set for pulse dialling gt p 3 19 The document may not have been fed correctly into the Automatic Document Feeder ADF L1 Remove the document stack it if necessary and feed it into the Automatic Document Feeder ADF correctly gt pp 4 6 4 11 LY Check that the document feed lever is set for the type of document you are sending gt
151. ere is no BJ cartridge installed in the MultiPASS C70 n x Le to gt o 2 o o PUT IN CARTRIDGE Install a BJ cartridge gt p 2 31 The unit automatically prints the pages stored in memory Incorrect BJ cartridge installed The MultiPASS C70 has received a fax but the incorrect BJ cartridge is installed INSTALL BC 2le Or INSTALL BC21e 20 Replace the BJ cartridge in the unit with the BJ cartridge showing in the LCD display gt p 12 19 The unit automatically prints the pages stored in memory Paper jam has occurred A paper jam has occurred in the MultiPASS C70 while printing CLEAR PAPER JAM Clear the paper jam p 13 6 Then press the Resume button to print the pages stored in memory Chapter 8 Receiving Faxes 8 29 The MultiPASS C70 memory can store up to approximately 42 Pi pages 1 You can set the MultiPASS C70 not to store faxes in memory if a problem occurs during reception MEMORY RX pp 14 11 14 12 N T Once the pages are printed they are deleted from memory LY If the memory becomes full you will not be able to receive the remaining pages Contact the other party and request that they send the fax again Based on Canon FAX Standard Chart No 1 standard mode 8 30 Receiving Faxes Chapter 8 Cancelling Receiving Follow this procedure if you want to stop receiving a fax before reception is completed Stop 1 Press St
152. ess Data Registration a Data Registration DATA REGSTRATION Set 3 Press Set Cc USER SETTINGS Set 4 Press Set DATE amp TIME Set 5 Press Set Cc 1 The date and time currently set for the unit are displayed Ex 20 12 2000 13 30 6 Use the numeric buttons to enter the correct day month year and time Ex 27 12 2000 15 00 1 Enter the new date and time over the previous date and time 1 Use the day month year format for the date and use the 24 hour format for the time e g 1 00 p m as 13 00 1 The default format for the date is DD MM YYYY However if you prefer you can change this format to YYYY MM DD or MM DD YYYY gt DATE SETUP pp 14 15 14 16 1 If you make a mistake press Clear and enter the date and time again You can also use lt or gt to move the cursor under the digit you want to correct and enter the correct digit 3 14 Registering Information in the MultiPASS C70 Chapter 3 Set 7 When you have entered the correct date and time press Set to Cc register your entry UNIT TELEPHONE Stop 8 Press Stop to return to standby mode Ex 15 00 FaxOnly Registering Your Fax Number and Unit Name Follow this procedure to register your fax telephone number of your MultiPASS C70 and register your name or company name se Function 1 Press Function 2 pen ITN a 2s D 01 2 Press Data Registrat
153. fax machine may not be a G3 fax machine Q Make sure the receiving fax machine is compatible with the MultiPASS C70 which is a G3 fax machine Images on received faxes from the MultiPASS C70 are spotted or dirty The receiving fax machine may not be working properly d Check the MultiPASS C70 by making a copy gt Chapter 10 Making Copies If the copy is clear the problem may be in the receiving fax machine The document may not have been fed correctly into the Automatic Document Feeder ADF L1 Remove the document stack it if necessary and feed it into the Automatic Document Feeder ADF correctly gt pp 4 6 4 11 Cannot send using Error Correction Mode ECM The other party s fax machine may not support ECM 1 Some fax machines do not support ECM If the other party s fax machine does not support ECM then the document is sent in normal mode without error checking ECM may be disabled 1 Make sure ECM is on ECM TX pp 14 9 14 10 Errors occur frequently while sending The telephone lines may be in poor condition or you may have a bad connection 1 Lower the transmission speed gt TX START SPEED pp 14 15 14 16 Chapter 13 Troubleshooting 13 19 Receiving Problems Cannot receive a fax automatically The MultiPASS C70 may not be set to receive automatically 1 For the MultiPASS C70 to receive faxes automatically the receive mode must be set to FAX ONLY MODE Fax Tel Mode ANS
154. first page only a amp Press to print all pages If you have the BC 21e Colour BJ cartridge installed The MultiPASS C70 starts printing the document 7 30 Sending Faxes Chapter 7 If you are printing a black amp white document and have the BX 20 Black BJ cartridge installed The MultiPASS C70 starts printing the document If you are printing a colour document and have the BX 20 Black BJ cartridge installed The following messages alternate in the LCD display o x LL D S lt o Yn CONVERT CLR gt B amp W YES 2K NO Press to print the document in black amp white with the BX 20 Black BJ cartridge or Press to cancel printing The unit returns to step 5 If you are printing a colour document and have the optional BC 22e Photo BJ cartridge installed The following messages alternate in the LCD display RINT W BC 22e YES K NO Press to print the document with the optional BC 22e Photo BJ cartridge or Press to cancel printing The unit returns to step 5 You cannot print a black amp white document with the optional BC 22e Photo BJ cartridge If you have this BJ cartridge installed press the Stop button install the BX 20 Black or BC 21e Colour BJ cartridge gt p 12 19 and start again from the beginning IN Note Chapter 7 Sending Faxes 7 31 8 To continue printing other documents in memory repeat the procedure fro
155. follows Never use volatile liquids such as thinners benzene acetone or any other chemical cleaner to clean the interior of the MultiPASS C70 as CAUTION they can damage its components LA When the power cord is disconnected the image memory is completely erased Therefore before you begin cleaning the MultiPASS C70 be sure one to print any faxes stored in its memory pp 7 29 8 18 8 28 1 Disconnect the power cord from the MultiPASS C70 2 Open the printer cover by grasping the document guides and lifting Q If the printer cover does not open easily slide the document guides outwards and then open the printer cover SY S NNS y As DOCUMENT GUIDE DOCUMENT GUIDE Q fe fe o 2 Chapter 12 Maintenance 12 5 Do not touch the round shaft guide rail or ribbon cable Touching these parts may adversely affect operation of the unit and or cause CAUTION i print quality deterioration DO NOT TOUCH THE ROUND SHAFT DO NOT TOUCH THE GUIDE RAIL DO NOT TOUCH THE RIBBON CABLE 3 Usea clean soft dry lint free cloth to remove any ink or paper debris from the unit s interior especially around the platen Be careful not to touch the BJ cartridge 12 6 Maintenance Chapter 12 4 Check the small black rollers If they are dirty clean them with a soft dry toothbrush 5 When finished close the pri
156. follows 1 Make sure the light above the Color B amp W button is turned off QO If not press Color B amp W to turn it off 2 Press Resolution T The current resolution setting is displayed Ex FAX STANDARD 3 Press Resolution to select the resolution setting you want 1 You can select from the following FAX STANDARD 8 pels mm x 3 85 lines mm Suitable for most text only documents FAX FINE 8 pels mm x 7 7 lines mm Suitable for documents with fine print smaller than the print in this sentence 7 4 Sending Faxes Chapter 7 FAX PHOTO 8 pels mm x 7 7 lines mm Suitable for documents that contain photographs With this setting areas of the document that contain photos are automatically scanned with 64 levels of grey rather than just two black amp white This gives a much better reproduction of photos though the transmission time is longer 1 After about 10 seconds the LCD display returns to standby mode N x LL D a lt o 2 For colour sending set the resolution as follows Coor Bew 1 Press Color B amp W to turn on the light above this button L Resolution 2 Press Resolution lt D 1 The current colour resolution setting is displayed Ex FAX STANDARD Resolution 3 Press Resolution to select the colour resolution setting you want lt gt 1 You can select from the following FAX STANDARD Provides standard colour resolution FAX FINE
157. g To print copy or send other documents after setting the MultiPASS C70 for delayed sending simply follow the procedures described in this guide Chapter 7 Sending Faxes 7 27 Documents Stored in Memory Printing a List of Documents in Memory Function Ns pe 04 lt C Memory Reference Set Ga The MultiPASS C70 can print out a list of documents stored in memory along with the transaction number TX RX NO of each Once you know the transaction number of a document in memory you can print it or delete it These procedures are described later in this chapter 1 Press Function 2 Press Memory Reference DOC MEMORY LIST 3 Press Set PRINTING REPORT m The MultiPASS C70 begins printing a list of documents stored in memory 27 12 2000 23 42 FAX 123 4567 001 FOI III III TO IIe FOI II III IOI ITO Ie TX RX NO MODE CONNECTION TEL ID PGS SET TIME 0046 TRANSMIT k 01 Canon TOKYO 3 27 12 23 24 0047 TRANSMIT COL 04 Canon ITALIA 2 27 12 23 24 0048 B CAST 01 Canon CANADA 1 27 12 23 38 02 Canon FRANCE 0049 B CAST 03 Canon GROUP 2 1 27 12 23 39 7 28 Sending Faxes Chapter 7 Printing a Document in Memory Follow this procedure to print a document stored in memory Before printing a document make sure you have the correct BJ cartridge installed Black amp White Document in Memory BC 21e Colour BJ Printing possible Se
158. g the Printer Settings Menu ATS 01 2 Press Data Registration DATA REGSTRATION 2 jo i Data Registration gt E E 92 Set 3 Press Set am USER SETTINGS 08 02 4 Use V or A to select PRINTER SETTINGS ca Cc PRINTER SETTINGS Set 5 Press Set RX REDUCTION 6 Refer to the table on the following page and follow these guidelines to select and register settings T Use V or A to move through the settings QO To register a setting or access sub settings press Set 1 To return to a previous level press Data Registration In order for your settings to be registered be sure to press Set after ae making a selection or entering information Stop 7 When you have finished changing settings press Stop to return to standby mode Ex 15 00 FaxOnly Chapter 14 Summary of Settings 14 13 Printer Settings Menu Name Description Settings RX REDUCTION Enable disable reduction of faxes to fit on the recording ON OFF paper REDUCE Select the direction of the reduction VERTICAL ONLY DIMENSION HORIZ amp VERTICAL PAPER SIZE Select the size of the paper loaded in the multi purpose A4 LTR LGL tray ECONOMY PRT Enable disable economy printing for black amp white printing OFF ON By enabling this setting ink consumption can be decreased resulting in a longer effective cartridge life COLOR COPY MEDIA Select the paper t
159. gister up to 111 fax numbers with group dialling and send the same document to these numbers at the press of one or three buttons p 6 19 To send a document using sequential broadcasting do the following Be sure to adjust the document feed lever before loading your document p 4 5 Chapter 7 Sending Faxes 7 23 amp Prepare the document and load it face down in the Automatic Document Feeder ADF pp 4 6 4 11 m The LCD display shows the following Currently used memory EMORY USE Standby to scan DOCUMENT READY Q If you are sending in colour to a fax machine with colour capability press Color B amp W to turn on its light gt p 7 3 Q If necessary you can adjust the resolution and contrast gt pp 7 4 7 6 Enter up to 113 fax numbers using any of the following methods T One touch speed dialling Press the desired one touch speed dialling button s T Coded speed dialling Press Coded Dial then use the numeric buttons to enter the two digit code e Be sure to press Coded Dial before each code Coded Dial O gt 7 24 Sending Faxes Chapter 7 T Regular dialling Use the numeric buttons to enter the fax number then press Set to add the number to the broadcast list e You can only enter one fax number this way o x LL D S lt o Yn Ai 1 If you enter the incorrect destination press Function then
160. happen 1 If you set the DEFAULT ACTION setting to RECEIVE the unit will switch to fax receive mode automatically at that point and start to receive the document If no document comes in it disconnects the call after approximately 55 seconds The default setting is RECEIVE 2 If you set the DEFAULT ACTION to DISCONNECT the unit will disconnect the telephone call immediately freeing up your telephone line at this point 8 10 Receiving Faxes Chapter 8 What Happens When Fax Tel Mode is Selected Type of call Telephone Fax Fax Sending document Sending document manually automaticall Telephone charges The MultiPASS C70 answers without ringing begin for the caller The MultiPASS C70 listens for the fax tone For 8 sec RING START TIME The fax tone The document is Factory default is detected received automatically setting 8 sec The fax tone is detected and the MultiPASS C70 The fax tone is not detected switches to receive mode D F T RING TIME handset to talk Factory default setting 22 sec If you don t pick up the handset DEFAULT ACTION Choose between RECEIVE factory default setting and DISCONNECT The MultiPASS C70 Ei disconnects the call RECEIVE Factory default setting Not all fax machines are capable of sending a fax tone For those cases if you set the DEFAULT ACTION to RECEIVE the MultiPASS C70 switches to receive mode automatically and starts receiving the document
161. hapter 6 Chapter 7 Sending Faxes This chapter describes how to use your MultiPASS C70 to send faxes A Preparing to Send a Fax s cinicincnniinniinniiniinainniaunias 7 3 s Documents You Can Fax civss sssecesiescesesecssiessxscsosenssasesanses cs sesestenensstects 7 3 e Adjusting the Quality of Your Faxes cccccesesescceceseseeteneteseseaes 7 3 Setting Colour or Black amp White Transmission cce 7 3 Setting the Scanning ResolutONesneissseene 7 4 Setting the Scanning Contrast segar ir En e EERE 7 6 Dialling Methods irinin oa E E EE 7 8 Ei Sending MetN dS essiri E Monuase sane 7 9 COVELVIOW e E 7 9 Memory Sending sssseset treer re he eE Snip ei esi Gait 7 9 e Manual Sending Via the Hands t s sssisisssississeerisesesrossssissrssssssse 7 12 A Cancelling Sending wists ices arith sie sirsa Gaia iat tees 7 14 e Removing the Document From the Automatic Document Feeder ADE ninine asane ENE REE NEES 7 15 A Redialling When the Line is BUSY cccccscceecseeeeteeseseeneteeeeeees 7 17 Mantal Redialling seisis a Raar ea R 7 17 Cancelling Manual Redialling skieen 7 17 Automatic Redial S ssspesnuonr 7 17 What is Automatic Redialling sssrinin nae 7 17 Cancelling Automatic Redialling ssis iieii 7 18 Setting Up Automatic Redialling sssrini 7 20 EV Sequential Broadcasting 6 s ccscassssesessescentscessscestavesssedasdeseabeanerdbessohesveeee 7 23 e Sending a Document to More Than One Des
162. he Data Registration button allows you to register important information and set up different features Here we will give a brief overview of these menus and then describe how to access each one individually QQ USER SETTINGS gt pp 14 5 14 6 The settings in this menu include date and time setup registration for the sender information printed at the top of every page you send and other important settings that control the operating environment of your MultiPASS C70 Adjust the settings in this menu when you set up your MultiPASS C70 for the first time You will rarely need to change them thereafter I REPORT SETTINGS gt pp 14 7 14 8 The settings under this menu allow you to select different options for printing transaction and activity reports For example you can select which transaction report you want printed automatically and how you want it to be printed out Reports allow you to keep track of transactions performed with your MultiPASS C70 Chapter 14 Summary of Settings 14 3 gt S E E 5 92 e 2 TX Transmission SETTINGS gt pp 14 9 14 10 Use these settings to customise how the MultiPASS C70 sends documents With these settings you can turn Error Correction Mode ECM on and off set the pause time and set up redialling and other features RX Reception SETTINGS gt pp 14 11 14 12 Use these settings to customise how the MultiPASS C70 receives docum
163. he PC s parallel interface port MultiPASS Suite Software User s Guide The PC s parallel interface port may be disabled 1 Make sure your PC s CMOS has the primary parallel port set to LPT1 Your PC should have a Setup Program that lets you do this See your PC s documentation Another hardware device or software application is attempting to communicate with the same parallel interface port to which the MultiPASS C70 is connected 0 Disconnect the peripheral device and uninstall or remove any software associated with this device and any software communicating with the parallel interface port 13 28 Troubleshooting Chapter 13 The BJ cartridge moves but ink does not appear The orange tape may not be removed from the BJ cartridge 1 Be sure to remove the orange tape from the BJ cartridge before you install it gt p 2 34 D Ea 7 2 Fa 2 The BJ cartridge or a BJ tank may not be installed properly 1 Make sure the BJ cartridge and the BJ tank s are installed properly gt pp 2 31 12 26 The nozzles on the BJ cartridge print head may be clogged d Print the nozzle check pattern to check the BJ cartridge print head gt p 12 15 Perform the BJ cartridge print head cleaning procedure if necessary p 12 17 A BJ tank in the BC 21e Colour BJ cartridge may be empty 1 Replace empty BJ tanks as necessary gt p 12 26 The printed output is not what you expected
164. he access line type for the switching system Or Or EARTH CONNECTION PREFIX HOOKING Chapter 9 Special Features 9 3 If you selected HOOKING or EARTH CONNECTION in step 9 Set 10 Press Set REPORT SETTINGS Stop 11 Press Stop to return to standby mode Ex 15 00 FaxOnly If you selected PREFIX in step 9 Set 10 Press Set PREFIX Set 11 Press Set again 12 Use the numeric buttons to enter the outside line access number Ex 123456 1 The outside line access number can be up to 20 digits long Ce Pause 13 Press O Redial Pause to enter a pause Ex 123456P Set 14 Press Set to register the outside line access number co REPORT SETTINGS Stop 15 Press Stop to return to standby mode EX 15 00 FaxOnly 9 4 Special Features Chapter 9 Dialling a Long Distance Number With Pauses When you dial or register a long distance number you may need to insert a pause within and or after the number The length and location of the pause depends on the telephone system of your country Follow the procedure below to dial a long distance number with pauses and send a document using regular dialling Be sure to adjust the document feed lever before loading your document p 4 5 IN Note Document Feeder ADF pp 4 6 4 11 m The LCD display shows the following Currently used memory S 1 Prepare the document and load
165. he silver metal or circuit area on its side 7 Lower the blue cartridge lock lever completely 1 Do not use excessive force m The BJ cartridge is now locked into position Chapter 2 Setting Up Your MultiPASS C70 2 35 J 3 gt 25 to Q 72 MultiPASS C70 8 Press El m The cartridge holder moves to its home position on the right side of the unit and begins cleaning the print head This process takes about 55 seconds Do not try to manually move or stop the cartridge holder as this may damage the MultiPASS C70 CAUTION 9 Close the printer cover LA Unplug the MultiPASS C70 only when it is in standby mode time and receive mode shown in the LCD display Do not unplug the MultiPASS C70 when the cartridge holder is not in its home position on the right If you unplug the unit while it is printing or move the cartridge holder from its home position the BJ cartridge will not be capped and can dry out Note 2 36 Setting Up Your MultiPASS C70 Chapter 2 Storing a BJ Cartridge in its Container Once a BJ cartridge is unwrapped its print head must be kept from drying out or it can clog and fail to work properly A BJ cartridge installed in the MultiPASS C70 is protected from drying out by automatically moving to the home position on the right side of the unit and capping itself If you remove a partially used BJ cartridge from the MultiPASS C70 st
166. he white cotton Fabric Sheet FS 101 for Canon BJ colour printers to print pillow covers scarves flags and other textile items Use these sheets for appliqu s cross stitch and other craft and sewing projects Back Print Film Canon Back Print Film BF 102 has been specially developed for Canon Colour Bubble Jet printers and MultiPASS products The unique mylar based translucent sheet is designed to deliver sharp brilliant high intensity colour images suitable for business presentations design work or professional reports Back print film is printed on the back non glossy side of the film in mirror image and then viewed from the front glossy side using a backlit device such as a light box For more details contact your local authorised Canon dealer or the Canon help line or refer to the manual supplied with the film High Gloss Film The Canon High Gloss Film HG 101 features a bright white finish that lends striking visual power to charts graphs and photographic images It creates a sharper and more vivid colour output than is possible with coated paper Use of this film gives your presentation materials and graphics a professional look This film provides the best colour print quality for the BC 21e Colour BJ cartridge and is recommended when printing at 720 x 360 dpi Transparencies CF 102 Transparencies from Canon are recommended These transparencies produce excellent contrast sharpness and colour to produce crisp and pr
167. hoto Paper GP 201 10 minutes Canon Fabric Sheet FS 101 1 hour Canon Transparencies CF 102 15 minutes Canon Back Print Film BF 102 15 minutes 1 When your output has dried completely cover its printed side with a sheet of plain not coated paper before storing it this is recommended even if you place the sheets of film in a clear file or plastic holder V 5 18 Paper Handling Chapter 5 D When loading transparencies or back print film insert one sheet of plain paper as the last sheet in the stack D Do not leave film in the multi purpose tray for long periods of time Dust and dirt may accumulate on the film resulting in spotty printing D To avoid smudging caused by fingerprints use a pair of thin cloth gloves while loading and handling film 1 To avoid fading do not expose printed film to prolonged sunlight 1 Store unused papers and films flat Do not remove papers from their protective packaging until you are ready to use them 1 Store unused film at temperatures between 15 and 30 C The relative humidity should be between 10 and 70 Uncurling Back Print Film Follow these steps to uncurl back print film 1 Cover the non glossy side of the film with a sheet of plain paper Ss om c J I o S a Chapter 5 Paper Handling 5 19 2 Roll the film and paper up in the direction opposite to the curl T Do not roll the film too tight m The film and paper rolled together should
168. ing cancelling 7 18 7 19 definition 7 17 7 18 setting up 7 20 to 7 22 B Back print film 5 2 5 7 5 18 uncurling 5 19 5 20 Index Banner paper 5 2 5 6 printing 5 26 to 5 31 BC 21e Colour BJ cartridge 2 6 2 7 12 12 installing 2 31 to 2 36 replacing 12 19 to 12 25 replacing BJ tank in 12 26 to 12 31 BC 22e Photo BJ cartridge 12 13 installing 2 31 to 2 36 replacing 12 19 to 12 25 BCI 21 Black BJ tank 2 6 2 7 12 12 replacing 12 26 to 12 31 BCI 21 Colour BJ tank 12 12 replacing 12 26 to 12 31 BJ cartridge See also individual cartridge names guidelines 2 29 2 30 included 2 6 2 7 installing 2 29 to 2 36 maintenance 12 14 print head 12 15 to 12 17 replacing 12 19 to 12 25 storing 2 37 2 38 supplies 1 11 types 12 12 12 13 when to replace 12 18 12 19 BJ cartridge container 2 6 2 7 storing a BJ cartridge in 2 37 2 38 BJ cartridge print head cleaning 12 17 printing nozzle check pattern 12 15 12 16 testing 12 15 12 16 BJ tank See also individual tank names included 2 6 2 7 maintenance 12 14 replacing 12 26 to 12 31 supplies 1 11 types 12 12 Black amp white copying 10 2 to 10 4 Black amp white sending setting 7 3 setting resolution for 7 4 7 5 BLACK INK EMPTY message 8 28 13 7 BOTTOM MARGIN setting 10 7 14 14 Bubble Jet paper 5 2 5 6 BUSY NO SIGNAL message 13 7 13 8 Buttons See individual button names BX 20 Black BJ cartridge 12 12 installing 2 31 to 2 36 replacing 12 19 to 12 25 C
169. ing memory sending The TX Report cannot be printed with a colour document Reception RX Reports 1 Error RX Report gt p 11 9 This report prints every time an error occurs during fax reception C1 RX Report gt p 11 9 This report can be printed every time a fax is received Multi TX RX Report gt p 11 8 This report prints if the transmission was a sequential broadcast Memory List Report 1 Doc Memory List gt p 7 28 This list prints details of all documents currently stored in memory d Memory Clear Report gt pp 11 10 13 36 This report prints when power is restored after a power cut It shows a list of the transactions deleted from memory 11 2 Reports and Lists Chapter 11 Speed Dialling Lists T 1 Touch Spd Dial List gt p 6 27 This list shows all the numbers and names registered under one touch speed dialling buttons 1 Coded Speed Dial List gt p 6 28 This list shows all the numbers and names registered under coded speed dialling codes 1 Group Dial List gt p 6 30 This list shows the groups registered under one touch speed dialling buttons and coded speed dialling codes User s Data List gt p 3 18 This list is used to check if the settings and sender information are set correctly 2 L a ke lt o n 2 fo 2 oc Chapter 11 Reports and Lists 11 3 Summary of Abbreviations Used in Transaction Reports Here is a summary of the abbrevia
170. ing you want Cc Vv A Ex INCOMING RING Set 7 Press Set to display the sub setting under the setting you selected CD Ex OFF 8 Again use V or A to select the sub setting you want Or If required use the numeric buttons to enter information 9 Press Set to register the setting or entry 2 If you access additional settings repeat the above procedure from step 6 3 6 Registering Information in the MultiPASS C70 Chapter 3 Stop 10 When you have finished changing settings press Stop to return to standby mode Ex 15 00 FaxOnly Returning to a Previous Level To return to a previous level so you can continue browsing press Data Registration Each time you press Data Registration you will return to the previous level until the unit is back in standby mode Returning Directly to Standby Mode If at any stage you wish to return directly to standby mode press Stop LI If you do not press a button for 60 seconds the unit will automatically return to standby mode So 5 S oO Ew o a 25 TS Lo 2 Ss oc IN Note LI The settings in the menus described in this section can also be adjusted from the MultiPASS Desktop Manager gt MultiPASS Suite Software User s Guide T Settings changed from the MultiPASS Desktop Manager will override any settings made from the operation panel LI Settings changed using the operation panel will not be displayed in the MultiPASS Desktop
171. ins 12 12 Maltiten ance csoisssssesivesesestacsssussestensssseersvsesinssiadeavcesssasinsestnansbiaestaisetes 12 14 Testing and Cleaning the BJ Cartridge Print Head ee 12 15 Printing the Nozzle Check Pattern ccccccccseseetetesceeeeseseenens 12 15 Cleaning the BJ Cartridge Print Head cece tees eseeeens 12 17 When to Replace the BJ Gartidgesecscscrienenren enumar 12 18 Replacing the BJ Cartridge inei e arie 12 19 Replacing a BJ Tank in the BC 21e Colour BJ Cartridge 12 26 Transporting the MultiPASS C70 eror nenpun enr EEE ER 12 32 Chapter 13 Troubleshooting If You Cannot Solve the Problem ccssessscsssssessssonsseensesessstessenessescssssnsensnees 13 2 Clearing Jains ii tisccninici ci anninicniniinnnin SEEE NEE dni SE EESE EERE 13 4 Jams in the Automatic Document Feeder ADF cccsesseeseeeees 13 4 Jams in the Multi Purpose Tiay cs sisisisssnciiemiiiceberateiies 13 6 ECD Messa gesae g n EE T EEE RN 13 7 Paper Feeding Problem sss cs scescosteteeson ermetr E EEEE 13 16 Faxing Probles anria inn E r Era EEEE E TEE 13 18 Sending PLODLEMNS cierra AE R RET EEE 13 18 Receiving Problems rrem ae R e EE 13 20 Telephone Problems sincere oa E EEE 13 23 Copying Problems i acesintnnaiincacdinindiite mininnawunncahios 13 24 Print Quality ProDletnsis s sssssssseseccsssssssssessensscesiacehesdestesesesbsassessspessnondeenes 13 25 Printing Problems ssc diisiaciidieesnncntcidi hentia n EESE E NETE ERSE SEN 13 27
172. inter driver may not be selecting the right media 1 Make sure the correct paper type is set in the printer driver gt MultiPASS Suite Software User s Guide Ai Some colours are impossible to match exactly though the MultiPASS C70 is designed to come as close as possible D E s fe a 2 2 3 n Note Colours are missing The BJ cartridge print head may need cleaning 1 Clean the BJ cartridge print head gt p 12 17 Colours in a line are uneven or different from previous lines The print settings may not be the best for the images you are printing 1 If you are printing high density colour graphics on plain paper change the Media Type setting from Plain Paper to Coated Paper gt MultiPASS Suite Software User s Guide Q Be sure to experiment with different settings and different types of paper Hue changes The nozzles on the BJ cartridge print head may be clogged L Print the nozzle check pattern to check the BJ cartridge print head gt p 12 15 Perform the BJ cartridge print head cleaning procedure if necessary gt p 12 17 A BJ tank may be empty 1 Replace empty BJ tanks as necessary p 12 26 Chapter 13 Troubleshooting 13 33 Blue looks like purple Blue prints out as purple because of the difference in colour technology used by the screen and the MultiPASS C70 the screen uses RGB Red Green Blue colour and the MultiPASS C70 uses CMYK Cyan Magenta
173. into the unit o Ez D S o 5 3 9 amp MultiPASS C70 e If the unit has been exposed to rain or water e If the unit does not operate normally when you have followed the instructions in this guide Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instruction in this guide Improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and may require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the product to normal operation If the unit has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged If the unit exhibits a distinct change in performance indicating a need for service d Plug the MultiPASS C70 into a standard 200 240 V AC power outlet Do not attempt to use it outside of the country where you purchased it d Do not plug the MultiPASS C70 into the same circuit as an appliance such as an air conditioner electric typewriter television or copier Such devices generate electrical noise that can interfere with your MultiPASS C70 s ability to send and receive faxes 1 Check the plug frequently and make sure that it is firmly plugged into the socket This product emits low level magnetic flux If you use a cardiac pacemaker and feel abnormalities please move CAUTION away from this product and consult your doctor Chapter 1 Introducing the MultiPASS C70 1 21 1 22 Introducing the MultiPASS C70 Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Setting Up Your MultiPASS C70 This chapter tells you how t
174. ion gE 0 DATA REGSTRATION Data Registration Set 3 Press Set ae USER SETTINGS Set 4 Press Set again Ca DATE amp TIME 08 o2 5 Use V or A to select UNIT TELEPHONE ca CS lt gt UNIT TELEPHONE Set 6 Press Set gt Chapter 3 Registering Information in the MultiPASS C70 3 15 Set 10 Use the numeric buttons to enter your fax telephone number Ex _ TEL 123 4567 1 Your fax telephone number can be up to 20 digits long including spaces 1 To enter a space press Space Spaces are optional and are useful to make the number easier to read Q To enter a plus sign before the number press Tone 1 If you make a mistake press Clear and start again Alternatively you can use lt to delete digits from the rightmost digit Press Set to register your fax telephone number UNIT NAME 1 If you only need to register the fax telephone number press Stop after this step to return to standby mode To register your name or company name continue with the steps that follow Press Set again Use the numeric buttons to enter your name or company name CANON l 1 Your name can be up to 24 characters long including spaces 1 To enter letters numbers and symbols refer to the instructions on page 3 8 1 To switch between number mode uppercase letter mode and lowercase letter mode press
175. ions Appendix A When the document feed lever is set to Manual document feed Note that the scanning length may be shorter than the length of the actual document Maximum Document Size Minimum Document Size 216 mm _ e s0 mm t 45 mm UP TOA en MAXIMUM OF 32 MINUTES FOR EACH PAGE OR 1 METRE IN LENGTH o fa amp 2 i Appendix A Specifications A 15 Scanned Image The shaded area in the illustration below is outside the MultiPASS C70 s scanning area Make sure your document s text and graphics do not extend into these margins MAX 4 0 mm A4 MAX 4 0 mm COLOUR FAX MAX 6 0 mm MAX 4 5 mm MAX 4 5 mm A 16 Specifications Appendix A MultiPASS Desktop Manager for Windows System Requirements IBM or compatible computer with a Pentium 90 processor or higher An Intel Pentium processor is recommended Microsoft Windows 95 98 or NT 4 0 For Microsoft Windows NT 4 0 Service Pack 3 or later 32 megabytes MB of RAM 64 MB of RAM is recommended 60 megabytes MB of available hard disk space 150 MB of available hard disk space is recommended CD ROM drive or access to one over a network connection 256 colour SVGA monitor or greater Bi directional shielded IEEE 1284 compatible parallel cable 2 metres in length or shorter For assistance on purchasing the correct cable contact your local authorised Canon dealer Software Package Canon pr
176. ions when handling the BJ cartridges iN Note 11 Do not attempt to disassemble or refill the BJ cartridge or a BJ tank d Do not shake or drop the BJ cartridge or tip the print head downwards d Keep BJ cartridges out of children s reach Hold the BJ cartridge by its sides only Do not touch the print head the sharp edges around the print head the silver plate on the bottom CAUTION of the BJ cartridge or the silver metal or circuit area on its side HOLD HERE PRINT HEAD DO NOT TOUCH 1 Make sure the cartridge holder is in its home position on the right side of the unit when you are not using the MultiPASS C70 If it is not in its home position press the l button inside the unit Leaving it out of its home position will dry out the print head on the BJ cartridge 1 Clean the print head when print quality is no longer satisfactory Refer to Testing and Cleaning the BJ Cartridge Print Head gt p 12 15 If the print quality does not improve after five consecutive cleanings replace the BJ tank or BJ cartridge d Do not use a BC 21e Colour BJ cartridge with either of its BJ tanks missing Doing so can cause the ink to clog 1 Do not remove the BJ tanks from the BC 21e Colour BJ cartridge unnecessarily or the ink in them may clog 2 30 Setting Up Your MultiPASS C70 Chapter 2 Installing the BJ Cartridge in the MultiPASS C70 When there is no BJ cartridge installed in the MultiPASS C70 th
177. is Off If you have set the MultiPASS Desktop Manager to upload received faxes from the MultiPASS C70 to your PC but your PC is off the MultiPASS C70 stores the received faxes in its memory When you turn on your PC the faxes will automatically be uploaded to your PC If you want to print a fax stored in memory instead of uploading it to your PC follow these steps Function 1 Press Function ZEUEN 04 2 Press Memory Reference lt C gt Memory Reference DOC MEMORY LIST 08 02 3 Use V or A to select FILE PRINT ca Cc FILE PRINT Set 4 Press Set CD 1 The MultiPASS C70 then prints all received faxes that were to be uploaded to your PC Ai 11 When you print the fax it is erased from memory and can no longer be transferred to the PC OM For your MultiPASS C70 to receive faxes in memory the MEMORY RX setting of the RX SETTINGS menu must be enabled gt pp 14 11 14 12 Note 8 18 Receiving Faxes Chapter 8 Network FAX TEL Switching Australia Only IN Note Function pele on ed pe gt a 01 C2 Data Registration Set a In Australia Telstra offers the FaxStream DUFT capability This service allows you to assign two numbers to your line one for fax and one for telephone When the fax number is called the network sends a specific ring tone which your unit recognises and automatically handles as a fax call If the telephone number is called a different ring ton
178. is plugged in Q fe o 2 S The BJ cartridges included with your MultiPASS C70 may vary depending on the country of purchase Chapter 12 Maintenance 12 19 2 Open the printer cover by grasping the document guides and lifting Q If the printer cover does not open easily slide the document guides outwards and then open the printer cover ISS DOCUMENT GUIDE DOCUMENT GUIDE Do not touch the round shaft guide rail or ribbon cable Touching these parts may adversely affect operation of the unit and or cause CAUTION P print quality deterioration DO NOT TOUCH THE ROUND SHAFT DO NOT TOUCH THE GUIDE RAIL DO NOT TOUCH THE RIBBON CABLE 12 20 Maintenance Chapter 12 3 Press El QO The cartridge holder moves to the centre of the unit 1 Do not try to manually move or stop the cartridge holder as this may damage the MultiPASS C70 d The MultiPASS C70 includes an automatic protection feature that helps keep it from overheating If the cartridge holder does not move unplug the MultiPASS C70 and let it cool for several minutes When it has cooled plug it in again and press the El button to move the cartridge holder CAUTION 4 Raise the blue cartridge lock lever on the cartridge holder by gently pulling up on it Maintenance Chapter 12 Maintenance 12 21 Hold the BJ cartridge by its sides
179. isplays messages and prompts during operation and displays selections text numbers and names when registering information Chapter 2 Setting Up Your MultiPASS C70 2 25 b 3 gt Q D S o n MultiPASS C70 Receive Mode Button Chapter 8 Selects the receive mode Alarm Light Flashes when an error occurs or when the MultiPASS C70 is out of paper or ink One Touch Speed Dialling Special Function Buttons Dial fax telephone numbers that you have registered for one touch speed dialling Also used to perform special functions gt pp 2 27 3 4 6 9 Numeric Buttons Enter numbers when dialling or registering numbers Also enter letters when registering names O Redial Pause Button gt pp 7 17 9 6 Redials the last number that was dialled using the numeric buttons regular dialling Also enters pauses between or after the fax telephone number when dialling or registering numbers Hook Button Engages or disengages the telephone line Coded Dial Button gt p 6 17 Press this button and a two digit code to dial a fax telephone number that you have registered for coded speed dialling Start Scan Button Starts sending receiving scanning and copying Resolution Button gt pp 7 4 7 5 10 3 Selects the resolution the MultiPASS C70 uses for the document you are sending or copying Stop Button Cancels sending receiving registering data copying and other operations
180. ister a group under a one touch speed dialling button Use V or A to select the button under which you want to register the group 01 to 12 Ex 03 Q If a one touch speed dialling button has already been registered 1 TOUCH SPD or GROUP DIAL is displayed Or To register a group under a coded speed dialling code Press Coded Dial then use the numeric buttons to enter the code under which you want to register the group 00 to 99 Ex 21 m If a coded speed dialling code has already been registered CODED SPEED or GROUP DIAL is displayed Q If you wish to register a group under a one touch speed dialling button or coded speed dialling code already registered for speed dialling or you want to re enter a group you must delete the previous information first gt pp 6 6 6 14 6 23 Press Set H H ELEPHONE NUMBER 6 20 Speed Dialling Chapter 6 Set gt 9 Press Set again TEL 10 Enter the one touch or coded speed dialling numbers you want to register in the group To enter a destination registered for one touch speed dialling Press Function then press the one touch speed dialling buttons assigned to the numbers you want to register in the group Then press Function again Function Function lt gt gt gt ap 1 You cannot enter numbers not registered for one touch speed dialling ie with the numeric buttons 1 You can enter one touch speed dialling butto
181. iving faxes the MultiPASS C70 automatically scales them to fit the size of the paper loaded in the multi purpose tray So if your client is sending you a fax on paper larger than an A4 size page and you have A4 size paper in the multi purpose tray the fax will be scaled down and printed on A4 size paper o Ez D S o 5 3 9 amp MultiPASS C70 Automatic dialling and broadcasting To make faxing even easier the MultiPASS C70 provides several automatic dialling methods coded speed dialling one touch speed dialling and group dialling The MultiPASS C70 also enables you to broadcast faxes or send delayed faxes to as many as 113 destinations User restriction The MultiPASS C70 can be locked to prevent unauthorised use of your unit to send faxes Chapter 1 Introducing the MultiPASS C70 1 5 PC Colour Fax Features PC black amp white and colour faxing In addition to sending and receiving black amp white faxes directly from and to your PC you can also receive colour faxes directly to your PC Fax Telephone address book You can create an unlimited list of people to call and or to whom you can send PC faxes Manipulate or annotate a document With the MultiPASS Desktop Manager not only can you view a PC fax on your PC but you can also manipulate or annotate it For example you can remove a page split or merge it with other documents rotate or flip it and perform many other operations Cust
182. kness Weight 75 to 90 g m All sheets should be the same weight When the document feed lever is set for manual document feed Size Maximum 216 mm x Approx 1 m W x L Minimum 80 x 45 mm Quantity 1 sheet Thickness 0 08 to 0 43 mm Weight 90 to 340 g m 75 g m paper 4 2 Document Handling Chapter 4 Ai Problem documents Note 1 To prevent paper jams in the Automatic Document Feeder ADF do not use any of the following in the MultiPASS C70 3 2 WRINKLED OR CURLED OR TORN PAPER CREASED PAPER ROLLED PAPER CARBON PAPER OR COATED PAPER ONION SKIN OR CARBON BACKED THIN PAPER PAPER d Remove all staples paper clips or any other fasteners before loading the document into the Automatic Document Feeder ADF 1 Make sure any glue ink or correction fluid on the paper is completely dry before loading the document into the Automatic Document Feeder ADF Q If you have a document that will not feed into the MultiPASS C70 properly make a photocopy of the document then load the copy instead Chapter 4 Document Handling 4 3 i o E a e a dD 3 Scanned Image Area The shaded area in the illustration below is outside the MultiPASS C70 s scanning area Make sure your document s text and graphics do not extend into these margins MAX 4 0 mm A4 MAX 4 0 mm COLOUR FAX MAX 6 0 mm MAX 4 5 mm MAX 4 5 mm 4 4 Document Handling
183. lephone requirements easily and conveniently as well as your printing copying and scanning needs 1 2 Introducing the MultiPASS C70 Chapter 1 Main Features of the MultiPASS C70 The MultiPASS C70 is a complete multifunction system for your home or small office The MultiPASS C70 combines the following essential office machines into a single convenient desktop unit o Ez D S o 5 3 9 amp MultiPASS C70 Plain Paper Fax Machine Colour Fax Machine PC Colour Fax Colour Copier Telephone Colour Printer DOCO C O O O Colour Scanner Your MultiPASS C70 also includes the MultiPASS Desktop Manager for Windows software version 3 10 This exclusive Canon software package provides you with a PC Fax you can print fax scan and use the telephone from within your PC s Windows environment The MultiPASS C70 s multitasking ability enables you to perform a number of operations simultaneously For example you can print scan a document or make copies at the same time you are sending a fax or receiving a fax into memory The compact size of the MultiPASS C70 makes it ideal for desktop use and lets you use it in places where other machines might not fit PC black amp white fax transmission reception PC colour fax reception only Requires the handset a telephone or an answering machine Chapter 1 Introducing the MultiPASS C70 1 3 Colour and Plain Paper Fax Featu
184. ling 5 23 Set 7 Press Set gt The MultiPASS C70 feeds the cleaning sheet into the MultiPASS C70 and cleans the rollers Printing on Fabric Sheet FS 101 Fabric Sheet FS 101 for Canon printers come with a booklet that describes special handling procedures Be sure to look through this booklet for special information regarding the fabric sheet LA 1 Do not use the fixing agent that is supplied with the Fabric Sheet FS Noe 101 This agent is not needed when printing with the MultiPASS C70 d Do not touch newly printed fabric sheets until the ink has dried completely This takes about an hour Follow this procedure to load and print on Fabric Sheets FS 101 1 Make sure the paper thickness lever is set to the right 1 1 For details refer to Setting the Paper Thickness Lever on page 5 10 To avoid paper jams smearing and other problems never open the printer cover to set the paper thickness lever while the MultiPASS CAUTION eas C70 is printing 5 24 Paper Handling Chapter 5 2 With the cloth side out towards you and the open end up away from the multi purpose tray insert one sheet into the multi purpose tray until it stops so that the right edge of the sheet is aligned with the right side of the multi purpose tray Then slide the paper guide snugly against the left edge of the sheet OPEN END AT THE TOP 3 Your MultiPASS C70 is now ready to print Set
185. lled properly gt pp 2 31 12 26 The MultiPASS C70 may not be operating properly 0 Try to print a document from your PC MEMORY FULL appears in the LCD display when making multiple copies The MultiPASS C70 s memory is full d Print out any faxes stored in memory gt pp 7 29 8 18 8 28 then start again 13 24 Troubleshooting Chapter 13 Print Quality Problems The print quality is not what you expect print is not clear is splashed has missing dots or white streaks D E fe a amp 2 3 o n The paper you are using may not be supported by the unit 1 Make sure you are using the recommended paper p 5 5 You may be printing on the wrong side of the paper D Some papers have a right side for printing If the print quality is not as clear as you would like it to be try turning the paper over and printing on the other side The nozzles on the BJ cartridge print head may be clogged 1 Print the nozzle check pattern to check the BJ cartridge print head gt p 12 15 Perform the BJ cartridge print head cleaning procedure if necessary p 12 17 The BJ cartridge or a BJ tank may not be installed properly 1 Make sure the BJ cartridge and the BJ tank s are installed properly gt pp 2 31 12 26 A BJ tank in the BC 21e Colour BJ cartridge may be empty d Replace empty BJ tanks as necessary p 12 26 The BJ cartridge print head may be worn out
186. lour and the Canon BCI 21 Black BJ tanks Note Q fe 2 S The BJ cartridges included with your MultiPASS C70 may vary depending on the country of purchase Chapter 12 Maintenance 12 13 CAUTION CAUTION Maintenance The most important thing you can do to extend the life of your MultiPASS C70 and to ensure optimum print quality is to take care of the BJ cartridges Spilled ink can stain any surface Open BJ cartridges and BJ tanks carefully and follow the guidelines here to protect against spilled ink m If you are using both the BC 21e Colour and BX 20 Black BJ cartridges be sure to store the unused BJ cartridge in the SB 21 BJ cartridge container provided with your MultiPASS C70 You may have to purchase additional BJ cartridge containers to store optional BJ cartridges Keep BJ cartridges and BJ tanks in their sealed containers until you are ready to use them Do not remove the BJ tanks from the BC 21e Colour BJ cartridge unnecessarily This may cause the ink to clog Make sure both BJ tanks are installed in the BC 21e Colour BJ cartridge Attempting to use the BC 21e Colour BJ cartridge with only one BJ tank installed may cause the ink to clog If spilled the ink is difficult to remove Therefore keep the BJ cartridge and BJ tanks out of the reach of children Do not touch the print head area on the BJ cartridge Ink may leak out and cause stains Hold the BJ car
187. m step 5 gt p 7 30 Or Stop Press Stop to return to standby mode Ex n 15700 FaxOnly 7 32 Sending Faxes Chapter 7 Deleting a Document From Memory Function roan Sl os ZEN 04 lt D Memory Reference 08 02 a Set 08 o2 am Follow this procedure to delete a document from memory Press Function o o x LL D S Yn Press Memory Reference DOC MEMORY LIST Use V or A to select DELETE DOCUMENT DELETE DOCUMENT Press Set TX RX NO 0001 x Use V or A to select the transaction number TX RX NO of the document you want to delete TX RX NO 0004 1 The marks before the transaction number TX RX NO have the following meanings No mark The document is in black amp white x The document is in colour The document is in black amp white and is being sent or printed automatically amp The document is in colour and is being sent or printed automatically Q If you are unsure of the transaction number TX RX NO of the document you want to delete you can print the list of documents stored in memory p 7 28 m Use lt or gt to display the details of the transaction destination for example Chapter 7 Sending Faxes 7 33 Set 6 Press Set CD 1 The MultiPASS C70 asks you to confirm that you want to delete the document OK TO DELETE 7 Press to delete the document
188. mes if necessary If the problem persists install a new BJ cartridge You can print the nozzle check pattern to see if cleaning corrected the problem p 12 15 Q fe o 2 Chapter 12 Maintenance 12 17 When to Replace the BJ Cartridge How frequently you need to replace your MultiPASS C70 s BJ cartridge or one of its BJ tanks depends on how you use your MultiPASS C70 If you print a good deal of graphics halftones or greyscales you will need to replace the BJ cartridge more often than if you print mainly text See page A 12 for details on the life expectancy of BJ cartridges To help ensure the maximum life for your cartridges always follow the guidelines for cartridge maintenance given on page 12 14 In general you will need to replace the BJ cartridge in the following situations 1 If you have been using the BC 21e Colour BJ cartridge for over six months or the BX 20 Black BJ cartridge for over a year I If your printed output is not crisp and clear or has gaps in the characters missing dots even after you have cleaned the print head five times as described on page 12 17 1 If your colour printouts appear to be missing a colour even after you have cleaned the print head five times as described on page 12 17 1 Ifthe message CHANGE CARTRIDGE appears in the LCD display In general you will need to replace an ink tank in the BC 21e Colour BJ cartridge in the following
189. mory sending Note 1 When the document is sent it is automatically deleted from memory Q If an error occurs during sending the MultiPASS C70 will print out an error report If this happens try sending the document again gt Faxing Problems p 13 18 d When an error occurs during sending the document is automatically deleted from memory even if it is not sent completely Q If you send a colour document to a fax machine that does not support colour faxing the document will not be sent and the LCD display will show this message TRY AGAIN IN B W Try sending again in black amp white Chapter 7 Sending Faxes 7 11 Manual Sending Via the Handset Manual sending via the handset allows you to talk to the other party before you send the document This method is useful if the other party must manually set their fax machine to receive before they can receive a fax Follow this procedure to send using manual sending LI To use this mode you need to connect the handset a telephone or an extension phone to your unit gt pp 2 18 2 19 IN Note LI Be sure to adjust the document feed lever before loading your document p 4 5 Document Feeder ADF pp 4 6 4 11 m The LCD display shows the following Currently used memory SB 1 Prepare the document and load it face down in the Automatic EMORY USE Standby to scan DOCUMENT READY Q If you are sending in colour
190. n Ex l ECEIV 9 Use V or A to select RECEIVE or DISCONNECT RECEIVE DISCONNECT T 1 This setting tells the unit what to do if no one picks up the handset or the handset of the telephone or extension phone within the specified ring time set in step 6 T Select RECEIVE to receive the call or DISCONNECT to disconnect the call QO The default setting is RECEIVE 2 x o Le to gt o tS o oc 10 Press Set to register your setting 11 Press Stop to return to standby mode Ex 15 00 FaxTel Chapter 8 Receiving Faxes 8 13 Receiving Faxes Manually MANUAL MODE In MANUAL MODE if you connect the handset a telephone or an extension phone to your unit you can receive normal telephone calls and also activate your MultiPASS C70 to start receiving a document If you place the extension phone away from the MultiPASS C70 on your desk for example and activate receiving from this phone this is called remote receiving Setting MANUAL MODE 1 For this mode you need to have the handset a telephone or an extension phone connected to your unit gt pp 2 18 2 19 Q Make sure the REMOTE RX setting in the RX SETTINGS menu is enabled gt pp 14 11 14 12 You can also enable this setting from the MultiPASS Desktop Manager gt MultiPASS Suite Software User s Guide IN Note Follow the procedure below to set the receive mode to MANUAL MODE
191. n n of the extension into the inner rails on the document tray EXTENSION DOCUMENT TRAY Chapter 2 Setting Up Your MultiPASS C70 2 13 3 Hold the document tray as shown below and push the slots on the document tray firmly into the hidden tabs on the unit until you hear a click LA You can slide the extension in and out to suit the length of your document Note Attaching the Handset For details on attaching the handset to the MultiPASS C70 refer to Appendix B Handset 2 14 Setting Up Your MultiPASS C70 Chapter 2 Making Connections Connecting the MultiPASS C70 to Your PC Your MultiPASS C70 has an 8 bit bi directional parallel interface port that allows you to connect it to your PC You can purchase a Centronics compatible parallel cable with bi directional capability from your Canon dealer or any computer store Make sure the cable is IEEE 1284 compliant For best results use a cable that is no longer than 2 metres b 3 gt Q D S o n MultiPASS C70 IN Note Connect the MultiPASS C70 to your PC as follows 1 Make sure your PC is turned off and the MultiPASS C70 is unplugged 2 Align the cable connector with the parallel interface port so their shapes match 3 Gently press the cable connector into the port 4 Secure the cable connector by snapping both wire clips on the sides of the port into the cable connector
192. nd have them working check their fax machine Chapter 13 Troubleshooting 13 7 UEST BUSY NO SIGNAL Ctd CALLING CARTRIDGE JAMMED Error Code Cause The other party is not using a G3 machine The touch tone rotary pulse setting on your unit is incorrect The receiving fax machine did not answer within 55 seconds The unit is calling the other party s fax machine The cartridge holder cannot move This is normally due to a paper jam Action Contact the other party and ask them to send or receive the document using a G3 machine Set your unit to the setting that matches your telephone line gt p 3 19 Contact the other party and have them check their fax machine You can try to send the document manually p 7 12 For an overseas call add pauses to the registered number gt p 9 5 If you want to cancel the transmission press the Stop button Clear the paper jam or whatever is obstructing the cartridge holder and then press the Resume button Do not attempt to move the cartridge holder manually 13 8 Troubleshooting Chapter 13 UEST CHECK DOCUMENT 001 CHECK PAPER SIZE CHECK PRINTER Error Code CHANGE CARTRIDGE 052 Cause The BJ cartridge is empty or its ink may have dried out The document is jammed in the Automatic Document Feeder ADF The document feed lever is set to manual document feed 1 for a multipage do
193. nding Faxes Colour Document in Memory Printing possible cartridge BX 20 Black BJ Printing possible Printing possible cartridge if converted to black amp white BC 22e Photo BJ Change BJ cartridge to Printing possible cartridge Option BX 20 Black or BC 21e Colour BJ cartridge Function 1 Press Function 7IN 04 2 Press Memory Reference lt D Memory Reference DOC MEMORY LIST 08 02 3 Use V or A to select PRINT DOCUMENT ca Cc v A PRINT DOCUMENT Chapter 7 Sending Faxes 7 29 Set 4 Press Set gt Spm 08 02 5 Use V or A to select the transaction number TX RX NO of the eS document you want to print Ex TX RX NO 0003 1 The marks before the transaction number TX RX NO have the following meanings No mark The document is in black amp white The document is in colour The document is in black amp white and is being sent or printed automatically amp The document is in colour and is being sent or printed automatically Q If you are unsure of the transaction number TX RX NO of the document you want to print you can print the list of documents stored in memory p 7 28 T Use lt or gt to display the details of the transaction destination for example Set 6 Press Set 1ST PG ONLY 7 Select whether you want to print the first page of the document only or all pages of the document Press to print the
194. ndows application on your PC may be trying to communicate with the printer port the MultiPASS Server is using This conflict can result in strange printing behaviour 1 Uninstall or remove the software application Make sure the MultiPASS Service MPService is loaded C1 If the MultiPASS Service icon does not appear on the bottom of your screen turn on the MultiPASS Service MPService gt MultiPASS Suite Software User s Guide The printout curls Your page may include a large amount of ink 1 Leave the page in the output tray for 30 to 60 seconds to allow the ink to dry Then remove the page being careful not to touch the document tray or extension Allow the page to dry further then roll it in the opposite direction of the curl Should you dirty the document tray or extension when removing the page wipe them clean with a clean soft lint free cloth moistened with water or diluted dishwashing detergent solution Your PC indicates a device time out A device time out occurs when the PC sends data to the MultiPASS C70 but the unit does not respond The MultiPASS C70 may be unplugged not connected to the PC or have a paper jam 1 Make sure the MultiPASS C70 is plugged in and that its parallel cable is securely attached to the unit and to the PC gt p 2 15 Clear any paper jams p 13 6 and make sure paper is loaded properly in the multi purpose tray p 2 40 Chapter 13 Troubleshooting 13 31 C
195. nds before you plug it in again During electrical storms disconnect the power cord from the power outlet Please note that any documents stored in the unit s memory will be deleted when you unplug the unit Chapter 1 Introducing the MultiPASS C70 1 19 MultiPASS C70 o Ez D S o 5 3 9 amp 11 Do not stack boxes or furniture around the power outlet Keep the area open so you can reach the outlet quickly If you notice anything unusual smoke strange odours noises around the MultiPASS C70 unplug the unit immediately Contact your local authorised Canon dealer or the Canon help line 1 To avoid paper jams never unplug the power cord open the printer cover or remove paper from the multi purpose tray while printing d Keep the MultiPASS C70 away from direct sunlight as this can damage it If you have to place it near a window install heavy curtains or blinds 1 Do not expose the MultiPASS C70 to extreme temperature fluctuations Install the unit in a place with temperatures in the 10 32 5 C range m Always lift the MultiPASS C70 as shown below Never lift it by its multi purpose tray document support document tray extension or handset cradle 1 20 Introducing the MultiPASS C70 Chapter 1 d Unplug the MultiPASS C70 from the wall outlet and refer service to qualified personnel under the following conditions e When the power cord or plug is damaged or frayed e If liquid has spilled
196. ng new paper with paper remaining in the multi purpose tray 1 Use cut sheet paper only not paper that comes on a roll 1 Do not use paper that is thicker than that specified for the MultiPASS C70 Printing with paper that is thick enough to come in contact with the print head nozzles may damage the BJ cartridge For complete paper specifications refer to Chapter 5 Paper Handling d If your printed page contains a large amount of graphics the ink on the page may be damp due to the print density Leave the page in the output tray for 30 to 60 seconds to allow the ink to dry Then remove the page being careful not to touch the document tray or extension Should you dirty the document tray or extension when removing the page wipe them clean with a clean soft lint free cloth moistened with water or diluted dishwashing detergent solution Chapter 2 Setting Up Your MultiPASS C70 2 39 Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray 1 Make sure the paper thickness lever is set to the left D Q For details refer to Setting the Paper Thickness Lever on page 5 10 To avoid paper jams smearing and other problems never open the printer cover to set the paper thickness lever while the MultiPASS C70 is printing CAUTION 2 Pull the paper rest up until it stops 2 40 Setting Up Your MultiPASS C70 Chapter 2 3 Move the paper guide to the left to match the size of your paper
197. ng Colour Reception sssri i ares rs Sin EER aie 8 25 Receiving While Registering Copying or Printing ccccceeeenes 8 27 Receiving Faxes in Memory When a Problem Occurs ccccsseseeeseees 8 28 Cancelling Receivine es tomansaaietitncsccieiessiact taint E ERR 8 31 Chapter 9 Special Features Special Dia Ss yss nire eE E E R 9 2 Dialling Through a Switchboard sissien sirenos eentssrsiiais 9 2 Registering the Access Type and the Outside Line Access Number Under the R Button sirrien 9 2 Dialling a Long Distance Number With Pauses 0 cccecseeeeeees 9 5 Contents xi Switching Temporarily to Tone Dialling 0 00 ccc cece es teteneeseeeees 9 7 Confirming a Dial Tone sses ie s neii eiseni eiere eeir esia 9 9 Restricting Use of the MultiPASS C70 ss isissssssissisississsssssssrissiissressasssissess 9 10 Enabling Restriction of the MultiPASS C70 cccsccesceeeeseeneens 9 10 Cancelling Restriction of the MultiPASS C70 cccccceceeeeseeneens 9 12 Chapter 10 Making Copies Documents You Can Copy roris ERE E 10 2 Copying Document isisisi e paei 10 2 Setting the Paper Type for Colour Copying isisisi visrenieinirss 10 5 Setting the Length of the Bottom Margin for Colour Printing 10 7 Chapter 11 Reports and Lists Summary of Lists and REPOrts s csscs sesseseassicesesesseasesieecssasasssseseedesesstavasadecs 11 2 Summary of Abbreviations Used in Transaction Reports 000 11 4 Activity REPO
198. ng a Document From Memory gt p 7 33 When you cancel sending you may need to open the operation panel to remove the document from the Automatic Document Feeder ADF For details refer to the next page Removing the Document From the Automatic Document Feeder ADF N Note 7 14 Sending Faxes Chapter 7 Removing the Document From the Automatic Document Feeder ADF o x Ts D oO i LA Do not try to pull the document out without opening the operation ne panel or you might tear or smudge the document 1 Open the operation panel by gently pulling it towards you Ai If the paper does not pull out easily do not force it Contact your local No authorised Canon dealer or the Canon help line Chapter 7 Sending Faxes 7 15 3 When you are finished close the operation panel by pressing it down from the centre Ai Be sure to close the operation panel until it locks into place Otherwise Pris the unit will not function properly 7 16 Sending Faxes Chapter 7 Redialling When the Line is Busy Manual Redialling There are two methods of redialling manual redialling and automatic redialling See below for details N x LL D S lt o Yn Press the C Redial Pause button to dial the last number you dialled with the numeric buttons This also starts redialling regardless of whether automatic redialling
199. ng image processing UHQ Ultra High Quality image enhancement Halftones 256 levels of grey Colour 16 777 216 colours Automatic Document Feeder ADF Automatic document feed Size W x L Maximum 216 mm x Approx 1 m Minimum 210 x 148 mm Quantity Up to 20 A4 size 20 letter size 10 legal size sheets Thickness 0 08 0 13 mm Weight 75 90 g m Manual document feed Size W x L Maximum 216 mm x Approx 1 m Minimum 80 x 45 mm Quantity 1 sheet Thickness 0 08 0 43 mm Weight 90 340 g m Resolution Optical 300 dpi x 600 dpi Enhanced 30 600 dpi set from within application Effective Scanning Width 214 mm Compatibility TWAIN 75 g m paper Appendix A Specifications A 13 o ro Q amp O Q i Scanning speed B amp W Text 30 150 dpi 5 8 seconds page B amp W Text 151 300 dpi 11 6 seconds page B amp W Text 301 600 dpi 23 2 seconds page Greyscale 30 150 dpi 5 8 seconds page Greyscale 151 300 dpi 11 6 seconds page Greyscale 301 600 dpi 23 2 seconds page Colour 30 150 dpi 17 4 seconds page Colour 151 300 dpi 34 7 seconds page Colour 301 600 dpi 69 5 seconds page Document Sizes When the document feed lever is set to Automatic document feed Maximum Document Size Minimum Document Size 210 mm t 148 mm UP TOA MAXIMUM OF 32 MINUTES FOR EACH PAGE OR 1 METRE IN LENGTH i T 216 mm A 14 Specificat
200. ng methods available with your MultiPASS C70 are as follows One Touch Speed Dialling gt p 6 3 One touch speed dialling allows you to send a document or dial a telephone number by pressing only one button You can register up to 12 destinations for one touch speed dialling Coded Speed Dialling gt p 6 11 Coded speed dialling allows you to send a fax or dial a telephone number by pressing the Coded Dial button followed by a two digit code of your choice While coded speed dialling requires you to press more buttons it allows you to register up to 100 destinations Group Dialling gt p 6 19 Group dialling allows you to dial a group of registered one touch and or coded speed dialling fax numbers By registering a group for one touch or coded speed dialling you press only one or three buttons to send the same fax to several destinations The following pages describe how to register numbers for speed dialling You will also find instructions for changing these entries and using speed dialling N 1 You can also register numbers for speed dialling from the MultiPASS Desktop Manager gt MultiPASS Suite Software User s Guide Any settings adjusted from the MultiPASS C70 operation panel will not be displayed in the MultiPASS Desktop Manager I Settings changed from the MultiPASS Desktop Manager will override any settings made from the operation panel Note 6 2 Speed Dialling Chapter 6 One Touch Sp
201. nit will respond slightly differently as described below When you hear the telephone call ring pattern Pick up the handset and talk normally If you hear a slow beep it means the call is from a fax machine trying to send a document Press the Start Scan button to receive the document If you do not pick up the handset the unit continues to ring until the other party hangs up If an answering machine is connected it takes over the call n O x Le to gt o oO o o When you hear the fax call ring pattern triple ring After the unit rings it receives the document automatically If you want to receive a document without a ringing sound Make sure that the INCOMING RING setting is set to OFF gt pp 14 11 14 12 Chapter 8 Receiving Faxes 8 21 Network FAX TEL Switching New Zealand Only In New Zealand Telecom N Z offers the FaxAbility capability This service allows you to assign two numbers to your line one for fax and one for telephone When the fax number is called the network sends a specific ring tone which your unit recognises and automatically handles as a fax call If the telephone number is called a different ring tone is sent out from the network so that the call is handled as a voice call This means that there is no switching delay at the caller s end You can also set the MultiPASS C70 for network FAX TEL switching from the MultiPASS Desktop Manager gt MultiPASS Suite Softwa
202. ns that have a group registered under them T If you enter the wrong button select that entry with V or A then press Clear 1 The number registered under the button you press will be displayed or GROUP DIAL will be displayed if you select a group 1 You can enter multiple one touch speed dialling buttons To enter a destination registered for coded speed dialling Press Coded Dial then enter the two digit code assigned to the number you want to register in the group Coded Dial 1 You cannot enter numbers not registered for coded speed dialling ie with the numeric buttons 1 You can enter coded speed dialling codes that have a group registered under them D S S a a D 2 n Chapter 6 Speed Dialling 6 21 15 Stop 13 T If you enter the wrong code select that entry with V or A then press Clear 1 The number registered under the code you enter will be displayed or GROUP DIAL will be displayed if you select a group 1 You can enter multiple coded speed dialling codes Remember to press Coded Dial before each code Press Set to register your entries for the group NAME Press Set again Use the numeric buttons to enter a name for the group Ex Canon GROUP 2_ 1 1 The name can be up to 16 characters long including spaces 1 To enter letters numbers and symbols refer to the instructions on page 3 8 Press Set to register the name DATA EN
203. nsecsssesseseseateaesendistonestes 13 23 EW Copying Problems seeiis s Eei i neii 13 24 I Print Quality Problems ss scsccsssccsssstesesdestessosadendstesissensssenseseseasossseeasones 13 25 O Printing Problems i sis sditisaiseninudeteceaiass SNiER EE E aE ER 13 27 QM Colour Printing and Colour Copying Problems ccccceees 13 32 i General Problems sisirin a EEE E E 13 35 Ly Ea Power Cut Occurs sissi ri iE erie GEE REE EEE 13 36 Chapter 13 Troubleshooting 13 1 Da s e e a w Q 3 2 H If You Cannot Solve the Problem If you have a problem with your MultiPASS C70 and you cannot resolve it by referring to the information in this chapter contact your local authorised Canon dealer or the Canon help line Canon s support personnel are trained in the technical support of Canon s products and should be able to help you with your problem Ai Attempting to repair the MultiPASS C70 yourself may void the limited warranty Note J If the MultiPASS C70 makes strange noises emits smoke or strange smells unplug it immediately and contact your local authorised Canon dealer or the Canon help line Do not attempt to disassemble or repair the unit yourself CAUTION If you need to contact Canon directly make sure you have the following information d Product name MultiPASS C70 T Serial number The serial number is located on the label on the back of the unit HXXXXX CANON INC XXXX SERI
204. nter cover 6 Plug the unit back in Q fe fe o 2 Chapter 12 Maintenance 12 7 Cleaning the Scanner Components Periodically check and clean the scanner components as explained below When the power cord is disconnected the image memory is completely lee erased Therefore before you begin cleaning the MultiPASS C70 be sure to print any faxes stored in its memory pp 7 29 8 18 8 28 IN 1 Disconnect the power cord from the MultiPASS C70 2 Open the operation panel by gently pulling it towards you 12 8 Maintenance Chapter 12 3 Clean the components as described below SEPARATION GUIDE SCANNING GLASS WHITE SHEET SEPARATION ROLLER Separation roller Use a soft dry clean cloth to wipe the roller White sheet and scanning glass Use a clean soft lint free cloth moistened with water to clean the the white sheet and scanning glass then wipe them with a soft dry lint free cloth Separation guide Wipe with a dry soft cloth LA Q If the scanning components are dirty the documents you send or ioe print will also be dirty Q Be sure to use a soft cloth to avoid scratching the components Do not use tissue paper paper towels or similar materials for TETT cleaning they can stick to the components or generate static charges Q S i o c o Chapter 12 Maintenance 12 9 4 Clean the shad
205. ntry or to delete all information registered under a code Function 1 Press Function 01 2 Press Data Registration DATA REGSTRATION 0 Data Registration 08 o2 3 Use V or A to select TEL REGISTRATION CD C TEL REGISTRATION Set 4 Press Set 0 1 TOUCH SPD DIAL 08 o2 5 Use V or A to select CODED SPEED DIAL ca cS CODED SPEED DIAL Set 6 Press Set Cc gt Ex 00 2131 1250 0802 7 Use V or A to select the coded speed dialling code you want to O Cc dhani V A 8e Ex O1 3 3758 2110 T Ifa group is already registered under the coded speed dialling code you select GROUP DIAL appears 6 14 Speed Dialling Chapter 6 Set 8 Press Set gt TELEPHONE NUMBER Set 9 Press Set again Cc gt Ex EL 3 3758 2110_ To delete a number 11 10 Press Clear J Clear TEL Set 11 Press Set gt NAME QO The fax telephone number and name registered under that code are deleted Stop 12 Press Stop to return to standby mode Ex 15 00 FaxOnly To change the number or name 11 10 Press Clear TEL 11 Use the numeric buttons to enter the new fax telephone number Q If you only want to change the name ignore this step and go to the next step Ex TEL 3 3798 2111 The fax telephone number can be up to 120 digits long including spaces and pauses Chapter 6 Speed Dialling 6 15 D S S a a
206. number P is fixed to ten seconds Press Start Scan to begin scanning for sending 1 You will see a series of brief messages showing details on the transmission 1 To cancel the transmission once the unit has started to dial press Stop The LCD display then asks you to confirm cancelling Press to cancel sending gt p 7 14 Ai To take advantage of the speed dialling features of your unit register Note frequently used long distance numbers for one touch or coded speed dialling pp 6 3 6 11 9 6 Special Features Chapter 9 Switching Temporarily to Tone Dialling Hook Function pe _ x 4 a 06 CD gt Tone Many information services for banks airline reservations hotel reservations etc require tone dialling for their services If your unit is connected to a rotary pulse line follow this procedure to set the unit temporarily for tone dialling 1 Press Hook TEL 1 You can also lift the handset or the handset of the telephone connected to your unit instead of pressing Hook Q You can adjust the volume of the speaker gt LINE MONITOR VOL pp 14 5 14 6 2 D b 2 2 Use the numeric buttons to dial the telephone number of the information service O Ex ter 7654321 2 2 1 The unit connects using the pulses required by your telephone line 3 When the recorded message of the information service answers press Func
207. o the Automatic Document Feeder ADF until you hear a beep ao Ce ES me IS 68 T Chapter 4 Document Handling 4 7 1 The document is now ready for scanning The MultiPASS C70 automatically feeds the pages one by one from the bottom of the stack Ai Wait until all pages of your document have been scanned completely nee before starting a new job 4 8 Document Handling Chapter 4 Trouble With Multipage Documents If you have trouble feeding a multipage document do the following 1 Remove the stack and tap it on a flat surface to even the edges 2 Slant the stack so that its front edge is bevelled as shown below then insert the stack into the Automatic Document Feeder ADF Ai 1 You cannot feed a multipage document of thick media such as postcards or business cards Use manual feed instead to feed one N i sheet at a time gt p 4 11 1 Wait until all pages of your document have been scanned completely before starting a new job Chapter 4 Document Handling 4 9 i o E a e a dD 3 Adding Pages to the Document The MultiPASS C70 s Automatic Document Feeder ADF can hold up to 20 A4 20 letter or 10 legal size pages at a time when the document feed lever is set to automatic document feed If your document has more pages than this you can add pages while the MultiPASS C70 is
208. o unpack and assemble your MultiPASS C70 install the BJ cartridge and load paper 3 5 LY Choosing a Location for Your MultiPASS C70 ccccccseeseteteseeeeees 2 3 53 DIMENSIONS oi iecisis eneltie ovis E 2 4 Q Unpacking Your MultiPASS C70 scssscssssssssssssssssssssesssssusssssesseee 2 5 gz Lifting th MultiPASS C0 ices cas casustassscosniesstcovanany aaeeaasp dacsstaaniendnies 2 5 Do You Have Everyt hiho lssi e EuR ON REE 2 6 A Removing Shipping MaterialSessesconnrios aneri 2 9 Removing the Shipping Tape ccccccecccsesssseesessesenesescsseseseseenenens 2 9 Removing the Protective Plastic Piece ceesecceesetesesseeeeseseeens 2 9 e Removing the Protective Sheet and Styrofoam Sheet 004 2 10 C Assembling the MultiPASS C70 sssssssssssssseecssencscasssseesessanessenenees 2 12 e Attaching the Document SUPPOTt ccceeseseeteesteteteesteceseseeeenens 2 12 e Attaching the Extension and Document Tray cccssseseeeeeees 2 13 Attaching the Handset iis cssiiisiccinniciincneandediaineniien 2 14 TE Making Connections serierne ano E ETE 2 15 e Connecting the MultiPASS C70 to Your PC 2 15 Connecting the Telephone LIne iper aE 2 17 e Connecting the Handset or a Telephone sssrssrsngiisirissis 2 18 e Connecting an Extension Phone Answering Machine or Data MOd Otte essex ccorssvesdesesseres cco estasncsrauseanereeetncesneaeeccsnamerasheseesieess 2 19 Connecting the Power Gord i
209. oblems cannot solve 13 2 13 3 colour copying 13 32 to 13 34 colour printing 13 32 to 13 34 copying 13 24 13 32 to 13 34 documents that cause 4 3 faxing 13 18 to 13 22 general 13 35 multipage documents 4 9 paper feeding 13 16 13 17 print quality 13 25 13 26 printing 13 27 to 13 31 13 32 to 13 34 receiving 13 20 to 13 22 receiving in memory when 8 28 to 8 30 sending 13 18 13 19 telephone 13 23 PSTN setting 9 3 14 6 Pulse dialling setting 3 19 3 20 switching temporarily to tone dialling 9 7 9 8 PUT IN CARTRIDGE message 8 29 13 14 Q Quality adjusting for sending 7 3 to 7 7 print problems 13 25 13 26 Quantity document 4 2 print media 5 2 R R button 2 27 registering 9 2 to 9 4 R KEY SETTING setting 9 3 14 6 Receive Mode button 2 25 2 26 RECEIVED IN FILE message 13 15 I 12 Index Receiving ANS MACHINE MODE 8 3 8 16 8 17 cancelling 8 31 FAX ONLY MODE 8 3 8 5 to 8 7 Fax Tel Mode 8 3 8 8 to 8 13 in colour 8 25 8 26 inmemory 8 28 to 8 30 MANUAL MODE 8 3 8 14 8 15 methods 8 3 8 4 network FAX TEL switching 8 4 8 19 to 8 21 8 22 to 8 24 problems 13 20 to 13 22 reports 11 2 11 9 setting length of bottom margin for colour 10 7 10 8 to MultiPASS Desktop Manager 8 4 8 18 when PC is off 8 18 while copying 8 27 while printing 8 27 while registering 8 27 Reception RX reports 11 2 11 9 abbreviations used in 11 4 REC D IN MEMORY message 8 28 13 15 REDIAL INTERVAL
210. ofessional overhead presentations Do not use normal transparencies in the MultiPASS C70 as they do not absorb ink and may cause ink to run te c I a S a Assorted Paper Starter Kit If you would like to try some of the papers described above look for Canon s Starter Kit SK 102 It contains an assortment of five different paper types Chapter 5 Paper Handling 5 7 Photo Kit Canon s Photo Kit includes the BC 22e Photo BJ cartridge the SB 21 BJ cartridge container and 60 sheets of Canon High Resolution Paper HR 101 5 8 Paper Handling Chapter 5 Print Media Guidelines Follow these guidelines when selecting or loading print media m m E Attempting to print on damp curled wrinkled or torn print media can cause jams and poor print quality Use cut sheet paper only You cannot use multipart paper When using graph paper the lines may not match because the 4 mn line spacing of the printer is slightly less than that of graph paper If the print density of your page is very high light paper stock may curl slightly due to the large amount of ink If you need to print dense graphics try printing on heavier stock Do not use thicker paper than meets the specifications for this unit Printing with paper that is thick enough to come in contact with the print head nozzles may damage the BJ cartridge Many media have a right side for printing If you are using such a medium
211. olour Printing and Colour Copying Problems The MultiPASS C70 prints only in black You are printing from an application that supports colour printing but your output is black ink only The MultiPASS printer driver may not be selected 1 Make sure the MultiPASS is selected as the default printer in your application gt MultiPASS Suite Software User s Guide The BJ cartridge or a BJ tank may not be installed properly 0 Make sure the BJ cartridge and the BJ tank s are installed properly gt pp 2 31 12 26 The BJ cartridge print head may need cleaning D Clean the BJ cartridge print head gt p 12 17 The application you are using may not support colour printing D Make sure your application supports colour printing Colours are broken or uneven The print mode may be wrong 1 If you are printing high density graphics on plain paper set the Media Type to Coated Paper in the Paper tab of the printer driver gt MultiPASS Suite Software User s Guide If you are printing a thin line with a nonprimary colour your software may be telling the unit to place a colour every other dot with white in between 0 Choose cyan magenta yellow or black instead Colours print incorrectly The MultiPASS printer driver may not be selected 1 Make sure the MultiPASS is selected as the default printer in your application gt MultiPASS Suite Software User s Guide 13 32 Troubleshooting Chapter 13 The pr
212. om cover sheets You can use one of the predefined fax cover pages or create your own to attach to each PC fax you send Transmission speed Approximately six seconds per page with Error Correction Mode ECM for black amp white transmissions Point and click dialling The MultiPASS Desktop Manager enables you to select a fax number and dial directly from your PC s screen with a simple click of the mouse Based on Canon FAX Standard Chart No 1 standard mode 1 6 Introducing the MultiPASS C70 Chapter 1 Colour Copier Features Colour and black amp white copying The MultiPASS C70 can make full colour copies It can also make up to 99 black amp white including halftones copies of a document at a time at a rate of up to three copies per minute 360 dpi resolution The MultiPASS C70 copies documents using a high resolution of 360 dpi when making single copies Copy reduction The MultiPASS C70 can reduce copies to 90 80 or 70 of their original size This allows you to copy legal size documents onto A4 size paper for example Telephone Features Connection for the handset a telephone and other devices Connecting the handset or a telephone to the MultiPASS C70 lets you use it to make and receive normal telephone calls In addition you can connect an extension phone an answering machine or a data modem to the MultiPASS C70 Automatic dialling The MultiPASS C70 s three automatic dialling methods
213. one you can also connect an extension phone answering machine with or without a telephone or data modem to your MultiPASS C70 Connect the line from the extension phone answering machine or data modem to the jack marked on the side of the MultiPASS C70 b 3 gt Q D S o n MultiPASS C70 LA d If the connector does not fit the jack or does not seat properly contact your local authorised Canon dealer or the Canon help line or your telephone company to have the correct connector installed Q If you connect an answering machine to the MultiPASS C70 be sure to read Receiving With an Answering Machine ANS MACHINE MODE gt p 8 16 1 To connect an extension phone as well as an answering machine connect the extension phone to the answering machine and then connect the answering machine to the MultiPASS C70 If the answering machine does not have an extension phone output connect the extension phone to the jack marked f QI If you have a modem installed in your PC you can attach it to the MultiPASS C70 Connect the telephone line from the wall outlet to the jack marked L Then connect the line from the jack on the MultiPASS C70 to the jack on the modem If others access your PC frequently through the modem or if you use your modem extensively you may want a dedicated telephone line for your modem LI Be sure to connect the extension phone answering machine or data
214. one touch speed dialling coded speed dialling and group dialling can also be used to store telephone numbers for easy and efficient calling Point and click dialling The MultiPASS Desktop Manager enables you to select a telephone number and dial directly from your PC s screen with a simple click of the mouse User restriction The MultiPASS C70 can be locked to prevent unauthorised use of your unit to make telephone calls Chapter 1 Introducing the MultiPASS C70 1 7 o Ez D S o 5 3 9 amp MultiPASS C70 Colour Printer Features Canon Bubble Jet BJ printing and ink cartridges The MultiPASS C70 uses Canon s Bubble Jet BJ printing and ink cartridges to provide you with first rate crisp print and vibrant colours along with convenient and easy maintenance Excellent print quality and speed The MultiPASS C70 s high performance print head offers a precision of up to 720 dots per inch dpi horizontally by 360 vertically providing you with high resolution colour text and graphics all at exceptional speed up to two pages per minute for colour printing Impressive output on a variety of media The MultiPASS C70 can provide sharp black or vibrant colour printing on a wide variety of media including A4 letter and legal plain paper glossy paper envelopes transparencies back print film for display on a backlit panel banner paper and fabric sheets Convenient paper handling
215. ong Kong HT1 2151 000 V 1 0 CANON INC 1999 230V AUS PRINTED IN THAILAND
216. op Q The MultiPASS C70 asks you to confirm that you want to cancel CANCEL KYES NO YES K NO 2 Press to cancel receiving TX RX CANCELLED Ex x Le to E o oO o o IX RX NO 5003 T Receiving is not cancelled until you press Q If you change your mind and want to continue receiving press Chapter 8 Receiving Faxes 8 31 8 32 Receiving Faxes Chapter 8 Chapter 9 Special Features This chapter describes the special features of the MultiPASS C70 A Special Dialling seirena esin serr seriene EN EEE hacia ERRETES 9 2 Dialling Through a Switchboard sss sssirsssersseisesssrteresessnisssasssressesesensn 9 2 Registering the Access Type and the Outside Line Access Number Under the R Buttoni scsssesscscssssescosssassesessessesnsseraseede 9 2 e Dialling a Long Distance Number With Pauses 9 5 e Switching Temporarily to Tone Dialling 0 0 cecc cee eeeeeeteee 9 7 2 Confirming a Dial TONG sssseonnes inr cn ehiantiees 9 9 3 Oy Restricting Use of the MultiPASS C70 eiiescicctiesonssiciahiinuserans 9 10 e Enabling Restriction of the MultiPASS C70 cscscscsssesessssseees 9 10 9 o Cancelling Restriction of the MultiPASS C70 sssssssssssssssessesesese 9 12 GB Chapter 9 Special Features 9 1 Special Dialling This section explains special dialling features such as dialling through a switchboard dialling long distance numbers
217. oprietary MultiPASS Desktop Manager for Windows MultiPASS Printer Driver MultiPASS Fax Driver Scan Driver ScanGear for MultiPASS MultiPASS Service Windows NT only MultiPASS Status Monitor Send Fax Manager MultiPASS Toolbar 2 i 2 3 2 e oO o Q 7p Appendix A Specifications A 17 A 18 Specifications Appendix A Appendix B Handset This section describes the handset and how to attach it to the MultiPASS C70 LEV ATI AS Ct sci ota catsntasiencs cditoessateasied snsccasiasastacodsstaptassbasses tsdekegpeasasnstarepstbeasaniees B 2 Package CONteN Ssi run esie s eieiei EESE R REENE eas B 2 e Attaching the Handset to Your MultiPASS C70 ccccceseeeeees B 3 Maintaining Your Handsets neist esiis e keer ke aE EE B 9 Appendix B Handset B 1 Handset Package Contents Make sure your package includes the following handset items If anything is damaged or missing notify your Canon dealer immediately CRADLE SUPPORT HANDSET Not used for your MultiPASS C70 B 2 Handset Appendix B Attaching the Handset to Your MultiPASS C70 Follow these steps to attach the handset to your MultiPASS C70 1 Use two of the screws to attach the handset cradle to the cradle support 1 Push the screws in with your finger If you cannot push the screws in with your finger screw them in with a phillips screwdriver Make sure the screws are inse
218. ore it in the SB 21 BJ cartridge container provided with your unit Hold the BJ cartridge by its sides only Do not touch the print head the sharp edges around the print head the silver plate on the bottom of the BJ cartridge or the silver metal or circuit area on its side 3 gt Q ke o n MultiPASS C70 CAUTION HOLD HERE PRINT HEAD DO NOT TOUCH 1 Press on the release tab and open the cover Chapter 2 Setting Up Your MultiPASS C70 2 37 2 Insert the BJ cartridge in its container with the BJ cartridge s label facing forward and the print head down 2 38 Setting Up Your MultiPASS C70 Chapter 2 Loading Paper This section describes how to load plain paper in the multi purpose tray so that you can begin using your MultiPASS C70 For complete details on print media specifications and other guidelines for selecting and loading print media refer to Chapter 5 Paper Handling Paper Guidelines 1 To avoid paper jams and poor print quality never try to print on damp curled wrinkled or torn paper 3 gt Q DoD S o n MultiPASS C70 1 Store paper and other media flat and leave it in its wrapper until you are ready to use it Store unused paper from opened packs in the original packing in a cool dry location L Store paper at 18 24 C 40 60 relative humidity 1 Let the paper run out before you refill the multi purpose tray Avoid mixi
219. orised Canon dealer For best results use a cable that is no longer than 2 metres 1 Important Save your sales receipt for proof of purchase in case your unit requires warranty service 2 8 Setting Up Your MultiPASS C70 Chapter 2 Removing Shipping Materials In order to protect your MultiPASS C70 during shipping the unit has been packed with protective materials that you must remove before you can use it Keep all shipping materials in case you need to move or transport the unit in the future Removing the Shipping Tape Remove all shipping tape from the MultiPASS C70 Removing the Protective Plastic Piece Remove the shipping tape and protective plastic piece from the multi purpose tray Chapter 2 Setting Up Your MultiPASS C70 2 9 J 3 gt 2 e Q 72 MultiPASS C70 Removing the Protective Sheet and Styrofoam Sheet 1 Remove the protective sheet covering the operation panel 2 Use both hands to grip the operation panel and gently pull it towards you until it opens partially 2 10 Setting Up Your MultiPASS C70 Chapter 2 3 Remove the soft styrofoam sheet from the unit s Automatic Document Feeder ADF MultiPASS C70 b 3 gt 25 to Q 72 Do not attempt to remove the small white piece of plastic that is attached with a screw to the inside of the operation panel Only CAUTION remove
220. otective cap An opened BJ cartridge or BJ tank that is not installed in the MultiPASS C70 or the BJ cartridge container may leak and the print head may dry out Also if you do not tape the BJ cartridge to the side of the unit ink may spill into the unit Note Q If you no longer have the shipping carton your MultiPASS C70 came in pack the unit in a suitably sized sturdy cardboard box using bubble wrap or other suitable packing materials If you use foam peanuts be sure to wrap the unit in plastic first to prevent the packing materials from entering any openings on the unit Q S i oO c o iJ Chapter 12 Maintenance 12 33 12 34 Maintenance Chapter 12 Chapter 13 Troubleshooting If your MultiPASS C70 is not operating properly use the information and suggestions in this chapter to try and resolve the problem LV If You Cannot Solve the Problem cccscccceccceseseseeteneseesesneteneneeees 13 2 EN Clearing Jams ieies ror e srn esasa Enar ES E ENE SEEE hase 13 4 e Jams in the Automatic Document Feeder ADF s s sssssseesssessesee 13 4 Jams in the Multi Purpose Tray irni aie ne 13 6 LEV ECD Messages aoin EERE E EE 13 7 Ei Paper Feeding Problems rsin e sees 13 16 G Faing Problems anr EEEE EREE 13 18 Sending Problems riena a ri a e e e EA 13 18 Receiving Problems decinneiniviiacdiennuniraanaaniins 13 20 EV Telephone ProDlenms x50 s sscvecessesessesvesssectetassessssi
221. p 4 5 D Make sure the operation panel is closed The one touch speed dialling button or coded speed dialling code you entered may not be registered for the feature you want to use Q Check the one touch speed dialling button or coded speed dialling code and make sure it is registered correctly gt Chapter 6 Speed Dialling You dialled or have been provided with an incorrect number D Dial the number again or check that you have the correct number The other party s fax machine may be out of paper Q Call the other party and ask them to make sure paper is loaded in their fax machine You may have sent a document in colour to a fax machine that does not support colour faxing 0 Your MultiPASS C70 can only send in colour to other fax machines that have colour faxing capability If the other party s fax machine does not support colour faxing try sending again in black amp white gt p 7 3 13 18 Troubleshooting Chapter 13 There may be other documents being sent from memory LY Allow time for the current document to finish sending An error may have occurred during sending D Print the Activity Report and check for an error gt p 11 5 D E fe a 2 2 3 o n The telephone line may not be working properly D Make sure there is a dial tone when you lift the handset or the handset of the telephone or extension phone If not contact your local telephone company The receiving
222. p 8 18 The MultiPASS Desktop Manager allows you to receive faxes directly to your PC where they are stored as scanned images 1 Network FAX TEL Switching gt pp 8 19 8 22 Use this mode if you have subscribed to the Telstra FaxStream DUET service Australia or the Telecom N Z FaxAbility service New Zealand These services allow you to have one telephone line with two numbers one for fax and one for telephone Once you have decided which mode you want set the mode as described in this chapter You can change the mode at any time 8 4 Receiving Faxes Chapter 8 Receiving Faxes Automatically FAX ONLY MODE When the MultiPASS C70 is set up for a dedicated line set FAX ONLY MODE to automatically receive documents whenever a call comes over the fax line Setting FAX ONLY MODE Your MultiPASS C70 is factory set to FAX ONLY MODE If you have not changed the receive mode to Fax Tel Mode or NET SWITCH simply follow this procedure Receive Mode 1 Press Receive Mode to select FAX ONLY MODE O FAX ONLY MODE Q After a few seconds the LCD display changes to the following display Ex 15 00 FaxOnly If you have previously set FAX TEL AUTO SW or NET SWITCH in the RX MODE setting of the RX SETTINGS menu you will have to change the mode back to FAX ONLY MODE Follow this procedure z a 01 2 Press Data Registration C2 Data Registration DATA REGSTRATION Set 3 Press Set lt gt
223. phics the ink on the page may be damp due to the print density Leave the page in the output tray for 30 to 60 seconds to allow the ink to dry Then remove the page being careful not to touch the document tray or extension Should you dirty the document tray or extension when removing the page wipe them clean with a clean soft lint free cloth moistened with water or diluted dishwashing detergent solution 1 The capacity of the paper output tray is 50 sheets of paper To reduce paper jams remove paper from the output tray before the count reaches 50 C1 If paper curls after printing remove it immediately otherwise paper jams may occur 1 The platen a roller inside the unit may become inked if you print data beyond the width of the page If this happens clean the platen with a soft cloth p 12 6 Chapter 5 Paper Handling 5 13 te c I a a 1 Depending on the density of your printed pages the ink may need time to dry Within two or three seconds the ink becomes smudge resistant After drying for several minutes the ink becomes water resistant 1 Do not try to load paper into the multi purpose tray beyond the paper limit mark gt or beyond the tabs on the multi purpose tray Stacking too much paper may cause paper feeding or printing problems 1 Make sure there are no gaps between the stack of paper and the paper guide or the right side of the multi purpose tray NO
224. phone and answering machine extension phone or data modem L Landscape orientation Refers to printing across the length of the page as opposed to portrait orientation which is printing across the width of the page Line feed A printer function that advances the paper one line M Manual receiving A method of receiving faxes in which you answer all incoming calls using the handset a telephone or an extension phone Glossary Manual redialling When you use regular dialling you can redial a number manually by simply pressing the C Redial Pause button on the operation panel The last number dialled with the numeric buttons is the number redialled Glossary Memory broadcast Allows you to send a scanned fax to as many as 113 destinations using a combination of one touch speed dialling coded speed dialling and regular dialling Memory sending Scans a document into memory before the MultiPASS C70 dials the number s and sends it This method allows you to retrieve your original document immediately after scanning Modem A device that converts MOdulates digital data for transmission over telephone lines At the receiving end this device converts the modulated data DEModulates to digital format that the PC understands MultiPASS Desktop Manager for Windows software Canon s exclusive software package that allows you to use the MultiPASS C70 with your Windows software applications
225. print media 5 9 specialty papers 5 18 5 19 H Handset 2 6 2 7 2 23 2 24 See also Appendix B Handset cradle 2 6 2 7 See also Appendix B Handset connecting 2 18 manual sending via 7 9 7 12 7 13 HANG UP PHONE message 13 12 Hardware requirements for MultiPASS Desktop Manager 1 10 High gloss film 5 2 5 7 5 18 HIGH RES PAPER setting 10 6 14 14 High resolution paper 5 2 5 6 cleaning sheet 5 22 to 5 24 printing 5 21 to 5 24 Holder cartridge 2 24 Hook button 2 25 2 26 HOOKING setting 9 3 9 4 14 6 HORIZ amp VERTICAL setting 14 14 Index 7 I INCOMING RING setting 14 12 INSIDE IMAGE setting 14 6 INSTALL BC 21e message 8 29 13 12 INSTALL BC21e 20 message 8 29 13 12 13 13 Installing BJ cartridge 2 29 to 2 36 J Jack answering machine 2 19 2 24 data modem 2 19 2 24 extension phone 2 19 2 24 handset 2 18 2 24 telephone 2 18 2 24 telephone line 2 17 2 24 Jams Automatic Document Feeder ADF 13 4 13 5 clearing 13 4 to 13 6 multi purpose tray 13 6 K KEYPAD VOLUME setting 14 6 Kit assorted paper starter 5 7 photo 5 8 L LCD display 2 25 LCD messages See Messages Letter mode changing to 3 9 lowercase 3 8 3 9 3 10 uppercase 3 8 3 9 3 10 Letters entering 3 8 3 9 3 10 Lever document feed 2 25 4 5 paper thickness 2 24 5 10 to 5 12 Lifting MultiPASS C70 2 5 12 3 Light Alarm 2 25 2 26 Function 2 27 2 28 3 4 Line See Telephone line LINE IN USE message 13 13 LI
226. r 2 Main Components of the MultiPASS C70 Before using your MultiPASS C70 take a few moments to look over the unit and become familiar with its components Front View DOCUMENT SUPPORT Holds documents as they feed into the Automatic Document Feeder ADF PAPER REST Supports print media stacked in the multi purpose tray MULTI PURPOSE TRAY Holds plain paper and other print media AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER ADF AND PRINTER COVER Holds documents to be scanned PAPER GUIDE ee Keeps print media in position Adjust to the width of the print media wi DOCUMENT GUIDES Keep the document in position when being i Z oo scanned Adjust to the QA width of the document gt oe ce p OPERATION PANEL Use to control the MultiPASS C70 gt p 2 25 EXTENSION gt Holds scanned documents as they exit the MultiPASS C70 DOCUMENT TRAY Holds scanned documents as they exit the MultiPASS C70 HANDSET OUTPUT TRAY Holds printed pages as they exit the MultiPASS C70 PAPER OUTPUT GUIDES Hold high resolution paper when using the BC 22e Photo BJ cartridge Also hold banner paper OUTPUT TRAY EXTENSION Holds printed pages as they exit the MultiPASS C70 Chapter 2 Setting Up Your MultiPASS C70 2 23 3 gt 2 e Q 72 MultiPASS C70 Back View PARALLEL INTERFACE PORT HANDSET TELEPHONE JACK ra EXTENSIO
227. r a ae telephone with an answering machine to your unit p 2 19 Follow the procedure below to set the receive mode to ANS MACHINE MODE Receive Mode 1 Press Receive Mode to select ANS MACHINE MODE O ANS MACHINE MODE Q After a few seconds the LCD display changes to the following display Ex 15 00 AnsMode 8 16 Receiving Faxes Chapter 8 Using the MultiPASS C70 With an Answering Machine Follow these guidelines when using the MultiPASS C70 with an answering machine 1 Set the answering machine to answer on the first or second ring D When recording the outgoing message on the answering machine e Leave a four second pause at the beginning of the message e The entire message including the four second pause must be no longer than 15 seconds n x Le to gt o oO o o e In the message tell your callers how to send a fax For example Hello I can t answer the phone right now but please leave a message after the beep I ll return your call as soon as possible If you would like to send a fax press the start button on your fax machine after you leave your message Thank you Chapter 8 Receiving Faxes 8 17 Receiving Faxes to the MultiPASS Desktop Manager When your PC is on you can set the MultiPASS Desktop Manager to automatically upload incoming faxes from the MultiPASS C70 to your PC gt MultiPASS Suite Software User s Guide When Your PC
228. r to create illusions of other colours I IEEE 1284 IEFE 1284 is the new specification standard for computer to peripheral bi directional parallel interface communications The new standard was adopted by IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers Inc in 1993 Some of the benefits it provides are bi directional communication between PCs and peripheral devices a higher speed data transfer rate and protection against data loss due to noise interference Ink Jet printer A nonimpact printer that ejects ink onto paper to form characters The MultiPASS C70 has a special type of ink jet printer built in called a Bubble Jet printer Ink saver You can enable or disable economy printing ink saving feature for black amp white printing By enabling the ECONOMY PRT setting ink consumption can be decreased resulting in a longer effective cartridge life You set ECONOMY PRT in the PRINTER SETTINGS menu G 6 Glossary Intensity The amount of colour More intense or more saturated colours are more pure Less intense or less saturated colours are less vivid Interface port The MultiPASS C70 comes with one IEEE 1284 bi directional parallel interface port located on the back of the unit You attach the cable that connects your PC and the MultiPASS C70 to this port J Jack The telephone receptacles on your wall or in your MultiPASS C70 used to connect the MultiPASS C70 to the telephone line handset or tele
229. ration of this equipment on the same line as telephone or other equipment with audible warning devices or automatic ring detectors will give rise to bell tinkle or noise and may cause false tripping of the ring detector Should such problems occur the user is not to contact Telecom faults service 3 Should this equipment become physically damaged disconnect immediately from the Telecom connection and power source and contact your nearest service agent 4 To relocate this equipment please 1 Disconnect the equipment from the Telecom connection 2 Disconnect the equipment from the power source 3 Reconnect the equipment to the power source 4 Reconnect the equipment to the Telecom connection iv Preface If the supply cord of this equipment is damaged it must be replaced by the special cord Parts No HH2 1910 Not all standard telephones will respond to incoming ringing when connected to the extension socket This device may be subject to bell tinkle or mistakenly enter receive mode when calls are made from another device on the same line If this occurs the problem should not be referred to the Telecom Faults service Please note when you connect an extension phone to this device if you use an extension phone which has features such as last number redial redial memory numbers may be lost Preface Contents Chapter 1 Introducing the MultiPASS C70 We COME nsun e e iaia aiani 1 2 Main Features of
230. rchase Chapter 1 Introducing the MultiPASS C70 1 11 o Ez D S o 5 3 9 amp MultiPASS C70 Special Print Media You can use plain paper with the MultiPASS C70 for excellent colour and black amp white printing but Canon has also developed a wide range of print media to extend your printing capabilities Chapter 5 Paper Handling gives details on this print media as well as special instructions for loading some of this media into your MultiPASS C70 If you plan to use a print medium other than those made by Canon be sure to test it in your MultiPASS C70 before ordering it in bulk If you have any questions about whether a particular medium is suitable for your MultiPASS C70 please contact your local authorised Canon dealer or the Canon help line N Note 1 12 Introducing the MultiPASS C70 Chapter 1 Using Your Documentation Your MultiPASS C70 includes the following documentation to help you learn how to use your unit quickly and easily o Ez D S o 5 3 9 amp MultiPASS C70 1 User s Guide this guide This guide provides detailed information on how to set up operate maintain and troubleshoot your MultiPASS C70 d MultiPASS Suite Software User s Guide This guide describes how to use your MultiPASS C70 to fax print and scan from within your PC s Windows environment Refer to this guide whenever you need information about faxing printing or scanning
231. re User s Guide A Note Setting the MultiPASS C70 for Network Switch Follow the procedure below to set the receive mode to NET SWITCH Function 1 Press Function 01 2 Press Data Registration DATA REGSTRATION Data Registration Set 3 Press Set Cad USER SETTINGS 08 2 4 Use V or A to select RX SETTINGS ca Cc RX SETTINGS 8 22 Receiving Faxes Chapter 8 Set 5 Press Set ECM RX 0 08 o2 6 Use V or A to select RX MODE ca cS RX MODE Set 7 Press Set CD Ex FAX ONLY MODE 08 o2 8 Use V or A to select NET SWITCH ca Cc ET SWITCH lt gt Set 9 Press Set INCOMING RING Stop 10 Press Stop to return to standby mode Ex 15 00 NET SW Chapter 8 Receiving Faxes 8 23 x Le to gt o 2 o Network Switch System Operation The procedure for using the network switch system is almost the same as when using the MultiPASS C70 over a normal telephone line When you receive calls however the unit will respond slightly differently as described below When you hear the telephone call ring pattern Pick up the handset and talk normally If you hear a slow beep it means the call is from a fax machine trying to send a document Press the Start Scan button to receive the document If you do not pick up the handset the unit continues to ring until the other party hangs up If an answering machine i
232. rements 5 2 Error RX Report 11 2 11 9 Error TX Report 11 2 11 6 Extension 2 6 2 7 2 23 attaching 2 13 2 14 output tray 2 23 Extension phone connecting 2 19 jack 2 19 2 24 F F T RING TIME 8 10 8 11 setting 8 12 Fabric sheets 5 2 5 7 5 18 printing 5 24 5 25 Fax colour features 1 4 1 5 definition 1 15 name 3 15 to 3 17 number 3 15 to 3 17 PC colour features 1 6 PC features 1 6 plain paper features 1 4 1 5 FAX ONLY MODE 8 3 setting 8 5 to 8 7 14 12 FAX TEL AUTO SW setting 8 9 14 12 Fax Tel Mode 8 3 setting 8 8 8 9 setting up 8 10 to 8 13 I 6 Index Faxing document requirements 4 2 4 3 problems 13 18 to 13 22 Features colour copier 1 7 colour fax 1 4 1 5 colour PC fax 1 6 colour printer 1 8 colour scanner 1 9 copier 1 7 fax 1 4 1 5 main 1 3 to 1 9 PC fax 1 6 plain paper fax 1 4 1 5 printer 1 8 scanner 1 9 telephone 1 7 Film back print 5 2 5 7 5 18 5 19 5 20 high gloss 5 2 5 7 5 18 transparencies 5 2 5 7 5 18 Function button 2 27 2 28 3 4 light 2 27 2 28 3 4 G Glossy photo paper 5 2 5 6 5 18 Group Dial List 6 29 6 30 11 3 Group dialling 6 2 7 8 changing entry 6 23 creating groups 6 19 to 6 23 deleting entry 6 23 list 6 29 6 30 11 3 using 6 24 6 25 Guide document 2 23 paper 2 23 paper output 2 23 5 21 5 22 Guidelines BJ cartridge 2 29 2 30 entering information via operation panel 3 3 to 3 11 loading paper 5 13 5 14 MultiPASS C70 12 2 12 3 paper 2 39
233. res UHQ Image Processing System The MultiPASS C70 uses Canon s Ultra High Quality UHQ Image Processing System to provide enhanced definition in faxed photos Error Correction Mode ECM Using the MultiPASS C70 s Error Correction Mode ECM reduces transmission errors when sending faxes to or receiving faxes from other fax machines that also have ECM capability Automatic switching between fax and voice calls The MultiPASS C70 can automatically distinguish between fax calls and normal telephone calls so that you can receive both through a single telephone line Colour faxing to and from fax machines that support colour faxing You can send or receive colour faxes from fax machines that have colour faxing capability Answering machine connection By connecting an answering machine to the MultiPASS C70 not only can you receive messages on your answering machine but you can also receive faxes automatically Transmission speed The MultiPASS C70 uses G3 data encoding methods that increase transmission speed to approximately six seconds per page for black amp white transmissions Memory sending receiving The MultiPASS C70 can store up to 42 fax pages either received or to be sent in its built in memory and can receive faxes while printing or when your PC is turned off Based on Canon FAX Standard Chart No 1 standard mode 1 4 Introducing the MultiPASS C70 Chapter 1 Reduced size printing When rece
234. ring Information in the MultiPASS C70 Chapter 3 To enter symbols 1 Press repeatedly until the symbol you want appears 06 2 If you want to enter another symbol press gt to move the cursor to CD gt the right then press repeatedly until the symbol you want Tonel appears Correcting a Mistake If you make a mistake while entering a name you can correct it as follows 04 06 1 Use lt or gt to move the cursor under the incorrect character lt 0 gt Memory Reference Tonel Ex CANEN A So SiE oO Ew 50 a 25 TS Lo 2 Ss 2 Use the numeric buttons to enter the correct character over the incorrect character Ex Set 3 When you have finished making corrections press Set to register C D gt your new entry LA Alternatively you can press the Clear button to delete the whole entry Note Chapter 3 Registering Information in the MultiPASS C70 3 11 Registering Sender Information This section explains the sender information and gives details on registering this information in your MultiPASS C70 What is Sender Information When you receive a fax you may notice that the name of the person or company who sent you the fax their fax telephone number and the date and time of transmission will be printed in small type at the top of each page This information is called the Sender information or the Transmit Terminal Identification TTI Similarly you can register
235. rmation on product availability Plain Paper The MultiPASS C70 supports paper sizes of A4 letter and legal in portrait orientation You can use regular copier paper cotton bond paper and typical letterhead Your unit does not require special ink jet paper and produces letter quality print on most plain bond paper including cotton bond and photocopy paper Always use paper without curls folds staples or damaged edges Copier paper has a preferred side for printing Look at the label on the package to see which side to print on Envelopes The MultiPASS C70 can print on European DL envelopes and U S Commercial No 10 envelopes The following envelopes are not recommended because they may cause jams or smears resulting in damage to your unit 1 Envelopes with windows holes perforations cutouts and double flaps te c I a a 1 Envelopes made with special coated paper or deeply embossed paper 1 Envelopes using peel off sealing strips 1 Envelopes in which letters have been enclosed Chapter 5 Paper Handling 5 5 You may be able to stack envelopes of other sizes in the multi purpose tray However Canon cannot guarantee consistent performance on envelope sizes other than European DL or U S Commercial No 10 A Note Glossy Photo Paper Canon Glossy Photo Paper GP 201 is a high gloss thick paper that produces the look and feel of a photograph Use this paper with the op
236. rnational ENERGY STAR Office Equipment Program is an international program that promotes energy saving through the use of computers and other office equipment The program backs the development and dissemination of products with functions that effectively reduce energy consumption It is an open system in which business proprietors can participate voluntarily The targeted products are office equipment such as computers displays printers facsimiles and copiers Their standards and logos are uniform among participating nations Preface iii For Your Safety Australia Only To ensure safe operation the three pin plug supplied must be inserted only into a standard three pin power point which is effectively earthed through the normal household wiring Extension cords used with the equipment must be three core and be correctly wired to provide connection to earth Wrongly wired extension cords are a major cause of fatalities The power point shall be located near the equipment and shall be easily accessible The fact that the equipment operates satisfactorily does not imply that the power point is earthed and the installation is completely safe For your safety if in any doubt about the effective earthing of the power point consult a qualified electrician Caution New Zealand Only 1 This equipment may not necessarily provide for the effective hand over of a call to or from a telephone connected to the same line 2 The ope
237. roducing the MultiPASS C70 Chapter 1 Make sure the total amperage used by all devices plugged into the wall outlet does not exceed the ampere rating of the outlet s circuit breaker Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord and do not locate the unit where the cord will be walked on Make sure the cord is not knotted or kinked If you use an extension cord with the MultiPASS C70 make sure that the total of the ampere ratings on the products plugged into the extension cord does not exceed the extension cord ampere rating Also make sure that the total ampere rating of all products plugged into the wall outlet does not exceed the current amperage of the circuit breaker Do not push objects of any kind into the slots or openings on the cabinet as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts This could result in fire or electric shock Do not allow small objects such as pins paper clips or staples to fall into the MultiPASS C70 If something does fall into it unplug the unit immediately and contact your local authorised Canon dealer or the Canon help line To avoid spillage in or around the unit do not eat or drink near the unit If you spill liquid or if any substance falls into the unit immediately unplug the unit and contact your local authorised Canon dealer or the Canon help line Always unplug the MultiPASS C70 before moving or cleaning it Whenever you unplug the MultiPASS C70 wait at least five seco
238. rted all the way in and are not protruding IN Note Appendix B Handset B 3 2 Before attaching the cradle support to the MultiPASS C70 you need to remove the BJ cartridge from the unit T To remove the cartridge follow steps 1 to 5 on pages 12 19 to 12 22 Q Store the BJ cartridge in the SB 21 BJ cartridge container provided with your MultiPASS C70 3 Unplug the power cord from the power cord connector on the back of the MultiPASS C70 4 Turn the MultiPASS C70 on its side and while supporting the unit use a screwdriver to remove the two covers on the bottom of the unit e aS V LON B 4 Handset Appendix B 5 Support the unit and use the remaining two screws to attach the cradle support to the unit 1 Push the screws in with your finger LY Make sure you support the MultiPASS C70 when inserting the screws IN Note D If you cannot push the screws in with your finger screw them in with a phillips screwdriver Make sure the screws are inserted all the way in and are not protruding Appendix B Handset B 5 6 Return the MultiPASS C70 to its upright position and place the handset in its cradle Ai Make sure the cradle support rests on the table top along with the MultiPASS C70 Note 7 Connect the line from the handset to the jack marked on the side of th
239. s connected it takes over the call When you hear the fax call ring pattern After the unit rings it receives the document automatically If you want to receive a document without ring Make sure that the INCOMING RING setting is set to OFF gt pp 14 11 14 12 8 24 Receiving Faxes Chapter 8 Receiving in Colour Function hie XN LZ y r 01 a Data Registration Your MultiPASS C70 has been factory set to receive faxes in colour from fax machines with colour capability When receiving a fax your MultiPASS C70 detects if the incoming fax is a colour or black amp white transaction and prints the fax accordingly For automatic printing of received colour faxes you need to have the BC 21e Colour BJ cartridge installed in your unit If you have the BX 20 Black or the optional BC 22e Photo BJ cartridge installed the MultiPASS C70 will receive the colour fax in memory Once received the LCD display will alternate the following messages 2 O x y Le to gt o oO o co REC D IN MEMORY INSTALL BC 2le Replace the BX 20 Black or the optional BC 22e Photo BJ cartridge with the BC 21e Colour BJ cartridge gt p 12 19 The unit then prints automatically the colour fax stored in memory If you do not have a BC 21e Colour BJ cartridge available and want to print the colour fax with another BJ cartridge refer to Printing a Document in Memory gt p 7 29 Setting Colour R
240. s report will print instead 14 8 Summary of Settings Chapter 14 TX Transmission Settings Accessing the TX Settings Menu ATS 01 2 Press Data Registration DATA REGSTRATION 7 jo2 i Data Registration gt E E i Set 3 Press Set co USER SETTINGS 08 o2 4 Use V or A to select TX SETTINGS ca Cc TX SETTINGS lt gt Set 5 Press Set ECM TX 6 Refer to the table on the following page and follow these guidelines to select and register settings T Use V or A to move through the settings QO To register a setting or access sub settings press Set 1 To return to a previous level press Data Registration In order for your settings to be registered be sure to press Set after ae making a selection or entering information Stop 7 When you have finished changing settings press Stop to return to standby mode Ex 15 00 FaxOnly Chapter 14 Summary of Settings 14 9 TX Settings Menu Name Description Settings ECM TX Enable disable Error Correction Mode ECM during ON OFF transmission MID PAUSE SET Select the length of the pause entered between numbers 2 SEC with the C Redial Pause button 1 to 15 AUTO REDIAL Select whether the MultiPASS C70 redials if the other ON OFF party s line is busy on the first attempt REDIAL TIMES Select the number of redial attempts 2 TIMES 1 to 2 REDIAL INT
241. sessiessecsssssessecssssseetscsescsstssseansnenssevincnsenses 11 6 Error TX Report cccecccececcscseesesescscsesesesescscsesesesescecsesesesescscsesesesesesees 11 6 UX REPOT ermer i E E vetoes as ceotest E E 11 6 TX Report With First Page seereis ii esaa E A 11 7 A Multi Transaction TX RX Report cece eee arsina 11 8 EV Reception RX Reports sss ccssessssssssveiessessassasatasaceossesecensasncsessesesssavsstines 11 9 Error RX Report siscscsinndiiessnindntininsnnendiuiiadiiacn 11 9 RA Repoti sess cesssosssasidentastgaeseasanepeseatsntaaepeaesneeaassbeptedisdacapcipessovensinsiess 11 9 LE Memory Clear Reportin eii ei ue 11 10 o 2 Ly a ke G o 2 2 oc Chapter 11 Reports and Lists 11 1 Summary of Lists and Reports Shown below are the lists and reports that can be printed from your MultiPASS C70 Most of the lists and reports can be found in this section However you may also need to refer to other chapters for details on some of them Activity Report gt p 11 5 This report prints a list of the previous 20 transactions on your unit Transmission TX Reports T Error TX Report gt p 11 6 This report prints every time an error occurs during sending 1 TX Report gt p 11 6 This report can be printed every time a document is sent 1 TX Report With First Page gt p 11 7 This report can be printed as a reminder of the contents of a black amp white document sent us
242. setting 7 21 14 10 REDIAL TIMES setting 7 21 14 10 Redialling See Automatic redialling and Manual redialling REDUCE DIMENSION setting 14 14 Registering access type 9 2 to 9 4 coded speed dialling 6 11 to 6 13 groups 6 19 to 6 23 information in MultiPASS C70 3 2 methods of 3 2 one touch speed dialling 6 3 to 6 5 outside line access number 9 2 to 9 4 R button 9 2 to 9 4 sender information 3 12 to 3 17 while receiving 8 27 Regular dialling 7 8 REMOTE RX setting 14 12 Replacing BJ cartridge 12 19 to 12 25 BJ tank 12 26 to 12 31 Report abbreviations used 11 4 Activity 11 2 11 5 button 2 27 2 28 3 18 6 26 6 29 11 5 Error RX 11 2 11 9 Error TX 11 2 11 6 Memory Clear 11 2 11 10 13 36 Multi TX RX 11 2 11 8 reception 11 2 11 9 RX 11 2 11 9 summary 11 2 transmission 11 2 11 6 11 7 TX 11 2 11 6 11 7 TX with first page 11 2 11 7 REPORT SETTINGS menu 3 5 14 3 14 7 14 8 Resolution button 2 25 2 26 7 4 7 5 10 3 sending 7 4 7 5 setting for black amp white sending 7 4 7 5 Index I 13 setting for colour sending 7 5 Restriction calling 9 10 9 11 cancelling calling 9 12 9 13 cancelling sending 9 12 9 13 sending 9 10 9 11 Resume button 2 27 2 28 RING START TIME 8 10 8 11 setting 8 12 Rollers cleaning 5 22 to 5 24 12 11 ROTARY PULSE setting 3 20 14 6 RX definition 1 16 RX CALL LEVEL setting 14 6 RX MODE setting 8 6 8 8 14 12 RX REDUCTION setting 14 14 RX Report 11 2 11 9 RX RE
243. settings and speed dialling settings There are two methods of adjusting these settings Method 1 Using the MultiPASS C70 operation panel You can adjust settings directly via the operation panel of the MultiPASS C70 Detailed instructions are described in this guide Adjusting settings through the operation panel is convenient when you do not have your MultiPASS C70 connected to a PC Method 2 Using the MultiPASS Desktop Manager You can adjust settings using the MultiPASS Desktop Manager software included with your MultiPASS C70 For detailed instructions refer to the MultiPASS Suite Software User s Guide Before adjusting any settings decide whether you prefer to make changes from the operation panel or from the MultiPASS Desktop Manager Using both the operation panel and the MultiPASS Desktop Manager may cause confusion Changes made to settings through the operation panel will not be displayed in the MultiPASS Desktop Manager and changes made in the MultiPASS Desktop Manager will override any corresponding settings made through the operation panel If your MultiPASS C70 is connected to a PC we recommend using the MultiPASS Desktop Manager to adjust any settings N Note 3 2 Registering Information in the MultiPASS C70 Chapter 3 Guidelines for Entering Information Via the Operation Panel The following section provides a brief overview of how to use the buttons on the operation panel to access menus make s
244. settings using the MultiPASS Desktop Manager software included with your MultiPASS C70 For detailed instructions refer to the MultiPASS Suite Software User s Guide Before adjusting any settings decide whether you prefer to make changes from the operation panel or from the MultiPASS Desktop Manager Using both the operation panel and the MultiPASS Desktop Manager may cause confusion Changes made to settings through the operation panel will not be displayed in the MultiPASS Desktop Manager and changes made in the MultiPASS Desktop Manager will override any corresponding settings made through the operation panel If your MultiPASS C70 is connected to a PC we recommend using the MultiPASS Desktop Manager to adjust any settings iN Note 14 2 Summary of Settings Chapter 14 Understanding the Menu System IN Note The MultiPASS C70 menu system allows you to customise the way your unit operates The menu system consists of six menus each containing settings that control different functions of your MultiPASS C70 This chapter outlines the various menus and shows you how to use them 1 The factory default settings in the following tables are shown in bold type 0 If your MultiPASS C70 is connected to a PC we recommend you use the MultiPASS Desktop Manager to adjust any settings gt MultiPASS Suite Software User s Guide Summary of Menus Here is a summary of the menus A menu system accessed with t
245. sicoindiseeainimndiaiinsiaes 2 20 I Main Components of the MultiPASS C70 cccccessesesteteeseeneteeeees 2 23 Front VIEW wisicsis senna nenna cident NEN E NEEE SNEEN SERN ENNES 2 23 Back VIEW sseacasecensssessexsssvasnssahessdstashensesdion tagsostdansngcestarspaniettisers eaestaees 2 24 INSide VIEW ved disicinddivaninieraad iit taranadene hie 2 24 E FHAMOSCt E shcseptaceessaadenedassioenseseaannss 2 24 Chapter 2 Setting Up Your MultiPASS C70 2 1 Operation Panel oi s escsssscissacisessssscatecsesssesaeestestestecadensdsenestasssscbetburaaieses 2 25 Special Function Buttons nirsistu ierni 2 27 E Installing the BJ Cartrid 26 s cscccscsessssesecsessesnscesssessensedensesestesuartaceeosensedes 2 29 BJ Cartridge Guidelines cscs aiindcisdninnnisariaiinees 2 29 e Installing the BJ Cartridge in the MultiPASS C70 cccee 2 31 e Storing a BJ Cartridge in its Contaiher ssns 2 37 G Loading Papeles ann ar ase RE ten sia arsine 2 39 amp Paper Guidelines keinin a E RRE 2 39 e Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray ccccccesceseeeeteeees 2 40 QC Testing the Multi PASS CZO prin Ee TE 2 44 2 2 Setting Up Your MultiPASS C70 Chapter 2 Choosing a Location for Your MultiPASS C70 Before unpacking your MultiPASS C70 follow these guidelines to choose the best location for it Please review the information provided in Important Safety Instructions gt p 1 18 to make sure you are installing your MultiPASS C
246. situations Q If your output is blank Q If your colour printouts appear to be missing a colour even after you have cleaned the print head five times as described on page 12 17 Q If the message BLACK INK EMPTY or COLOR INK EMPTY appears in the LCD display Use the procedure on the following page to replace an old BJ cartridge or change the BJ cartridge to a different one 12 18 Maintenance Chapter 12 You only need to replace the BC 21e Colour BJ cartridge when the print head is damaged or after printing approximately 2000 pages If one of the BJ tanks either colour or black in your BC 21e Colour BJ cartridge runs out of ink refer to the procedure on page 12 26 to replace the BJ tank 1 For optimum printing results and to avoid printing problems Canon recommends that you use the Canon BC 21e Colour BJ cartridge the Canon BX 20 Black BJ cartridge or the optional Canon BC 22e Photo BJ cartridge with your MultiPASS C70 1 When replacing BJ tanks in the BC 21e Colour BJ cartridge Canon recommends that you use the Canon BCI 21 Colour and the Canon BCI 21 Black BJ tanks iN Note Replacing the BJ Cartridge Replace the BJ print cartridge as follows Ai The steps in this section show replacing the BC 21e Colour BJ cartridge with the BX 20 Black BJ cartridge However please note that the procedure oe is the same for replacing the optional BC 22e Photo BJ cartridge 1 Make sure the MultiPASS C70
247. snsssesdsensesessssedeesaseerenseseasaseanesessdeckesarabades 5 13 GUI delIhes s d cadena circ ainda S 5 13 Loading Envelopes esminis E E tenn EEA 5 15 Using Canon s Specialty Papers ccccccceccccesesesssneesesesneneteescseesescsesnans 5 18 Specialty Paper Guidelines siressa girre eeren E EE E AEE 5 18 Uncurling Back Print FON issnin eieiei 5 19 viii Contents Printing on High Resolution Paper HR 101 cceeececeeeseseeteene 5 21 Using the Paper Output Guides ccccccecescesesteteeseeeeneeseetenens 5 21 Using the Cleaning SHeet iiss sucs csctessesessescssnssseeres sesso sasaatoasesdectenaentsees 5 22 Printing on Fabric Sheet FS 101 ccscsssesscscsnesessesssecsseansnsacsesscsansestnens 5 24 Printing on Banner Paper cccscssscssssessssesssssacsesessstasesessensesnsassesesansseneaes 5 26 Chapter 6 Speed Dialling What is Speed Dialling riiete riea e eE E EEEE 6 2 Speed Dialling Methods cccecsessesesessesssesesceneesssesnsnensseseeeesescscseanenens 6 2 One Touch Speed Dialling nn nssnscnsten R EA 6 2 Coded Speed Dialling nesorssrenranensne nner 6 2 Group Dialling sisser esistessero ENE EE wats 6 2 One Touch Speed Dialing s sssscscssssssassssessescssassacesssncecesestapenderessssenesonstenssions 6 3 Registering Numbers for One Touch Speed Dialling 0 c ee 6 3 Changing Deleting a One Touch Speed Dialling Entry 00 6 6 Using One Touch Speed Dialling sssrini 6 9 Coded Speed Dialling rsisi ineei
248. ssesssensaasessescesneesenseses 3 12 What is Sender Information ns iss cctciircnesteeeieirseneratianassecnien 3 12 Entering the Date and Time c cceccccccececscseenetesesesneneeseesenesescsesnans 3 14 Registering Your Fax Number and Unit Name ccccccceseeseenes 3 15 Printing a List to Check the Sender Information ccccceeeee 3 18 Setting the Telephone Line Types kssr r aaa iari 3 19 Chapter 4 Document Handling Document Requirements for Faxing Copying and Scanning 4 2 Scanned Image Aredii ndcsicii nds Sri Ei EEr nanan 4 4 Selecting Automatic Manual Document Feed ou cee reer 4 5 Loading Documents for Automatic Feed ccceccccccsceeeseeteneeseseees 4 6 Trouble With Multipage DOCUMEntS s sessrssitssiiserssrosesssisssisssnuiesssstass 4 9 Adding Pages to the DOCUMENL ccsccceeeseteseststeteeseeteteseseetenens 4 10 Loading Documents for Manual Feedh sssri 4 11 Chapter 5 Paper Handling Print Media Requirements entrene T E EREE 5 2 Printable Areas neronekin E E EE aT Eae 5 3 Fapt S kerea E R E RE E R 5 3 BNVClOP OS ies ers cansrssssrse sorts svesenteoenra E E EEN 5 4 Selecting Print M di ississsisnissitiis es ha i aeeie eE e EE a i E EEES 5 5 Print Media Guidelines ssss csessssssssscsssssd sesdesticasaacentascesesensstendenesosseastoeatersossen 5 9 Setting the Paper Thickness Lever csssssssscsssccssesssncnsssceceansssneesanceatecnsnens 5 10 Loading Pa Pers scasisseccesssseescsseteesesenta
249. ssstasaonstadies dosia 2 24 Inside VIEW sssssiiescecsidisiesans Hasna eene n En E EE E EEE EE NEAS NEEN EEES 2 24 lEt ao E E EEE E 2 24 Operation Panel sorosiane a E a E 2 25 Special Function BUTONS sgo E E 2 27 Installing the B Cartridge snessiysenan n EE ETTE 2 29 B Cartridge Guidelines snena E EEEE 2 29 Installing the BJ Cartridge in the MultiPASS C70 wn ccc 2 31 Storing a BJ Cartridge in its Container 2 37 Loading Paper ssessscscsacsssiteecsssesessessadasis cssissesendede tossed bssesesansvssesasteptasieeasedossbens 2 39 Paper Guidelines s dace nisin Acedia acne 2 39 Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray cccceseesesceeessseeneene 2 40 Testing the MultiPASS C70 ironin seise nei ieste E EO niet 2 44 Chapter 3 Registering Information in the MultiPASS C70 Methods for Registering Information in the MultiPASS C70 0 04 3 2 Guidelines for Entering Information Via the Operation Panel 3 3 Using the One Touch Speed Dialling Special Function Buttons 3 4 Understanding and Accessing the MeNnusS cccccssesessseeesesesteneens 3 5 Returning to a Previous Level cccccccsecsesssseesesseteteseseesessseecensnens 3 7 Returning Directly to Standby MOde srssisiseiinsnenssr ss 3 7 Contents vii Entering Numbers Letters and Symbols cccccceesese cesses 3 8 Correcting a Mistake iss lt is isianidicnnivnnninaiadn inline 3 11 Registering Sender InfOrmMatiOn csssessesessessscesaveere
250. stall the BJ cartridge and try your operation again In either case if the error does not clear try unplugging the unit Wait several minutes then plug it back in Also try installing a new BJ cartridge Clear the paper jam gt p 13 6 and reload paper in the multi purpose tray Press the Resume button Clean the BJ cartridge print head gt p 12 17 If the message remains in the LCD display replace the BJ tank gt p 12 26 The unit will then print automatically any faxes received in memory Press the button to print the colour document in black amp white or press the button to cancel printing 13 10 Troubleshooting Chapter 13 UEST DIALING DOC TOO LONG DOCUMENT READY ECM RX ECM TX Error Code 003 Cause The unit is dialling the receiving fax machine It took more than 32 minutes to send or copy a document It took more than 32 minutes to receive a document The document is longer than 1 metre The document in the Automatic Document Feeder ADF is ready for faxing scanning or copying The unit is receiving a fax using Error Correction Mode ECM The unit is sending a fax using Error Correction Mode ECM Action Press the Stop button if you want to cancel the transmission Divide the document and send or copy each part separately Contact the other party Have them divide the document and send each part separately Use
251. stered be sure to press Set after ae making a selection or entering information Stop 7 When you have finished changing settings press Stop to return to standby mode Ex 15 00 FaxOnly Chapter 14 Summary of Settings 14 7 Report Settings Menu Name Description Settings TX REPORT Enable disable automatic printing of the transmission PRINT ERROR ONLY report OUTPUT YES PRINT ERROR ONLY Prints the transmission report only OUTPUT NO when a transmission error occurs OUTPUT YES Prints the transmission report every time you send a document OUTPUT NO Turns off the transmission report feature PRINT WITH If you choose OUTPUT YES or PRINT ERROR ONLY ON OFF IMAGE enable disable printing of the first page of the fax with the transmission report RX REPORT Enable disable automatic printing of the reception report PRINT ERROR ONLY PRINT ERROR ONLY Prints the reception report only OUTPUT YES when a reception error occurs OUTPUT NO OUTPUT YES Prints the reception report every time you receive a document OUTPUT NO Turns off the reception report feature ACTIVITY REPORT Set the AUTO PRINT setting for the activity report feature AUTO PRINT Enable disable automatic printing of the activity report after ON OFF every 20 transactions Default settings are shown in bold type The TX Report cannot be printed with the first page of a colour fax The message The color fax image is not printed on thi
252. strong enough to support its weight approx 5 4 kg 1 Do not install the MultiPASS C70 near devices that contain magnets or generate magnetic fields such as speakers Chapter 2 Setting Up Your MultiPASS C70 2 3 Dimensions Make sure the location you choose provides enough space around the MultiPASS C70 for adequate ventilation and to allow paper to flow freely into and out of the unit Install the MultiPASS C70 approximately 10 cm away from walls and other equipment The figures below show the dimensions of the unit 2 4 Setting Up Your MultiPASS C70 Chapter 2 Unpacking Your MultiPASS C70 Follow the directions below to unpack your MultiPASS C70 properly and to make sure you have all of its components and documentation Before unpacking the MultiPASS C70 be sure to read the instructions below for lifting the unit Lifting the MultiPASS C70 When lifting the MultiPASS C70 out of the box or when you need to move the unit be sure to do the following b 3 gt Q ke 5 o n MultiPASS C70 1 Hold the unit firmly and keep it level 1 Lift the unit from the bottom Chapter 2 Setting Up Your MultiPASS C70 2 5 Do You Have Everything As you unpack the MultiPASS C70 save the carton and packing material in case you want to move or ship the unit in the future Carefully remove all items from the box You should have someon
253. switching temporarily to tone dialling and dial tone detection Dialling Through a Switchboard Function s Se 01 Data Registration Set Cc A PBX Private Branch Exchange is an on site telephone switchboard If your unit is connected through a PBX or other telephone switching system you have to dial the outside line access number first and then dial the number of the party you are calling To facilitate dialling through a switchboard you can register the access type as well as the outside line access number under the R button so that you only need to press the Function button and the R button before dialling the fax telephone number you want to reach The procedure below explains how to register the R button Registering the Access Type and the Outside Line Access Number Under the R Button Follow this procedure to register the access type and the outside line access number under the R button 1 Press Function 2 Press Data Registration DATA REGSTRATION 3 Press Set USER SETTINGS 9 2 Special Features Chapter 9 Set 0802 am Set 08 02 c gt Set 0802 am Press Set again DATE amp TIME Use V or A to select R KEY SETTING R KEY S ETTING Press Set 1 The current setting is displayed Use V or A to select PBX Press Set Ex PSTN n O b 3 o IL S Q 2 HOOKING Use V or A to select t
254. t 0 Some papers have a right side for printing If the print quality is not as clear as you would like it to be try turning the paper over and printing on the other side 13 26 Troubleshooting Chapter 13 Printing Problems The Alarm light comes on and the unit beeps while printing The unit may have a paper jam D Ea 7 2 Fa 2 n 1 Clear the paper jam gt p 13 6 1 If the unit has no paper jam unplug it wait five seconds then plug it in again If the problem is fixed the Alarm light will turn off the BJ cartridge will move to its home position on the right side of the unit and the LCD display will return to standby mode If the Alarm light remains lit contact your local authorised Canon dealer or the Canon help line Data from the PC is not printed The power cord may not be plugged in securely 1 Check that the power cord is plugged securely into the unit and into the wall outlet gt p 2 20 If the unit is plugged into a power strip make sure the power strip is plugged in and turned on The parallel cable may not be securely connected to the MultiPASS C70 and the PC 1 Check the parallel cable connection p 2 15 The parallel cable may not be the correct type 1 Make sure the cable is a Centronics compatible parallel cable with bi directional capability IEEE 1284 compliant and is less than 2 metres in length The unit may have been plugged in or the
255. t gt Buttons Move the cursor left or right when registering data Report Button gt pp 3 18 6 26 6 29 11 5 Prints reports containing information registered in the unit and information on transactions 1 D T Button gt p 9 9 Allows you to confirm a dial tone in the middle of a fax telephone number d Cleaning Button gt pp 5 23 12 15 12 17 Prints the nozzle check pattern and performs cleaning operations for the BJ cartridge print head and unit rollers 4 Clear Button Clears an entire entry when registering information T Function Button Light gt p 3 4 Switches between the special function buttons and the one touch speed dialling buttons To use the special function buttons press this button to turn on its light To use the one touch speed dialling buttons press to turn off its light T Set Button Selects a menu setting and registers information during data registration 1 Resume Button Form feeds paper when printing and resumes printing after an error is corrected This feature is not available in Australia and New Zealand 2 28 Setting Up Your MultiPASS C70 Chapter 2 Installing the BJ Cartridge This section explains how to install the BJ cartridge in the MultiPASS C70 so that you can begin using your unit For more details on BJ cartridges and BJ tanks refer to BJ Cartridge on page 12 12 LA The MultiPASS C70 comes with one BX 20 Black BJ cartridge and one BC 21e Colour
256. t can also send faxes in colour to fax machines with colour capability Before sending a document you need to adjust whether the document will be sent in colour or in black amp white only To send in black amp white Make sure the light above the Color B amp W button is turned off If not press the Color B amp W button to turn it off To send in colour to fax machines that support colour fax reception Press the Color B amp W button to turn on the light above this button Q If you send a colour document to a fax machine that does not support colour faxing the document will not be sent and the LCD display will show this message TRY AGAIN IN B W Try sending again in black amp white 1 You can also adjust the resolution for colour and black amp white transmission p 7 4 Chapter 7 Sending Faxes 7 3 A Note O Color B amp W ae Resolution ae Resolution lt D Setting the Scanning Resolution Resolution is a measure of the fineness or clarity of a printout Low resolutions may cause text and graphics to have a jagged appearance while higher resolutions provide smoother curves and lines crisp text and graphics and a better match to traditional typeface designs You can set the scanning resolution for the documents you send The higher the resolution the higher the quality of output but the slower the scanning speed For black amp white sending set the resolution as
257. t reports The MultiPASS C70 may have the BC 21e Colour BJ cartridge installed and its black BJ tank may be empty 1 Replace the black BJ tank gt p 12 26 The MultiPASS C70 may have the optional BC 22e Photo BJ cartridge installed I The MultiPASS C70 cannot print reports while the optional BC 22e Photo BJ cartridge is installed Replace the BJ cartridge with the BX 20 Black or BC 21e Colour BJ cartridge gt p 12 19 Nothing appears in the LCD display The power cord may not be plugged in securely 1 Check that the power cord is plugged securely into the unit and into the wall outlet gt p 2 20 If the unit is plugged into a power strip make sure the power strip is plugged in and turned on If the display remains blank unplug the MultiPASS C70 wait five seconds then plug it in again Chapter 13 Troubleshooting 13 35 If a Power Cut Occurs If power is suddenly lost due to an outage or accidental unplugging a built in battery retains the user data settings and the speed dialling settings However any sent or received documents stored in memory will be lost During a power cut functions are limited as follows 1 You cannot make telephone calls 1 You cannot send receive or copy documents 1 You can only use the MultiPASS C70 to receive telephone calls if you connected the handset a telephone or an extension phone to your unit When power is restored to the MultiPASS C70 the unit will
258. tain photographs This scans areas of the document that contain photos with 64 levels of grey and results in a much better reproduction of the photograph Chapter 10 Making Copies 10 3 Ai 11 When copying in colour you can set the unit to print on plain paper or high resolution paper gt p 10 5 Note 1 You cannot use the optional BC 22e Photo BJ cartridge to make black amp white copies Ll For copying speeds see page A 7 Function 5 If you want to reduce the size of the copies press Function o8 o2 6 Use V or A to select the reduction percentage you want FP R a You can select 70 80 90 or 100 Ex COPY 80 gl 7 Ifyou want to make multiple copies use the numeric buttons to enter the number of copies 1 You can make up to 99 black amp white copies 1 You can only make one colour copy at a time Ex COPY 80 05 Satsen 8 Press Start Scan to begin copying COPY QO To stop copying press Stop You may then need to open the operation panel to remove the document p 13 4 IN If MEMORY FULL appears in the display while you are making multiple copies of a document you will be unable to use the multiple copy feature for copying the document Instead you will need to make single copies of the document as many times as required To correct this situation print out any documents stored in memory p 7 29 Note 10 4 Making Copies Chapter 10 Setting the Paper Type
259. testebveseses 14 9 Accessing the TX Settings Mensis sreiiei isisi 14 9 TX Settings MENU ssesescissscesesssssestsesisntesecassspbsstesasensesescesesansedsrsnsiazes 14 10 A RX Reception Settings siseses ies 14 11 e Accessing the RX Settings Menu creere reits EKTn r re 14 11 RX Settings MOM seinien ris nE eapeodhebesees 14 12 Le Printer SetHNoS kurie inre E EEE A EEEE EEEE 14 13 e Accessing the Printer Settings Menisrsesensersrineoo 14 13 e Printer Settings Ments sarnice nicennsinchananien ada ntarns 14 14 EV System SOLIS ssscesssdnsconessasledasessasceatnssenseescscasseristadendussosesasaasetsnnesegses 14 15 Accessing the System Settings Menu sssssisseisssessrrorsisnereresses 14 15 s Systema Settings Meni sssccsscssessessossssessecessetesaeneasassasescsbesussdectsnaeotes 14 16 Chapter 14 Summary of Settings 14 1 The MultiPASS C70 Settings To customise the MultiPASS C70 to your particular needs you can adjust the general operation sending receiving printing system settings and speed dialling settings There are two methods of adjusting these settings Method 1 Using the MultiPASS C70 operation panel You can adjust settings directly via the operation panel of the MultiPASS C70 Detailed instructions are described in this guide Adjusting settings through the operation panel is convenient when you do not have your MultiPASS C70 connected to a PC Method 2 Using the MultiPASS Desktop Manager You can adjust
260. the MultiPASS C70 isorinis E Ene aE EE ESER R 1 3 Colour and Plain Paper Fax Features cccccsscesesseseteessesescsescenenens 1 4 PC Colour Fax Features iiir errs Neen EE N Ea EE EER EEN 1 6 Colour Copier Features ccsscsesssccesesceseseeseneesstecsessassensgeetosss tics setsersiaess 1 7 Telephone Peatutes aincidesnc ah dd t SEE SRE rr E EN ESERE REE EEEE 1 7 Colour Printer Features cissie eine seindah hasto vedas Macarecesvseedte ste KEER 1 8 Colour Scanner Feat y S mnisi eniri eones iea nE er E 1 9 Using the MultiPASS C70 With the MultiPASS Desktop Manager for Win OWS sensis srnpis asa n E EEE EEEE E SEENE 1 10 Hardware and Software Requirements ssas eiken 1 10 DUP PLES saate eE AEREE A E E E E EE 1 11 BJ Cartridges and BJ TaNkS siisisiiiiisisgisissnsistnasnsssisarsiass sinisiraan tana 1 11 Special Print Media sneer a A sor aar receiver lecoeruncenteeantas 1 12 Using Your Documentation cscsicscssaicssssessosiscrcsesvesssrcssnvesssscieaassrssctenies 1 13 How to Use This Guid cssssasasccsessssessasessoeessasanssdestedesesshscoresesvesssondeattons 1 13 Type Conventions Used in This Guide issssirseiseissisirsseiiis 1 15 Customer SUPPOTE sccsesdsseccssesessseensnans tate saeasesedeasussofiaserch sosssvesesradehsoccasaaeettees 1 17 Important Safety InstructtOns isesi eie e ioiei seen riasenie 1 18 Chapter 2 Setting Up Your MultiPASS C70 Choosing a Location for Your MultiPASS C70 s ss sesssssrssesserssieserisersnnsssee 2 3
261. the MultiPASS C70 attempts to redial I The time interval between redialling attempts The factory default settings for the automatic redialling features are as follows e The MultiPASS C70 redials twice e The MultiPASS C70 waits two minutes before redialling IN Note 1 You can also set the automatic redialling feature from the MultiPASS Desktop Manager MultiPASS Suite Software User s Guide Follow the procedure below to adjust the automatic redialling settings Function 1 Press Function 01 2 Press Data Registration 0 DATA REGSTRATION Data Registration Set 3 Press Set USER SETTINGS 08 2 4 Use V or A to select TX SETTINGS ca Cc lt gt TX SETTINGS Set 5 Press Set ECM TX 0 7 20 Sending Faxes Chapter 7 08 02 c gt Set Set Set Set Set 10 Use V or A to select AUTO REDIAL 2 g E f AUTO REDIAL s to S xe Press Set 3 02 Ex O 1 If OFF is selected use V or A to select ON Press Set REDIAL TIMES Press Set again 1 The current setting is displayed Ex i 2TIMES Use the numeric buttons to enter the number of times you want the unit to redial Ex 1TIMES J You can select from 1 to 2 times T The default setting is twice Press Set to register your new setting REDIAL INTERVAL Press Set again 1 The current setting is displayed
262. the TWAIN standard Chapter 1 Introducing the MultiPASS C70 1 9 Using the MultiPASS C70 With the MultiPASS Desktop Manager for Windows Canon s MultiPASS Desktop Manager for Windows allows you to use the MultiPASS C70 s faxing telephone printing and scanning functions directly from your PC LA Note For more details on using your MultiPASS C70 with the MultiPASS Desktop Manager refer to the MultiPASS Suite Software User s Guide The MultiPASS Desktop Manager is designed to operate with Windows 95 98 and NT 4 0 Hardware and Software Requirements Before you start make sure you have the following PC setup These are the minimum requirements OO O O m IBM or compatible computer with a Pentium 90 processor or higher An Intel Pentium processor is recommended Microsoft Windows 95 98 or NT 4 0 For Microsoft Windows NT 4 0 Service Pack 3 or later 32 megabytes MB of RAM 64 MB of RAM is recommended 60 megabytes MB of available hard disk space 150 MB of available hard disk space is recommended CD ROM drive or access to one over a network connection 256 colour SVGA monitor or greater Bi directional shielded IEEE 1284 compatible parallel cable 2 metres in length or shorter For assistance on purchasing the correct cable contact your local authorised Canon dealer 1 10 Introducing the MultiPASS C70 Chapter 1 Supplies Your MultiPASS C70 uses Canon s Bubble
263. the styrofoam sheet 4 Gently close the operation panel until it clicks into position Chapter 2 Setting Up Your MultiPASS C70 2 11 Assembling the MultiPASS C70 Follow the instructions in this section to assemble your MultiPASS C70 and prepare it for full operation To see how the MultiPASS C70 will look fully assembled refer to Main Components of the MultiPASS C70 gt p 2 23 Attaching the Document Support The document support holds documents as they feed into the Automatic Document Feeder ADF With the curve of the document support sloping outwards fit the tabs of the document support into the slots above the Automatic Document Feeder ADF Be sure to attach the document support so that it curves outwards Otherwise it may cause difficulty in opening the printer cover and CAUTION may cause damage to the unit 2 12 Setting Up Your MultiPASS C70 Chapter 2 Attaching the Extension and Document Tray The document tray and extension catch documents as they come out of the MultiPASS C70 after being scanned Attach the extension to the document tray and then the document tray to the unit as explained below LA Be sure to attach the extension to the document tray before attaching the 5 5 document tray to the unit are Note 2 2 ge 1 Hold the extension so that it curves outwards and slide it into the Z rails on the back of the document tray Then slide the inner sectio
264. ther print media Q Set to the right X71 for envelopes and Canon Fabric Sheet FS 101 co 5 J I a Chapter 5 Paper Handling 5 11 4 Press El 1 The cartridge holder moves to its home position on the right side of the unit Do not try to manually move or stop the cartridge holder as this may damage the MultiPASS C70 CAUTION 5 Close the printer cover 5 12 Paper Handling Chapter 5 Loading Paper A You can stack paper in the multi purpose tray to feed it automatically into the MultiPASS C70 Details on loading paper are explained in Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray on page 2 40 Refer also to page 5 2 for details on other types of print media you can load in the multi purpose tray Certain environmental conditions such as extreme temperatures or humidity can cause some print media to feed incorrectly in the multi THIR purpose tray If you have trouble with print media becoming skewed or multiple sheets being fed do not load a stack of the media in the multi purpose tray but feed one sheet at a time Guidelines When automatically feeding a stack of paper in the multi purpose tray follow these guidelines 1 Do not leave paper stacked in the multi purpose tray for long periods of time longer sheets of paper may become bent or curled over time This may cause the paper to misfeed or jam 1 If your printed page contains a large amount of gra
265. tiPASS C70 and briefly explains how to browse through the menus and find items you want You will also find instructions for entering your sender information which you may want to register before using your unit LY Methods for Registering Information in the MultiPASS C70 3 2 E z 1 Guidelines for Entering Information Via the Operation Panel 3 3 amp e Using the One Touch Speed Dialling Special Function 25 I GE ONIN eecerteeaa tei spavicinurpesetnviseeestsncake ea teil tan inenteruvoreae 3 4 a e Understanding and Accessing the Menus c cccccecceseeeseensens 3 5 Pe Returning to a Previous Level sorrara enn o E 3 7 Returning Directly to Standby Mode sesers siinsesse 3 7 e Entering Numbers Letters and Symbols c cccceecsseseestenetens 3 8 Correcting a Mistake srsgssre pi in EEEE 3 11 C1 Registering Sender Information sisirin teisiin 3 12 What is Sender IDformation sessirnir 3 12 Entering the Date and TiMie sisssiiiironeasiei enssins 3 14 e Registering Your Fax Number and Unit Name ccceeeceee 3 15 e Printing a List to Check the Sender Information cscc 3 18 C1 Setting the Telephone Line Typ sss nki erp iae 3 19 Chapter 3 Registering Information in the MultiPASS C70 3 1 Methods for Registering Information in the MultiPASS C70 To customise the MultiPASS C70 to your particular needs you can adjust the general operation sending receiving printing system
266. tiPASS C70 will wait for the dial tone Use the numeric buttons to enter the rest of the number This feature is not available in Australia and New Zealand Chapter 9 Special Features 9 9 Restricting Use of the MultiPASS C70 By enabling the restriction feature of your MultiPASS C70 you can prevent unauthorised people from making calls and sending faxes Enabling Restriction of the MultiPASS C70 To restrict use of the MultiPASS C70 you need to enable the LOCK PHONE feature To prevent access to the LOCK PHONE setting you need to register a password Set the PASSWORD and LOCK PHONE settings as follows Function 1 Press Function ZEN 01 2 Press Data Registration Ca Data Registration DATA REGSTRATION Set 3 Press Set Cc USER SETTINGS 08 o2 4 Use V or A to select SYSTEM SETTINGS ca CS V A SYSTEM SETTINGS Set 5 Press Set co UN LOCK PHONE Set 6 Press Set again 0 PASSWORD 9 10 Special Features Chapter 9 Set 7 Press Set again PASSWORD 0 8 Use the numeric buttons to enter a four digit password PASSWORD 1234 x 9 Press Set LOCK PHONE Set 10 Press Set again OFF n O b 3 o IL S Q 2 08 02 11 Use V or A to select ON ca cS lt gt O Set 12 Press Set to register your setting Stop 13 Press Stop to return to standby mode Ex 157 00 FaxOnly Res
267. tination 7 23 e Sending a Document Using Group Dialling 7 26 A Delayed Sending ineens trr Eiern ESEE NE E RT EEEN 7 27 e Sending Other Documents While the MultiPASS C70 is Set for Delayed Sending srsorenisr irern 7 27 Chapter 7 Sending Faxes 7 1 o x LL D a Yn A Documents Stored in MeMOTY ccseeesessesescsceceseseseeneteseseseeneneseeeenes 7 28 e Printing a List of Documents in Memory cccccceseseesteteteneees 7 28 Printing a Document in MeMOLY c ccc esesesceeeeeseseseseeneeees 7 29 Deleting a Document From Memory ccccesecsesceeceeseseeneneneees 7 33 7 2 Sending Faxes Chapter 7 Preparing to Send a Fax Documents You Can Fax N x LL D S Yn For information on the types of documents you can fax their requirements and details on loading documents refer to Chapter 4 Document Handling Adjusting the Quality of Your Faxes O Color B amp W lt 2 gt lt Color B amp W T gt Note Canon s Ultra High Quality UHQ imaging technology enables you to send documents that are very close to the quality of the original The MultiPASS C70 allows you to send a document in colour or black amp white and to adjust the resolution and contrast to best suit your particular document Setting Colour or Black amp White Transmission Your MultiPASS C70 can send faxes in black amp white I
268. ting is disabled the unit will switch to fax receive mode when it detects a period of silence I Enable the INCOMING RING setting in the RX SETTINGS menu gt pp 14 11 14 12 Chapter 13 Troubleshooting 13 23 Copying Problems The MultiPASS C70 will not make a copy A BJ tank in the BC 21e Colour BJ cartridge may be empty 11 Replace empty BJ tanks as necessary p 12 26 You may be trying to make copies with the incorrect BJ cartridge installed in the unit 1 The MultiPASS C70 cannot make copies in black amp white while the optional BC 22e Photo BJ cartridge is installed Replace the BJ cartridge with the BX 20 Black or BC 21e Colour BJ cartridge d The MultiPASS C70 cannot make copies in colour while the BX 20 Black BJ cartridge is installed Replace the BJ cartridge with the BC 21e Colour BJ cartridge The handset or the handset of the telephone or extension phone may be off hook d Make sure the handset is in its cradle The document may not have been fed correctly into the Automatic Document Feeder ADF d Remove the document stack it if necessary and feed it into the Automatic Document Feeder ADF correctly gt pp 4 6 4 11 LY Make sure the operation panel is closed LY Check that the document feed lever is set for the type of document you are copying gt p 4 5 The BJ cartridge or a BJ tank may not be installed properly 0 Make sure the BJ cartridge and the BJ tank s are insta
269. tion 4 Press Tone to switch to tone dialling Ex TEL 7654321T 1 When Tone is pressed T is displayed in the LCD display 1 If you pressed Hook in step 1 you can pick up the handset if you need to talk to the other party Chapter 9 Special Features 9 7 5 Use the numeric buttons to enter the numbers requested by the information service Ex TEL 7654321134 Q Numbers entered after pressing Tone will be dialled using tone dialling Hook 6 When you have finished press Hook to disconnect the call gt T If you used the handset or telephone hang up the handset to disconnect the call OQ Tone dialling is cancelled when you disconnect the call 9 8 Special Features Chapter 9 Confirming a Dial Tone This feature allows you to set the MultiPASS C70 to listen for and detect a dial tone in the middle of a fax telephone number before dialling the rest of the number This is called Dial tone detection 09 Use this feature only when you register a number for speed dialling for example 1 During speed dialling registration when you come to a step that requires you to enter a fax telephone number for dialling use the numeric buttons to enter the first part of the number before dial tone detection is required Ex _ Press Function o 3 G IL S Q Q 2 Press D T for dial tone detection Ex _ LJ A small dot shows where the Mul
270. tion in the MultiPASS C70 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Document Handling This chapter gives details on the requirements for documents you can feed into your MultiPASS C70 Whether you are faxing copying or scanning a document read this section carefully for information on the types of documents you can feed and instructions on loading documents for your specific needs D Document Requirements for Faxing Copying and Scanning 4 2 Scammed nna Se Area sis dese Sosesstaaseadcesesndiesessavacs cacesaesesansetsssites nee SES 4 4 LI Selecting Automatic Manual Document Feed 0 ccc eee 4 5 e Loading Documents for Automatic Feed ccc cece eeeees 4 6 Trouble With Multipage Documents ccccsccceeseeeeseseseenenens 4 9 Adding Pages to the Documenlssosinsnsa 4 10 Loading Documents for Manual Feed ccccccccecccesesesteteseseeeetesees 4 11 Chapter 4 Document Handling 4 1 y co o ES osc o S T Document Requirements for Faxing Copying and Scanning The documents you feed into the Automatic Document Feeder ADF for faxing copying and scanning must meet the following requirements When the document feed lever is set for automatic document feed Size Maximum 216 mm x Approx 1 m W xL Minimum 210 x 148 mm Quantity Up to 20 A4 size 20 letter size or 10 legal size sheets 1 sheet for sizes other than the above Thickness 0 08 to 0 13 mm All sheets should be of the same thic
271. tional BC 22e Photo BJ cartridge to produce photo realistic prints from your MultiPASS C70 Banner Paper Banner paper is specifically designed for printing one continuous sheet in a banner format The connected sheets are divided by perforations and you can print from two to six sheets at one time Canon Banner Paper is specially designed for use with Bubble Jet printers and produces bright and vivid colour images High Resolution Paper Canon High Resolution Paper HR 101 is designed to produce near photographic quality print output with sharp and vivid graphics For best results use Canon High Resolution Paper HR 101 with the optional BC 22e Photo BJ cartridge to produce images comparable to your favourite photographs When using this paper be sure to print on the whiter side of the sheets and after printing a pack of this paper use the cleaning sheet provided with it to clean the unit s rollers Bubble Jet Paper water resistant Canon Bubble Jet Paper LC 301 has been developed for high quality printing with minimal or no smearing or running when in contact with water or damp surfaces making it a good choice for damp environments Images printed on this paper are bright and vivid and will not run if liquid is spilled on them This paper also stands up to normal office highlighters unlike images printed on other paper The paper is specially coated and printable on both sides 5 6 Paper Handling Chapter 5 Fabric Sheets Use t
272. tions used in transaction reports ST TIME USAGE T PGS RESULT Represents the time the last attempt was made to transmit a document Represents the amount of time it took to transmit The usage time is also printed in the Result column of the Activity Report along with any error codes Represents the total number of pages that were successfully transmitted OK means all pages were transmitted either during the first attempt or after the first or second retry The default which is two retries can be changed gt p 7 20 NG means that either some pages or no pages were transmitted after two retries The default which is two retries can be changed p 7 20 11 4 Reports and Lists Chapter 11 Activity Report Follow this procedure to print a list of the previous 20 transactions 07 2 Press Report Cc Set 3 Press Set PRINTING REPORT The unit starts printing an Activity Report in the standard format with all transactions listed chronologically 27 12 2000 15 00 FAX 123 4567 CANON 001 stad ACTIVITY REPORT FES ST TIME CONNECTION TEL CONNECTION ID NO MODE PGS RESULT 27 12 13 43 905 795 1111 Canon CANADA 5001 AUTO RX ECM 1 OK 00 33 27 12 13 45 905 795 1111 Canon CANADA 5002 AUTO RX ECM 1 OK 0024 27 12 13 51 03 3758 2111 Canon TOKYO 0001 B CAST ECM 3 OK 01 18 27 12 14 05 2 887 0166 Canon AUSTRALIA 0001 B CAS
273. to 3 7 definition 1 15 summary 14 3 14 4 understanding 3 5 to 3 7 Menu system See also Menu and individual menus Understanding 14 3 14 4 Messages 13 7 to 13 15 See also individual messages MID PAUSE SET setting 14 10 Mistake correcting 3 11 Modem See Data modem Multi TX RX Report 11 2 11 8 Multi purpose tray 2 23 capacity 5 2 clearing jams 13 6 loading paper in 2 40 to 2 43 MultiPASS C70 2 6 2 7 assembling 2 12 to 2 14 back view 2 24 choosing location for 2 3 2 4 cleaning 12 4 to 12 11 components 2 6 2 7 2 23 to 2 28 connecting to PC 2 15 2 16 dimensions 2 4 fax number 3 15 to 3 17 Index front view 2 23 guidelines 12 2 12 3 inside view 2 24 lifting 2 5 12 3 multitasking 1 3 8 27 operation panel 2 23 2 25 to 2 28 registering information in 3 2 restricting use 9 10 9 11 serial number 13 2 settings 14 2 See also individual setting names testing 2 44 transporting 12 32 12 33 unit name 3 15 to 3 17 unpacking 2 5 to 2 8 User s Guide 1 13 1 14 2 7 using with MultiPASS Desktop Manager 1 10 MultiPASS Desktop Manager hardware requirements 1 10 receiving to 8 4 8 18 registering information via 3 2 14 2 software 1 10 software requirements 1 10 using with MultiPASS C70 1 10 version number 13 2 Multitasking 1 3 8 27 N NET SWITCH setting 8 20 8 23 14 12 Network FAX TEL switching Australia 8 4 8 19 to 8 21 New Zealand 8 4 8 22 to 8 24 New Zealand network FAX TEL s
274. to a fax machine with colour capability press Color B amp W to turn on its light gt p 7 3 Q If necessary you can adjust the resolution and contrast gt pp 7 4 7 6 Hook 2 Press Hook TEL 1 You can also lift the handset or the handset of the telephone or extension phone connected to your unit instead of pressing Hook QM You can adjust the volume of the speaker gt LINE MONITOR VOL pp 14 5 14 6 7 12 Sending Faxes Chapter 7 3 4 O 5 Start Scan 6 Dial the other party s fax telephone number Ex _ TEL 7654321 C1 Use one of the dialling methods described earlier in this chapter p 7 8 o x LL D S lt o 2 T If you make a mistake during dialling press Hook or put down the handset and start again from step 2 When you hear the other party answer the call pick up the handset and you can talk m If you pressed Hook in step 2 instead of lifting the handset you will hear the other party s voice but they will not be able to hear you through the speaker Pick up the handset to talk to the other party Q If you hear a high pitched signal instead of the other party s voice press Start Scan If you picked up the handset to dial hang up the handset The unit will begin sending the document When you are ready to send the document ask the other party to press the start button on their fax unit When you hear the high pitched signal of the
275. to the multi purpose tray change the BJ cartridge or BJ tank clear the paper jam or install the correct BJ cartridge gt p 8 28 D c fe Ea 7 w is n Start the procedure again from the beginning Try sending again in black amp white gt p 7 3 Try sending again Write the number down if you will need it later If sending a document the unit continues to send the fax as memory becomes available Allow the unit to cool down The unit will resume printing when it has cooled down Chapter 13 Troubleshooting 13 15 Paper Feeding Problems Paper does not load The multi purpose tray may contain too many sheets 1 Make sure the paper stack in the multi purpose tray does not exceed the paper limit mark Pl p 2 42 Paper may not be loaded correctly 1 Make sure the paper stack is loaded properly in the multi purpose tray and that the paper guide is adjusted correctly p 2 40 Paper is loaded skewed Printing is skewed Paper may not be loaded correctly 1 Make sure the paper stack is loaded properly in the multi purpose tray and that the paper guide is adjusted correctly p 2 40 D Make sure the right edge of the paper stack is aligned with the right side of the multi purpose tray and the paper guide is aligned with the left edge of the stack I Make sure the paper exit path is clear Multiple sheets load into the unit at the s
276. triction of the MultiPASS C70 is now enabled No one can make calls or send faxes This setting does not restrict incoming calls and faxes Chapter 9 Special Features 9 11 Cancelling Restriction of the MultiPASS C70 If you have previously set a password and enabled the LOCK PHONE setting follow this procedure to cancel restriction of the MultiPASS C70 Function 1 Press Function 01 2 Press Data Registration DATA REGSTRATION 0 Data Registration Set 3 Press Set USER SETTINGS 08 o2 4 Use V or A to select SYSTEM SETTINGS ca Cc SYSTEM SETTINGS Set 5 Press Set UN LOCK PHONE E Set 6 Press Set again 0 PASSWORD 7 Use the numeric buttons to enter the four digit password you previously registered PASSWORD 9 12 Special Features Chapter 9 Set 8 Press Set PASSWORD 0 Set 9 Press Set again CD Ex PASSWORD 1234 1 The currently set password will be displayed Set 10 Press Set again LOCK PHONE Set 11 Press Set again 0 n O b 3 IL S Q Q 2 08 02 12 Use V or A to select OFF ca cS OFF Set 13 Press Set to register your setting co DATE SETUP Stop 14 Press Stop to return to standby mode Ex 15 00 FaxOnly Restriction of the MultiPASS C70 is disabled Anyone can make calls or send faxes Chapter 9 Special Features 9 13 9 14 Special Features Chapter
277. tridge by its sides only Do not touch the print head the sharp edges around the print head the silver plate on the bottom of the BJ cartridge or the silver metal or circuit area on its side PRINT HEAD DO NOT TOUCH HOLD HERE The BJ cartridges included with your MultiPASS C70 may vary depending on the country of purchase 12 14 Maintenance Chapter 12 Testing and Cleaning the BJ Cartridge Print Head The print head in the BJ cartridge contains nozzles through which ink is propelled onto the paper To maintain the best possible print quality these nozzles need to be cleaned from time to time Your MultiPASS C70 is equipped with a print head cleaning function that does this Printing the Nozzle Check Pattern Before cleaning the print head you may want to print the nozzle check pattern to test the BJ cartridge installed in the MultiPASS C70 This test shows if each print head nozzle is operating properly Follow this procedure to print the nozzle check pattern Function 1 Press Function 10 2 Press Cleaning Cleaning NOZZLE CHECK Set 3 Press Set CD T The MultiPASS C70 prints the nozzle check pattern When the BC 21e Colour BJ cartridge is installed the pattern includes all four colours yellow magenta cyan and black In the colour pattern you will notice that lines are missing between the colours This is
278. u with an electronic Address Book that allows you to create a list of people with their fax telephone numbers Application program Software prepared for a specific function or set of functions Examples include word processing programs and the MultiPASS Desktop Manager Developers who make application programs include drivers that support different types of printers Auto FAX TEL switching See FAX TEL switching Automatic dialling Dialling fax or telephone numbers by using a shortcut of pressing one or three buttons To use automatic dialling you must register the numbers See also One touch speed dialling Coded speed dialling Group dialling and Address Book Glossary Automatic Document Feeder ADF The device included in the MultiPASS C70 that automatically feeds the document being faxed copied or scanned into the MultiPASS C70 Glossary G 1 Automatic image reduction The MultiPASS C70 can print the date time name or company name and a fax telephone number at the top of the faxes it receives To prevent this information from crowding the faxed image on the page and possibly lengthening the fax the MultiPASS C70 automatically reduces the size of the image on the page Automatic redialling When the receiving fax machine is busy the MultiPASS C70 waits a specified time and then automatically redials the number You define the number of times the unit redials and the length of time between redialling B
279. ultiPASS C70 begins receiving the fax LA D You can change the number for the remote receiving ID 00 to 99 or turn the feature off REMOTE Rx pp 14 11 14 12 The unit will make a beeping sound if the handset is not hung up properly This is called the offhook alarm and can be turned off gt OFFHOOK ALARM pp 14 5 14 6 1 Be sure to hang up the handset after you press the Start Scan button or dial the remote receiving ID for remote receiving otherwise the call will be disconnected Note 1 If you have an answering machine connected to your MultiPASS C70 that can carry out remote control operations controlling your answering machine from a remote telephone the security code for this function may be the same as the two digit ID code described above If so make sure you change the MultiPASS C70 s two digit ID code to make it distinct from the answering machine s security code REMOTE Rx pp 14 11 14 12 Chapter 8 Receiving Faxes 8 15 Receiving With an Answering Machine ANS MACHINE MODE Connecting an answering machine to the MultiPASS C70 allows you to receive faxes and telephone messages while you are out of the office In ANS MACHINE MODE the MultiPASS C70 allows the answering machine to answer incoming calls then listens for the fax tone and automatically receives the fax if it detects this tone Setting ANS MACHINE MODE N For this mode you need to connect an answering machine o
280. unit and black ink only Use this optional cartridge when you will be printing with black ink only and for fast five pages per minute printing When you run out of ink you replace the complete cartridge 1 BCI 21 Black BJ Tank Sold separately Replace the black BJ tank in the BC 2le Colour BJ cartridge when the black ink runs out 1 BCI 21 Colour BJ Tank Sold separately Replace the colour BJ tank in the BC 21le Colour BJ cartridge when the colour ink runs out The BJ cartridges included with your MultiPASS C70 may vary depending on the country of purchase Depending on the country of purchase the BCI 21 Black BJ tank may be included with your MultiPASS C70 12 12 Maintenance Chapter 12 1 BC 22e Photo BJ Cartridge Sold separately Contains the print head unit and colour and black inks Use this optional BJ cartridge when you want to produce photo realistic colour printing When used with Canon s High Resolution Paper HR 101 this BJ cartridge produces images comparable to photographs When you run out of ink you replace the complete cartridge LA I For optimum printing results and to avoid printing problems Canon recommends that you use the Canon BC 21e Colour BJ cartridge the Canon BX 20 Black BJ cartridge or the optional Canon BC 22e Photo BJ cartridge with your MultiPASS C70 1 When replacing BJ tanks in the BC 21e Colour BJ cartridge Canon recommends that you use the Canon BCI 21 Co
281. urpose tray Then slide the paper guide snugly against the left edge of the stack Q Insert the envelopes with the print side up 1 Feed the top of the envelope return address portion into the multi purpose tray first D Make sure the back flap is towards the multi purpose tray ke 3 c vj I o T a The MultiPASS C70 is now ready to print envelopes Chapter 5 Paper Handling 5 17 Using Canon s Specialty Papers This section provides guidelines for printing on Canon s specialty papers and describes special procedures required for high resolution paper fabric sheets and banner paper Specialty Paper Guidelines LA Be sure to read any instructions that come with your Canon specialty paper These instructions provide important information regarding how ii to achieve the highest print quality with these papers Follow these guidelines 1 When feeding transparencies or back print film remove each sheet after it is delivered being careful not to touch the document tray or extension Do not allow film sheets to stack up in the output tray Should you dirty the document tray or extension when removing the sheets wipe them clean with a clean soft lint free cloth moistened with water or diluted dishwashing detergent solution 1 Let the printed sheets of film or paper dry completely before storing them Paper Type Drying Time Canon High Gloss Film HG 101 10 minutes Canon Glossy P
282. ut Note Q lt fe 2 Chapter 12 Maintenance 12 31 Transporting the MultiPASS C70 Whenever you plan to transport the MultiPASS C70 you need to prepare it so it will not be damaged during the move 1 2 10 DO NOT remove the BJ cartridge from the unit Make sure the cartridge holder is in its home position on the right side of the unit T If it is not in its home position press the El button inside the unit With the cartridge holder on the right side of the unit tape the BJ cartridge and cartridge holder to the side of the unit Disconnect the power cord Disconnect the handset or telephone Disconnect the extension phone answering machine or modem if using them Then disconnect the telephone line and the parallel cable to the PC Remove the document tray Then remove the extension from the document tray p 2 13 Remove the document support p 2 12 Remove the handset handset cradle and cradle support from the MultiPASS C70 gt Appendix B Handset Replace all tapes and shipping materials you removed when you first unpacked the MultiPASS C70 p 2 9 Pack the MultiPASS C70 and all its components into its original shipping carton Use the illustration on page 2 6 for reference 12 32 Maintenance Chapter 12 Ai 11 Do not remove the BJ cartridge from the MultiPASS C70 or ship a BJ cartridge or a BJ tank from which you have removed the pr
283. utton Network Switch Appendix A Specifications A 7 Printer Printing Method Bubble Jet ink on demand Paper Handling Automatic feed Multi Purpose Tray Capacity Auto Feed Only Maximum thickness of stacked paper 10 mm Plain paper A4 Letter Legal Glossy photo paper Banner paper High resolution paper Bubble Jet paper Fabric sheets Transparencies Back print film High gloss film Envelopes European DL or U S Commercial No 10 Paper Size A4 paper Letter paper Legal paper Banner paper European DL envelope U S Commercial No 10 envelope 75 g m paper Approx 100 sheets 10 mm stack 1 sheet 1 sheet 2 to 6 long Approx 10 sheets Approx 100 sheets 10 mm stack 1 sheet 50 sheets 10 sheets 1 sheet 10 envelopes 210 x 297 mm 8 27 x 11 69 in 215 9 x 279 4 mm 8 5 x 11 in 215 9 x 355 6 mm 8 5 x 14 in 210 x Max 1800 mm 220 x 110 mm 8 66 x 4 33 in 241 3 x 104 1 mm 9 5 x 4 1 in A 8 Specifications Appendix A Media Type Glossy photo paper Banner paper High resolution paper Bubble Jet paper Fabric sheets Transparencies Back print film High gloss film Envelopes Assortment Paper Weight 64 to 105 g m Print Speed BC 21e Colour BJ Cartridge Draft mode Standard mode BX 20 Black BJ Cartridge Draft mode Standard mode Print Width Maximum 203 2 mm Resolution Colour 720 x 360 dpi Recommended
284. ved colour faxes A 10 Specifications Appendix A Printable Area Envelopes The shaded portion in the following illustrations show the printing area for envelopes 220 mm 8 66 3 mm 0 12 110 mm EUROPEAN DL 4 33 IE 7 mm 0 28 6 4 mm 0 25 10 4 mm 0 41 FEED DIRECTION 241 3 mm 9 5 3mm 0 12 o fa 2 2 i U S COMMERCIAL NO 10 7 mm 0 28 6 4 mm 0 25 31 4 mm 1 24 FEED DIRECTION Appendix A Specifications A 11 BJ Cartridges BC 21e Colour BJ Cartridge Print head 64 nozzles for black 24 nozzles for each colour cyan magenta yellow Print head life Approx 2 000 colour pages at 30 coverage BJ tanks BCI 21 Colour cyan magenta yellow BCI 21 Black Ink colour Black cyan magenta yellow Cartridge yield Approx 80 pages BX 20 Black BJ Cartridge Print head 128 nozzles Ink colour Black Cartridge yield Approx 1000 pages BC 22e Photo BJ Cartridge Print head 64 nozzles for black 24 nozzles for each colour cyan magenta yellow Ink colour Black cyan magenta yellow Cartridge yield Approx 22 pages At 7 5 coverage Based on Canon FAX Standard Chart No 1 Based on Canon Standard Pattern Chart A 12 Specifications Appendix A Scanner Scanning Method Solid state electronic scanning by contact image sensor Scanni
285. versely affect operation of the unit and or cause print quality deterioration CAUTION SS A CIRCUIT BOARD 7 GUIDE RAIL aS S 7 J ROUND SHAFT RIBBON CABLE 2 32 Setting Up Your MultiPASS C70 Chapter 2 3 Raise the blue cartridge lock lever on the cartridge holder by gently pulling up on it J 3 gt os e Q 72 MultiPASS C70 4 Peel the cover off the new BJ cartridge s protective packaging and remove the BJ cartridge Chapter 2 Setting Up Your MultiPASS C70 2 33 Hold the BJ cartridge by its sides only Do not touch the print head the sharp edges around the print head the silver plate on the bottom CAUTION of the BJ cartridge or the silver metal or circuit area on its side HOLD HERE PRINT HEAD DO NOT TOUCH 5 Lift the orange cap off the BJ cartridge s print head then remove the orange tape CAP TAPE Ai 1 Spilled ink can stain any surface protect yourself and your work area Note 1 Discard the cap and tape immediately Never attempt to reattach the cap or tape to the print head or you can adversely affect the ink flow or quality of the ink colour 2 34 Setting Up Your MultiPASS C70 Chapter 2 6 Hold the BJ cartridge so that its label faces outwards then slide it into the cartridge holder Q Be careful not to touch the silver plate on the bottom of the BJ cartridge or t
286. witch to uppercase or lowercase letter mode A Uppercase letter mode Or Lowercase letter mode 2 Press the numeric button that contains the letter you want C1 Press repeatedly until the letter you want appears If you go past the letter you want you will have to keep on pressing the button until it reappears Ex C A 1 Refer to the table on the previous page if you are unsure which button to press for the letter you want Chapter 3 Registering Information in the MultiPASS C70 3 9 3 Continue entering other letters using the numeric buttons If the next letter you want to enter is under a different numeric button simply press to select uppercase or lowercase letter mode then press the numeric button that contains the letter you want and press repeatedly until the letter you want appears Or If the next letter you want to enter is under the same numeric button you just pressed press gt to move the cursor to the right Then press to select uppercase or lowercase letter mode and press the same numeric button repeatedly until the letter you want appears 1 To enter a space press Space To enter numbers 1 Press repeatedly to switch to number mode CANON _ 1 Number mode 2 Press the numeric button for the number you want i CANON 1_ 1 To enter a space press Space 3 Continue entering other numbers using the numeric buttons CANON 10_ 3 10 Registe
287. witching 8 4 8 22 to 8 24 NO ANSWER message 13 14 NO RX PAPER message 13 14 NO TEL message 13 14 NOT AVAILABLE message 13 14 Nozzle check pattern printing 12 15 12 16 Number mode 3 8 3 9 3 10 Numbers entering 3 8 3 9 3 10 Numeric buttons 2 25 2 26 O OFFHOOK ALARM setting 14 6 One touch speed dialling 6 2 7 8 buttons 2 25 2 26 changing entry 6 6 to 6 8 deleting entry 6 6 to 6 8 list 6 26 6 27 11 3 registering 6 3 to 6 5 using 6 9 6 10 One touch speed dialling buttons 2 25 2 26 using 3 4 Operation panel 2 23 2 25 to 2 28 guidelines for entering information via 3 3 to 3 11 registering information via 3 2 14 2 OUTPUT NO setting 14 8 Output tray 2 23 extension 2 23 OUTPUT YES setting 14 8 I 10 Index OUTSIDE IMAGE setting 14 6 P Paper assorted starter kit 5 7 banner 5 2 5 6 5 26 to 5 31 Bubble Jet 5 2 5 6 fabric sheets 5 2 5 7 5 18 5 24 5 25 feeding problems 13 16 13 17 glossy photo 5 2 5 6 5 18 guide 2 23 guidelines 2 39 high resolution 5 2 5 6 5 21 to 5 24 jams 13 6 limit mark Pl 2 42 loading 2 39 to 2 43 5 13 5 14 plain 5 2 5 5 printable area 5 3 requirements 5 2 rest 2 23 setting type for colour copying 10 5 10 6 specialty 5 18 to 5 31 Paper output guides 2 23 using 5 21 5 22 PAPER SIZE setting 14 14 Paper thickness lever 2 24 setting 5 10 to 5 12 Parallel cable 2 8 connecting 2 15 2 16 Parallel interface port 2 15 2 16 2 24 PASSWORD setting 9 10
288. with any Windows application that also supports TWAIN TX See Sending U UHQ Ultra High Quality An exclusive Canon digital image processing system that incorporates 64 shades of grey along with a special edge enhancement feature which ensures that text and photos are transmitted with ultimate clarity G 14 Glossary El button 2 24 button See Tone button lt button 2 27 2 28 gt button 2 27 2 28 A button 2 27 V button 2 27 O Redial Pause button 2 25 2 26 7 17 9 6 blmark 2 42 1 Touch Spd Dial List 6 27 11 3 printing 6 26 6 27 A Activity Report 11 2 11 5 ACTIVITY REPORT setting 11 5 14 8 Alarm light 2 25 2 26 ALARM VOLUME setting 14 6 ANS MACHINE MODE 8 3 setting 8 16 using an answering machine 8 17 Answering machine connecting 2 19 jack 2 19 2 24 receiving with 8 3 8 16 8 17 using 8 17 Area printable 5 3 5 4 scanning 4 4 Assembling 2 12 to 2 14 Assorted paper starter kit 5 7 Index Attaching document support 2 12 document tray 2 13 2 14 Australia network FAX TEL switching 8 4 8 19 to 8 21 AUTO PRINT setting 14 8 AUTO REDIAL message 13 7 setting 7 21 14 10 Automatic document feed loading documents 4 6 to 4 8 requirements for documents 4 2 4 3 selecting 4 5 Automatic Document Feeder ADF 2 23 adding pages to document in 4 10 capacity 4 2 clearing jams 13 4 13 5 loading documents 4 6 to 4 8 4 11 4 12 removing document from 7 15 7 16 Automatic rediall
289. ype when printing or copying in colour PLAIN PAPER HIGH RES PAPER BOTTOM MARGIN Select the length of the lower margin for colour printing colour copying and printing of received colour faxes NORMAL The bottom margin is longer than the bottom margin of a black amp white printed page 21 mm SMALLER The bottom margin is the same length as the bottom margin of a black amp white printed page 7 mm NORMAL SMALLER Default settings are shown in bold type 14 14 Summary of Settings Chapter 14 System Settings Accessing the System Settings Menu ATS 01 2 Press Data Registration DATA REGSTRATION 2 jo i Data Registration gt E E i Set 3 Press Set co USER SETTINGS 08 o2 4 Use V or A to select SYSTEM SETTINGS ca Cc SYSTEM SETTINGS Set 5 Press Set UN LOCK PHONE 6 Refer to the table on the following page and follow these guidelines to select and register settings T Use V or A to move through the settings QO To register a setting or access sub settings press Set 1 To return to a previous level press Data Registration In order for your settings to be registered be sure to press Set after ae making a selection or entering information Stop 7 When you have finished changing settings press Stop to return to standby mode Ex 15 00 FaxOnly Chapter 14 Summary of Settings 14

Canon C70 All in One Printer User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents